MINISTRY OF ROAD TRANSPORT & HIGHWAYS Govt. of

Ras--Mandal Road National Highway158

Start Point - Ras Km 0+000

Beawar

End Point - Mandal Km 116+900

Environmental Impact Assessment and Environment Management Plan

Revised Draft Report November 30, 2019 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.1 Project Background ...... 1.2 Project Location ...... 1.3 Environmental Screening and Project Salient Features ...... 1.4 Objective of Project ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.5 Objective of EIA Study ...... 1.6 Approach and Methodology ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.6.1 Reconnaissance Survey ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.6.2 Desk Review ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.6.3 Review of Applicable Environmental RegulationsError! Bookmark not defined. 1.6.4 International Agreements ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.6.5 Assessment of Alternatives ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.6.6 Assessment of Baseline Environmental Profile . Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.6.7 Assessment of Impacts ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.6.8 Consultations ...... 1.6.9 Environment Management and Monitoring Plan Error! Bookmark not defined. 1.7 Structure of the Report ...... 2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.1 Project Profile ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.2 Alignment ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.3 Existing Road Features and Constraints ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.3.1 Dense Built Up Areas & Settlements ...... 2.3.2 Right of Way ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.3.3 Deficient Vertical and Horizontal Geometry and Improvement ...... 2.3.4 Deficient Cross Drainage Structures and Improvements ...... 2.3.5 Safety of the Users ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.4 Network Connectivity and Alternate Route Study ...... 2.4.1 to ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.4.2 to Chittorgarh ...... 2.4.3 Bikaner to ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.5 Cargo Mapping ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.6 Traffic Study...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.6.1 Estimated Traffic ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.7 Design Speed ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.8 Porposed Structures ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.8.1 Major and Minor Bridge ...... 2.8.2 Vehicular Under Pass (VUP) ...... 2.8.3 Toll Plazas ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.9 Right of Way (RoW) ...... 2.10 Typical Cross Sections ...... 2.11 Pavement ...... 2.12 Embankment Design ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.13 Bypasses and Realignments ...... 2.14 Service roads ...... 2.15 Other Structures ...... 2.15.1 Pedestrians ...... 2.15.2 Wayside Amenities ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.15.3 Bus bays and Truck lay-bys ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.15.4 Drainage ...... 2.16 Road Safety ...... 2.16.1 Road Accident Black Spot Identification and Removal Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.16.2 Remedies and Improvements for Black Spot Removal Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.16.3 Road User Safety Solutions ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.16.4 Pedestrian Safety ...... 2.16.5 Road Safety Schedule and Traffic Calming Measures Error! Bookmark not defined. 2.17 Raw Materials and Use of Fly Ash ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 3 Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework 4 Description of Environment ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.1 General ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.2 Study Area ...... 4.3 Physical Environment ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.3.1 Topography ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.3.2 Geology ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.3.3 Seismicity ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.3.4 Natural Hazards and Vulnerability ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.4 Climate and Meteorology ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.4.1 District wise Rainfall ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.4.2 Climate variability over Rajasthan ...... 4.4.3 Meteorological Scenario of Project Area ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.5 Land Use ...... 4.6 Terrain ...... 4.7 Soil ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.7.1 Sampling Methodology ...... 4.7.2 Results & Analysis ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.8 Ambient Air Environment & Quality ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.8.1 Monitoring Station and Methodology ...... 4.8.2 Results & Analysis of Ambient Air Quality ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.9 Ambient Noise Level ...... 4.9.1 Monitoring Station and Methodology ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.9.2 Results & Analysis of Noise Monitoring ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.10 Water Resources ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.10.1 Ground Water Availability...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.10.2 Ground Water Quality ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.10.3 Results & Analysis of Ground Water Samples .. Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.10.4 Surface Water Quality ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.10.5 Results & Analysis of Surface Water Samples .. Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.11 Biological Environment ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.11.1 Protected Areas ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.11.2 Forest ...... 4.12 Socio-Economic Profile ...... 4.12.1 Socio Economic Profile – Rajasthan ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.12.2 ...... 4.12.3 District ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 4.12.4 ...... 4.12.5 District ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 5 POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS & MITIGATION PLAN ...... 5.1 Introduction ...... 5.2 Environmental issues to be considered for project road Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.3 Type of Impacts of project road ...... 5.4 Physical Environment ...... 5.4.1 Land ...... 5.4.2 Geology ...... 5.4.3 Meteorological Parameters ...... 5.4.4 Ambient Air Quality ...... 5.4.5 GHG Emission ...... 5.4.6 Water Resources ...... 5.4.7 Noise levels ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.8 Management of Debris/ Waste ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.9 Biological Environment ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.10 Impact on Protected Monuments and Cultural Heritage Sites Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.11 Impacts of Construction Workers Camps and Immigration Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.12 Economic Impacts Construction Stage...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.13 Transport and Storage of Materials Construction Phase Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.14 Human Health and Safety Pre-construction Stage ...... 5.4.15 Social Environment ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.16 Risk from Electrical Equipment ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.17 Enhancement Measures ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 5.4.18 Green Belt Development ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7 Consultation with Key Stakeholders ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.1 Public consultation ...... 7.1.1 Definition of Stakeholder ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.1.2 Types/ Categories of Stakeholders ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.1.3 Process of Stakeholder Consultation ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.1.4 Levels of Consultations ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.1.5 Methodology Adopted ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.1.6 Types of Consultations ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.1.7 Major Findings from Consultation ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.1.8 Stakeholder Analysis Matrix ...... 7.1.9 Conclusion / Recommendations ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 8 ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME ...... 7.1 General ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.2 Monitoring Indicators ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.3 Monitoring of Earthworks Activities ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.4 Monitoring of Concessionaire / Contractor's Facilities, Plant and Equipment .. Error! Bookmark not defined. 7.4.1 Environmental Monitoring Plan ...... ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 8.1 General ...... 8.2 INSTITUTIONAL ARRANGEMENT FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION ...... 8.2.1 PROPOSED IMPLEMENTATION SETUP ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 8.2.2 CONTRACTOR/ CONCESSIONAIRE...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 8.2.3 Environmental Expert ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 8.2.4 Monitoring Consultant (MC) ...... 8.2.5 REPORTING SYSTEM ...... 8.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CAPACITY BUILDING ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 8.4 Budget ...... Error! Bookmark not defined. 9 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ...... Error! Bookmark not defined.

List of Acronyms

AMSL Above Mean Sea Level ASI Archaeological Survey of India BOD Biological Oxygen Demand BP Pariyojana BOQ Bill of Quantities CCE Chief Controller of Explosives CGWB Central Ground Water Board CoI Corridor of Impact CPCB Central Pollution Control Board CO Carbon Monoxide CO2 Carbon Dioxide COD Chemical Oxygen Demand CoI Corridor of Impact COP Conference of the Parties COPA Conditions of Particular Application CPCB Central Pollution Control Board CSC Construction Supervision Consultant CSR Corporate Social Responsibility CWW Chief Wildlife Warden dB(A) Decibel (A) DEAC District Expert Appraisal Committee DEIAA District Level Environmental Impact Assessment Authority DFO Divisional Forest Officer DPR Detailed Project Report E-coli Escherichia coli EC Environmental Clearance EHS Environmental, Health and Safety EA Environmental Assessment EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EMF Environment Management Framework EMP Environment Management Plan EO Environmental Officer ESR Environmental Screening Report FIDIC Fédération Internationale Des Ingénieurs-Conseils GHG Green House Gas GNHCP Green National Highways Corridor Project GoI Government of India IAHE Indian Academy of Highway Engineers ICB International Competitive Bidding IRC Indian Roads Congress IS Indian Standards K Potassium Km Kilometer LPI Logistics Performance Index m Meter MDR Major District Road MoEFCC Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change, Govt. of India MoRTH Ministry of Road Transport and Highways, Govt. of India MT Metric Ton N Nitrogen NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality Standards NBWL National Board for Wildlife NCB National Competitive Bidding NGHM National Green Highways Mission NGO Non-Governmental Organization NH National Highways NHDP National Highways Development Program NHAI National Highways Authority of India NHIIP National Highway Interconnectivity Improvement Project NOC No Objection Certificate

NO2 Nitrogen Dioxide ODR Other District Road OP Operational Policies P Phosphorous PAP Project Affected Person Pb Lead PCU Passenger Car Units PDO Project Development Objective PIC Project-in-Charge PIU Project Implementation Unit PM10 Particulate Matter 10 PM2.5 Particulate Matter 2.5 PMC Project Management Cell PWD Public Works Department RAP Resettlement Action Plan RO Regional Officer, MoRTH RoW Right of Way SBD Standard Bidding Document SEAC State Expert Appraisal Committee SEIAA State Level Environmental Impact Assessment Authority SH State Highways SIA Social Impact Assessment

SO2 Sulphur Dioxide SPCB State Pollution Control Board TA Technical Assistance ToR Terms of Reference WB The World Bank WMM Wet Mix Macadam

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

1.1 Project Background

The Public Works Department (PWD) National Highway (NH) division, under Ministry of Road Transport & Highways, MORT&H intends to develop and maintain National Highway 158 (declared as National Highway in year 2013) connecting Ras-Beawar--Mandal in the State of Rajasthan as part of the proposed Green National Highways Corridor Project. The objective of the project is to rehabilitate and upgrade the existing road to two lanes/four lanes with paved shoulders.

1.2 Project Location

The project starts from Ras (26°18'18.80"N Latitude, 74°11'17.42"E Longitude) and ends near Mandal (25°26'09.49"N Latitude, 74°35'54.06"E Longitude) connecting to National Highway 48. Project road is located in Pali, Ajmer, Rajsamand and Bhilwara districts of Rajasthan. The existing length of highway is 115.020 km, excluding the overlapping sections of National Highway 8 and Shree Cement Road. If these sections are included, the existing length of the corridor is about 134 km. Figure 1.1: Key Map showing Location of the Project Road

Source: Design Report

Page | 1 - 1

The project corridor traverses through a rolling terrain and primarily has poor geometry except for few interim stretches where curve improvements will not be required. The project road connects important towns/settements like Ras, Jagatiya, Bhagatpura, Babra, Roopnagar, Beawar, Laxmipura, Nimba Hera, Asind, Badnor and Mandal.

1.3 Needs and Justification for Road Improvement

The project road Ras-Beawar-Asind-Mandal, part of National Highway 158 is currently a two-lane configuration with hard shoulders. The major constraints or challenges of utilizing the current facility are: • Poor Geometry • Right of Way Constraints • Existence of Dense Built-up and Settlements along the road • Poor Condition of the Existing Pavement • Deficient and feeble condition of existing Cross Drainage Structures • Issues pertaining to safety of Road Users The project road traverses through 23 major built-up/settlements along its length. The project road passes through important towns/villages like Ras, Jagatiya, Bhagatpura, Babra, Roopnagar, Beawar, Laxmipura, Nimba Hera, Asind, Badnor and Mandal. The presence of these settlement affects the flow of traffic due to reduction in speed. The traffic passing through these sections also creates potential hazard for pedestrians. There is a constraint of improving or upgrading the current road on account of unavailability of land in the built-up sections. In this sections acquisition of ROW for widening / redevelopment is very difficult due dense settlements. Rehabilitation and Resettlement will be more if existing road is widened to Four lane or Two lane with paved shoulder. Therefore, realignments and Bypasses are proposed are below mentioned locations in order to provide a safe and congestion free passage to road users. The existing alignment predominantly passes through barren land and traverses through patches of dense urban built up sections. Alignment comprises of 96 nos. sharp horizontal curves and blind spots. The following table provides the location of deficient geometry along the project road. There are 4 major and 97 minor junctions on existing alignment. The deficient/substandard horizontal curves are improved by providing the required radius as per the codal provision for the design speed of 80kmph/100kmph. The curves are improved for maximum possible radius. The existing alignment predominantly passes through barren land and traverses through patches of dense urban built up sections. Alignment comprises of 16 nos. of deficient vertical curves and blind spots. In view of above constraints, there is imperative needs of improvement and upgradation of the road from Ras-Beawar-Asind-Mandal, part of NH 158.

Page | 1 - 2

1.4 Benefits of Upgradation of the Project Road

The Project road connects major centres like Bikaner, and Merta in Northern Rajasthan, Jodhpur and Pali in the Western Rajasthan, , Ajmer and on Western side and Bhilwara, Chittorgarh, Rajsamand, Nathdwara and Udaipur on Southern Rajasthan. The main industries are based on Minerals, Agriculture and Textiles. Many prominent chemical and engineering industries are located in Southern Rajasthan. Rajasthan is also eminent in Mining. Makrana is a hub for White Marbles. Rajasthan has rich salt deposits at Sambhar, Copper Mines at Khetri, Jhunjhunu. Zinc mines at Dariba, Zawar Mines near Bhilwara. Jodhpur leads in Handicrafts and Guar Gum industry. The population of Bikaner, Nagaur, Jodhpur, Pali, Rajsamand Udaipur, Chittorgarh, Bhilwara, Kota and Ajmer will be broadly influencing regions on the project road. The project stretches once upgraded will provide shortest route to connect North and North west part of Rajasthan to South East Rajasthan. The project road provides connectivity to major tourist spots of Nagaur, Ajmer and Chittorgarh. The project road will provide straight route connectivity to Chittaurgarh and further going to Mandsaur and Indore in . On the north of project road, it connects to Nagaur and Bikaner via Merta. Road section in between Merta and Ras is already 4 lanes with paved shoulder. The major commodity movement which is found on the Project road are a) Food grains and other agricultural products (Rice, wheat, pulses, maize, chilly, sugarcane, sugar, cotton), b) Cement, c) Textiles, d) Fruits and Vegetables and e) Mined Materials The major markets in and around the project influence regions and approached by the project road are Rajsamand, Bhilwara, Pali, Jodhpur, Beawar, Ajmer, Chittorgarh, Bikaner, Jaipur. The table below shows the commodities dealt from the different markets. Central Warehouse Corporation (CWC) warehouses are located at Beawar, Udaipur, Bikaner, Deoli, Kota and Baran. The image below shown the location of all the CWC warehouse in Rajasthan. The major mandi on the project road is located at Beawar. The CWC warehouse is located on the Beawar Bypass portion of NH-8. This warehouse is well connected with NH-8 by an access road of two lane with paved shoulder configuration. Also, there is no restriction of heavy loaded trucks in the city. So, the goods will be transported directly using multi axle vehicles which in turn will reduce the fuel consumption leading to reduction of pollution and overall transportation cost. The project road will provide improved connectivity to these warehouses and mandis. The project road will be upgraded based on the Green Highway Concept by adopting the following green interventions: • After tree cutting, the green cover to be restored specifying the locations • Water conservation, harvesting, channelization of water, water storage • Less carbon consumption, low heat cement, use of Flyash etc. in pavement and structures • Borrow Area Redevelopment • Re Utilisation of excavated materials • Water conservation measures through drainage structures. Existing Storage ponds to be

Page | 1 - 3

• Redeveloped • Solar Light Provision in all habituated stretches • Adoption of Climate Resilient measures like Hydrology, Drainage Plan and Protective works, Slope protection for High Embankments, Temperature Resilient Grade of Bitumen, Raising of Deficient Section, Surface drains Other direct and macro level benefits of the project road are given below:

Direct Benefits

• Fast and Safe Connectivity • Decongestion of traffic on the road • Savings in fuel, travel time and total transportation cost of road users. • Reduction in road accidents. • Reduction in pollution due to constant flow and segregation of traffic from other roads

Macro Level Benefits

• Employment opportunity to people. • Development of local industry and handicrafts. • Quick transportation of agricultural produce and perishable goods. • Improved quality of life for people

1.5 Objectives of the EIA Study

The EIA study has been carried out with the following objective: • Ensuring environmental factors are considered in the decision-making process • Ensuring that possible adverse environmental impacts are either avoided or minimized and brought to acceptable level • More informed decision making by involving public since the beginning of project, informing the public about the proposal, allowing people to examine the underlying need for a project and giving them opportunity to identify problem and suggesting environment friendly locally available solutions to the identified problem • Improved integration of projects into their environmental and social setting • A contribution towards achieving goal of sustainable development • Facilitates the design of a monitoring program to check the adequacy and Implementation of mitigate measures

Page | 1 - 4

1.6 Approach and Methodology

This EIA study has been undertaken based on EIA Notification 2006 (amended thereof), Environmental Impact Assessment Guidance Manual for Highways of MOEF&CC and the World Bank policies/guidelines for environmental and social safeguards. Sections below summarise the methodology adopted for the assessment of environment for the project.

1.6.1 Reconnaissance Survey

Reconnaissance site visits were carried out by consultants to have a feel of study area and identify the key environment issues associated with proposed improvement.

1.6.2 Desk Review

The consultants reviewed the project documents, prototype studies, available literature, National Environmental Guidelines, World Bank Environmental Assessment Guidelines and Design Report. Accordingly, prelim screening of the project has been undertaken as per World Bank Guidelines for categorization of the project.

1.6.3 Assessment of Alternatives

With and without project scenarios have been assessed. The assessment of alternatives included that of Process Technology (Pavement, cross-sections, etc.), sources of materials from an environmental management perspective, selection of alignment, etc. All the feasible alternatives are discussed in this EIA Report.

1.6.4 Assessment of Baseline Environmental Profile

Environmental baseline data on topography, physiography, geology, soil, surface and ground water resources and quality, meteorology & climatology, ambient air quality, ambient noise levels, land use pattern, biological environment (flora and fauna) and socio-economic conditions were collected for preparation of EIA report. Secondary data such as Survey of India Topo-Sheets, District Planning Maps, Forest Working Plans, booklet of Central Ground Water Board, details of Archaeological Monuments etc. have been collected from various secondary sources. Further, secondary data, which are relevant to understand the baseline as pertaining to physical and biological environments has been collected and reviewed for the proposed project. Data pertaining to all facets of environment which include physical, ecological and socioeconomic environment, both through primary and secondary sources were collected. Ambient air & noise, ground and surface water samples were monitored at various locations along the project corridor. The monitoring and analysis of each component were carried out as per MoEF&CC and CPCB guidelines. The results of the monitoring were compared with the relevant environmental standards.

Page | 1 - 5

Key relevant information sources have been summarized in table below.

Table 0-1: Primary and Secondary Information Sources

Parameters Information Source

Technical information Design Report

Inventory of features like water Bodies, Total station surveys, Google Earth, Bhuvan, Community structures, environmentally Survey of India Maps, Primary Transect Walk sensitive locations areas, congested locations etc.

Climatic Condition & Meteorological Indian Meteorological Department, Districts data Groundwater Brochure of CGWB, Primary data collection

Geology, Seismicity, Soil and Districts Groundwater Brochure of CGWB, Topography Seismicity data available of National Disaster Management Authority Website and Primary survey & Investigation

Land Use / Land Cover Survey of India Toposheet, Google Earth, Bhuvan and Ground Trothing

Drainage Pattern Survey of India Toposheet, Districts Groundwater Brochure of CGWB, field observation and consultation with stakeholders

Ecology & Biodiversity and Onsite survey, Forest office/wildlife office, identification of Forest Area Research generals and forest working plan

Ambient air quality, noise, soil and Onsite monitoring and Analysis of Field samples, water SPCB & CPCB published data

Borrow Areas, quarries and other Material Surveys construction material source

River geo-morphology, hydrology, Water resource Dept., Districts Groundwater drainage, flood patterns Brochure of CGWB, outcome of the consultation and field observations

Socioeconomic Environment Census of India 2001 & 2011 and Public Consultation during the field visits

Source: Design report and primary and secondary survey

Page | 1 - 6

In order to quantify the impacts of the project road on various receptors, a receptor identification survey was carried out. The receptors included the information for educational institutes, hospitals, cultural & religious properties, community properties, water bodies, major pollution generating sources, ecological components etc.

1.6.5 Assessment of Impacts

Assessment of potential impacts has been carried out based on the project design and baseline environment data as collected from primary and secondary sources. Assessment of the environmental impacts was carried out to ascertain the direct and indirect impacts likely to be induced due to proposed development. The general impacts are land acquisition, forest area diversion and allied impacts on society, dust and air pollution due to removal of structures, loss of trees and vegetation, other impacts from construction activities such as noise pollution, impacts on the local ecology and on water resources. For each impact predicted, feasible and cost-effective mitigation measures have been suggested to reduce adverse environmental impacts up to acceptable levels.

1.6.6 Consultations with Key Stakeholders

The consultations on environmental issues with community members, institutional stakeholder and Project Affected Persons in the form of Focused Group Discussions, stakeholder meetings, etc. were carried out. Consultation process were involved both formal and non-formal discussion. The feedback generated through these meetings has been incorporated as far as possible in the design of the highway. The consultation process shall continue even during the implementation stage to gauge the general opinion.

1.6.7 Environment Management Plan

All affirmative action’s not only to avoid and deter but also to capitalize on the opportunities provided by the project in order to improve the environmental conditions have been deliberated. The various mitigation and enhancement measures proposed have been included in the report. Based on their applicability, both general and case specific measures were incorporated. The EMP action plan has been prepared to detail out the implementation plan of the proposed mitigation and enhancement measures. Monitoring indicators have been identified to have a continuous check on impacts associated with project activities.

1.6.8 Structure of the EIA Report

The EIA report for the project road has been prepared complying country regulations and The World Bank Guidelines for Environmental Assessment. The EIA report has been structured in the following manner:

Executive Summary

Page | 1 - 7

Chapter 1 as Introduction describes background, brief description of project road, needs and benefits of the project road, scope of environmental assessment, needs of EIA study, approach and methodology adopted and structure for EIA report.

Chapter 2 as Policy, Legal and Administrative Framework presents the legal and administrative framework of World Bank, Government of India and Government of Rajasthan. This section underlines various clearances, permissions, consents involved for the project road at the State level and at the Central level.

Chapter 3 as Project Description describes existing road conditions and facilities, traffic projections, right of way, proposed bypass and realignment, proposed roadway improvements, bridge and cross drainage structures, junctions improvement, underpass, ROB, community facilities, construction materials requirement and sources, way side amenities, road safety improvement proposal, etc.

Chapter 4 as Baseline Environmental Conditions presents the existing environmental conditions along the corridor, which were ascertained by conducting a field survey along with collection of secondary information pertaining to the corridor. Primary data for various environmental parameters was generated using suitable monitoring devises. The methodology was strictly adhered to the stipulated guidelines by MOEF&CC and CPCB.

Chapter 5 as Impact Assessment describe identification and evaluation of anticipated environmental impacts caused on various environmental and social parameters by the various activities proposed for the upgradation of the project corridor.

Chapter 6 as Analysis of Alternatives presents analysis of alternatives carried out during EIA studies considering with and without project, alternatives for bypasses and realignments, pavement technologies, construction materials, etc.

Chapter 8 as Public Consultations with Key Stakeholder provide details of consultation carried out in order to know the feedbacks of local population and the project affected people (PAP). Public consultation meetings were held with the stake holders to record their views on the environmental issues pertaining to the road and the suggested remedies to be adopted for the proposed project corridor.

Chapter 9 as Environmental Management Plan describes mitigation measures to avoid or minimization of anticipated environmental impacts during design, preconstruction, construction and de-mobilization phases. Environmental Management Plan that include institutional aspects of the project implementation and cost estimates for implementation of EMP. Section of Green Initiatives and GHG Emissions Reductions have been added, which describes green highway and climate resilient initiatives adopted in the project and estimated GHG emissions reduction.

Page | 1 - 8

CHAPTER 2: PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Project Profile

The project road starts from and ends near Mandal connecting to NH-48. Approximate length of the project road is 134 km traversing Beawar, Asind, Badnor and Mandal. The project road traverses Pali, Ajmer, Rajsamand and Bhilwara districts of Rajasthan State. The location map of the project road is shown in Figure 2.1.

Figure 2-1: Key Map of the Project Road

The project road starts at km 129.000 (SH-39) at Ras and ends at km 10.940 (SH-61) near Mandal connecting to NH-48. The project road passes through important towns/villages like Ras, Jagatiya, Bhagatpura, Babra, Roopnagar, Beawar, Laxmipura, Nimba Hera, Asind, Badnor and Mandal. The project corridor traverses through rolling terrain and has mostly poor geometry. The existing length project road is km 115.020 excluding the overlapping sections of NH-8, and Shree Cement road and is about 134 km in length if the said sections are included. The district wise length of the project is given in Table 2.1.

Page | 2 - 1

Table 0-1: District wise Project Road Alignment

Road section From (km) To (km) Length(km) District

0.000 19.400 19.400 Pali

19.400 36.600 17.200 Ajmer

36.600 44.100 7.500 Rajsamand NH-158 44.100 46.350 2.250 Bhilwara

46.350 48.100 1.750 Rajsamand

48.100 116.745 68.645 Bhilwara

Source: Design report

2.2 Alignment

Description of existing road alignment is given in Table 2.2 and main points are summarises below: • The present road is having two lane carriageway in 94.660 km length, while remaining length is comprised of single and intermediate lane road section. • The existing carriageway is flexible, with exception of rigid pavement in about 5.560 km section. Table 0-2: Chainage Wise Breakup of The Proposed Highway

Chainage (Km) Existing Length (Km) From To

129.000 148.660 / 73.000 19.660

73.000 75.660 2.660

103.640 (of MDR-84) 30.000 73.640

30.000 (of MDR-84 and SH-61) 10.940 (SH-61) 19.060

Existing Length 115.020 km

Proposed Project Length after improvement 116.745 km

Source: Design Report

Page | 2 - 2

• The width of shoulders varies from 0.000 to 1.200 m. • Shoulders are in fair to poor condition along most parts of the project length. • In terms of pavement condition, 75% (by length) of the project road is in good condition, 17.6% of project road is in fair condition and 11.4% length of project road length is in poor condition. • Failed sections of the road constitute about 5.8% of the length.

2.3 Existing Road Features and Constraints

The major constraints or challenges of utilizing the current facility on the road are as listed below: a) Dense Built-up and Settlements b) Right of Way c) Condition of the existing pavement d) Condition of existing cross drainage structures e) Safety of Road Users f) Poor Geometry The immediate outcome of the project road will be improved accessibility to social services and markets, increased fuel efficiency, reduced travel time, accidents, vehicle emissions and better employment opportunities apart from agriculture, both through improved access to economic centres and increased industrial activities in the project area.

2.3.1 Dense Built Up Areas & Settlements

The project road traverses through 23 nos. of Major Built-up / settlements. The presence of these settlements obstructs the flow of traffic due to reduction in speed. The traffic flowing through these sections also creates potential hazard to pedestrians. The major settlements along the road are listed in Table 2.3. Table 0-3: List of Major Built-Up/Settlements along the Project Road

Chainage (Km) Name of the Village / S.No. Length (Km) Town From To

1 129/250 130/000 0.75 Ras Village

2 131/600 131/700 0.10 Jagatiya

3 133/300 133/400 0.10 Mandi Chauraha

4 135/000 135/300 0.30 Bhagatpura

5 138/600 140/200 1.60 Babra Village

Page | 2 - 3

Chainage (Km) Name of the Village / S.No. Length (Km) Town From To

6 141/500 141/700 0.20 Babra Village

7 143/700 143/800 0.10 Bhanwariya Patti

8 149=74/000 149/600=74/600 0.60 Roopnagar

9 93/500 91/300 2.20 Jaswantpur Village

10 88/100 88/300 0.20 Barr Village

11 82/000 80/100 1.90 Laxmipura Village

12 80/800 79/700 1.10 Ojiyana Village

13 77/500 77/200 0.30 Mawla Village

14 72/900 71/100 1.80 Badnor Village

15 59/500 58/600 0.90 Pratapura Village

16 58/000 54/000 4.00 Asind

17 42/000 41/500 0.50 Pali Kheda Village

18 40/200 39/200 1.00 Brahmano Ka Sareri Village

19 37/700 37/500 0.20 Hithiya Village

20 36/350 36/100 0.25 Kerjalin Village

21 33/600 33/200 0.40 Nimbahera Village

22 29/500 29/900 0.90 Mod ka Nimbhera

23 14/900 12/000 2.90 Mandal

Source: Design report and primary survey

The constraint of improving or upgrading the current road is the land availability in these built-up sections.

Page | 2 - 4

2.4.2 Right of Way The project road passes through important towns/villages like Ras, Jagatiya, Bhagatpura, Babra, Roopnagar, Beawar, Laxmipura, Nimba Hera, Asind, Badnor and Mandal. In these sections acquisition of RoW for widening / redevelopment is very difficult due dense settlements along the existing highway. Rehabilitation and resettlement issues will be more if existing road is widened. Therefore, realignments and bypasses are proposed at required locations in order to provide a safe and congestion free passage to road users. The existing RoW varies from 15 to 30m. RoW of 30m is proposed throughout the road for major realignments and bypasses. Additional ROW is proposed for the two toll plazas, Bus Bay, Truck Lay bye and wayside amenities as per Manual of Specifications and Standards. Locations of additional RoW are presented in Table 2.4. Table 0-4: Recommended Minimum Right of Way at additional RoW locations

Design Chainage Proposed Row S. No. Length (m) Remarks From To LHS RHS

1 2940 3160 220 20 20 Bus Bay

2 3510 3750 240 15 25 Truck Lay bye

3 4340 4590 250 20 20 Bus Bay

4 8040 8260 220 20 15 Bus Bay

5 13780 14030 250 30 80 Toll Plaza-1

6 16250 16450 200 15 100 Way Side Amenities

7 17340 17560 220 15 20 Bus Bay

8 60880 61120 240 25 15 Truck Lay bye

9 67600 67800 200 15 100 Way Side Amenities

10 73725 73975 250 22 22 Toll Plaza-2

11 107130 107370 240 25 15 Truck Lay bye

Source: Design report and primary survey 2.4.3 Deficient Vertical and Horizontal Geometry and Improvement The existing alignment predominantly traverses through barren/open land and through patches of dense urban built up sections also. The alignment comprises of 16 nos. of vertical and 96 nos. sharp horizontal curves and blind spots. The deficient/substandard horizontal curves will be

Page | 2 - 5 improved by providing the required radius as per the codal provision for the design speed of 80kmph / 100kmph. The curves will be improved for maximum possible radius. 2.4.4 Deficient Cross Drainage Structures and Improvements The major rivers crossed by the alignment are Lilri River, Khari River and Mansi River. Lilri River is crossing the project road at km 1.443 and flowing from left to right, while other two rivers Khari River and Mansi River are flowing from right to left in the direction of increasing chainage. The part of the project road from chainage Km 0.000 to Km 36.500, contributes rainwater through tributaries, flowing from right to left, which finally join Lilri River. Similarly, from chainage 36.500 Km to 64.000 Km, the country slope is from right to left side of the project road considering increasing chainage. Only small streams lie in-between and therefore, minor bridges and culverts are proposed in this section. Likewise, last part of the project road from km 64.000 to 116.700, country slope is from right to left side of the project road considering increasing chainage. Two main rivers namely Khari River at chainage 71.650 Km & Mansi River at km 92.554 crossing alignment from right to left. Major bridges are proposed on these rivers. Other than these locations minor bridges and culverts are proposed. The project road is having one major bridge, one RoB, 14 minor bridges, 83 slab culverts, 143 pipe culverts, 3 box culverts and 1 causeway. Existing causeway at km1+479 gets overtopped and obstructs the continuous traffic during rainy season. All minor bridges are having RCC solid slab type superstructure, stone masonry wall type substructure and with open foundation. The pipe culverts are generally in poor working condition, with pipe diameter less than or equal to 0.6 m, however some of them are found in choked condition due to accumulation of waste / garbage and siltation. Summary of existing structures is given in Table 2.5. Table 0-5: Summary of Existing Structures

S.No. Type of structure Nos.

1 Railway Over Bridge (RoB) 1

2 Major Bridges 1

3 Minor Bridges 14

4 Slab Culverts 83

5 Pipe Culverts 143

6 Box Culverts 1

7 Causeway 3

Total 246

Source: Design Report

Page | 2 - 6

2.4.5 Safety of the Users With improvement of existing single / intermediate lane to two lane / four lane with paved shoulder standards, safety of the commuters will be increased as this will improve the visibility and additional carriageway space. Road users will also be facilitated with different project amenities, slope protection measures, road markings and sign etc., which will improve the safety of commuters along the project road. The project road traverses through 23 nos. of major built-up / settlements. The presence of these settlements obstructs the flow of traffic due to significant reduction in speed. The traffic flowing through these sections also creates potential hazard to pedestrians. Hence, realignments and bypasses are proposed in order to provide a safe and congestion free passage to road users. 2.4.6 Network Connectivity and Alternate Route Study The project stretches once upgraded will provide shortest route to connect North and North-West part of Rajasthan to South-East Rajasthan. The project road provides connectivity to major tourist spots of Nagaur, Ajmer and Chittorgarh. The project road will provide straight route connectivity to Chittorgarh and further going to Mandsaur and Indore in Madhya Pradesh. On the north of project road, it connects to Nagaur and Bikaner via Merta. The road section in between and Ras already has 4 lanes with paved shoulder.

Bikaner to Chittorgarh a) The distance to reach Bikaner from Chittorgarh traversing through Nagaur, Merta, , Ras (Project stretch start), Beawar, Mandal (Project stretch end), Bhilwara and Chittorgarh comes out to 448km. b) Alternate Route-1 to connect the Bikaner to Chittorgarh via Nagaur, , Mandal and Bhilwara comes out to 469km. c) Alternate Route-2 to connect the Bikaner to Chittorgarh via Nagaur and Ajmer comes out to 461Km. By upgrading and improving the riding quality road user will be benefitted by reducing distance between Bikaner and Chittorgarh by almost 15km-20km.

Jodhpur to Chittorgarh a) Jodhpur which is a place of tourist interest and also a hub for handicraft and industries producing Guar gum gets its connectivity to Chittorgarh and down south to Madhya Pradesh through Jodhpur (NH-62) – Pali (NH-62/NH-162) – (NH-162) – Beawer (NH-158) – Asind (NH-158) – Mandal (NH-158) – Bhilwara (NH-48) to Chittorgarh. The total distance traversed is 349 km. b) Alternate Route-1 is reaching Chittorgarh from Jodhpur traversing through Jodhpur – Pali – – Rajsamand – Singhpur – Chittorgarh. The total distance traversed on the route is almost same as that using the project road i.e. 293 Km. The majority of the length in this route passes through State Highways (157 km) and Major District road (66.4 Km). So, this is not the preferred route by multi axle vehicles.

Page | 2 - 7 c) Alternate Route-2 is reaching Chittorgarh traversing through Pali – – Sirohi – Udaipur – Chittorgarh. The total distance to reach Chittorgarh comes out to 417Km. Hilly and rolling terrain is encountered for about 25 km – 30km on this route.

Bikaner to Udaipur a) Udaipur being a tourist place attracts a lot of passenger traffic from and around the regions of Rajasthan. Traffic coming from Bikaner and going to Udaipur has multiple options. Starting from Bikaner traversing through Nagaur – Merta – Ras – Beawar – Deogarh – Rajsamand – Nathdwara – Udaipur. The total distance traversed on the given route comes out to 487Km. Traffic gets to travel all along the National highway if adopted this route. b) Alternative – 1 is travelling Nagaur – Merta – Lambiya – Jaitaran – Raipur – Bali – Rajsamand – Nathdwara – Udaipur. The total distance traversed on the route is 484 Km. c) Alternative – 2 is travelling through Nagaur – Jodhpur – Pali – Rajasamand – Nathdwara – Udaipur. The total distance traversed through this route is 501 Km. NH-158 connects the major National Highway no.48 which passes through Kishangarh – Nasirabad – – Bhilwara to Chittorgarh on Southern side and NH-25/458 Beawer – Bar – Sojat – Pali.

Cargo Mapping

Origin - destination surveys were conducted to elicit information related to the base year travel characteristics of goods and passenger trips using the project road and likely future traffic diversions to or from the project road. The sole purpose to conduct the study was to identify the traffic characteristics and movement pattern of the goods internally and outside the state. The Table 2.6 shows the typical travel pattern of goods vehicle in and around the project road.

Table 0-6: Percentage Distribution of Goods Traffic as per distance Travelled

Distance in Km Category of Vehicles 0-20 20-100 100-200 200-500 500-1000 >1000

Km 147.000_SH-39 – Ras to Beawar

LMV 73.6 0.0 16.0 6.6 3.8 0.0

LCV 65.1 11.6 11.6 11.6 0.0 0.0

2A 50.0 0.0 29.2 20.8 0.0 0.0

3A 61.1 0.0 19.8 6.3 8.7 4.0

MAV 47.7 2.3 8.7 22.8 15.3 3.2

Page | 2 - 8

Distance in Km Category of Vehicles 0-20 20-100 100-200 200-500 500-1000 >1000

Km 42.000_MDR-84 – Beawar to Mandal

LMV 12.9 44.6 29.7 12.9 0.0 0.0

LCV 9.4 33.4 43.9 9.4 4.0 0.0

2A 5.5 47.3 36.4 5.5 5.5 0.0

3A 0.0 27.8 50.0 7.4 11.1 3.7

MAV 2.2 9.7 47.8 21.6 17.9 0.7

LMV: Light Motor Vehicle, LCV-Light Commercial Vehicle, 2A – 2Axle Trucks, 3A-3 Axle Trucks, MAV – Multi Axle Vehicles

Source: Design Report

The above table shows for section-1 i.e. Ras to Beawar major percentage almost 65% of the truck traffic diverts from Beawar on NH-8 and the remaining 35% continues the project road.

The major traffic movement found on Ras – Beawer section is due to the transportation of Cement and the raw materials used in the cement industry. Shree Cement factory generates majority of the traffic plying on the section. The major commodity movement which is found on the Project road are as listed below. a) Food grains and other agricultural products (Rice, wheat, pulses, maize, chilly, sugarcane, sugar, cotton) b) Cement c) Textiles d) Fruits and Vegetables e) Mined Materials The commodity distribution is shown in Table 2.7. Table 0-7: Commodity Distribution

S. % Vehicles in Total % Vehicles in Total Product No. Composition in Section 1 Composition in Section 2

Textiles and Textile related 1 14 8 Materials Cement and Cement 2 12 17 related products

Page | 2 - 9

S. % Vehicles in Total % Vehicles in Total Product No. Composition in Section 1 Composition in Section 2

Agricultural Produce 3 11 14 (Wheat, Maize, Chilli etc.)

4 Fruits and Vegetables 10 5

Petroleum Products, Gas, 5 7 6 Lubricants

Source: Design Report

The major markets in and around the project influence regions are Rajsamand, Bhilwara, Pali, Jodhpur, Beawar, Ajmer, Chittorgarh, Bikaner, Jaipur. Table 2.8 shows the commodities dealt from the different markets.

Table 0-8: Major Commodity Trading Centres

S.No. Major Market Places Commodity

1 Rajsamand Jowar

2 Bhilwara Mustard, Maize, Wheat, Jowar, Guar,

3 Pali Jeera, Mustard, Jowar, Guar

4 Ajmer Jeera, Wheat, Maize, Barley, Jowar, Peas, Honey, Guar.

5 Chittorgarh Groundnut, Soyabean, Mustard, Maize, Wheat, Methi

6 Bikaner Chana, Mustard, Guar seed, Wheat, Bajra, Moth Bean

7 Beawar Guar

Jeera, Chana, Urad, Moong, Groundnut, Mustard, 8 Jaipur Rapeseed Oil, Barley, Bajra, Guar

Jeera, Chana, Mustard, Methi, Soyabean, Coriander, Maize 9 Kota Soya oil

Source: Design Report

Major mineral mining centers in the region are shown in Table 2.9.

Page | 2 - 10

Table 0-9: Major Mineral Mining Centres

S.No. District Mineral Produced

Calcite, China Clay, Copper, Dolomite, Feldspar, Fluorspar, Garnet, Limestone, Magnesite, Marble, Mica, Quartz/Silica Sand, Quartzite, 1 Ajmer Talc/Steatite/Soapstone, Vermiculite, Wollastonite, Emerald, Granite, Graphite, Silver

Barytes, Calcite, China Clay, Copper, Dolomite, Feldspar, Garnet, Iron Ore (M), Lead-Zinc, Limestone, Marble, Mica, Ochre, 2 Bhilwara Pyrophyllite, Quartz/Silica Sand, Talc/Steatite/Soapstone, Granite, Silver

Ball Clay, China Clay, Fireclay, Gypsum, Lignite, Limestone, Ochre, 3 Bikaner Quartz/Silica Sand, Fuller's Earth

Barytes, China Clay, Copper, Dolomite, Limestone, Marble, Ochre, 4 Chittorgarh Talc/Steatite/Soapstone, Granite

5 Jodhpur Dolomite, Quartz/Silica Sand, Fuller's Earth, Granite

6 Karauli Talc/Steatite/Soapstone

Ball Clay, China Clay, Gypsum, Lignite, Limestone, Marble, Potash, 7 Nagaur Tungsten

Ball Clay, Barytes, Calcite, China Clay, Copper, Feldspar, Gypsum, 8 Pali Limestone, Magnesite, Quartz/Silica Sand, Talc/Steatite/Soapstone, Wollastonite, Granite

Barytes, Copper, Dolomite, Feldspar, Lead-Zinc, Mica, Pyrophyllite, 9 Rajsamand Quartz/Silica Sand, Talc/Steatite/Soapstone, Emerald, Granite, Silver

Source: Design report + Primary and Secondary Surveys

2.4.7 Other Various Positive Impacts and Benefits Other various positive impacts and benefits expected from the proposed project are furnished below. • Improvement of project road would increase new economic and employment opportunities by catering good connection to new markets, production center. As a resul,t villagers would be able to transport their produce faster and get more profit margins instead of depending solely on local ‘haats’ and middlemen.

Page | 2 - 11

• With the project, good connectivity would attract industrialists; businessmen to set up agro-based industries and new business centre like minerals, fruits, vegetables. It will create opportunity in the uplift of poor farmers. • Improved connectivity will attract tourists s project road is only mode of transportation to religious places. • Improve the condition of existing traffic flow by removing all bottlenecks at various locations. • With road improvement, it will reduce the cost of transportation and fuel consumption. • Increase the carrying capacity of the existing traffic volume and enable it to cater to the future traffic. • Improve the condition of existing traffic flow by removing all bottlenecks at various locations. • Essential and emergency services like schools, health centre, public distribution system etc can be availed faster.

2.5 Traffic Study

The traffic was counted at 5 locations, along the project road section at Km 147 of SH-39, Km 82 of MDR-84, Km 62 of MDR-84, Km 42 of MDR-84 & Km 26 of SH-61 in Nov 2013 and Nov 2018. The location-wise the annual average daily traffic (AADT) along the project road section is presented in Table 2.10. Table 0-10: Summary of Annual Average Daily Traffic (AADT) Survey (2018)

Tollable Traffic (nos)

Vehicle Type km 147 km 82 km 62 km 42 km 26

Car/Jeep/Van (Private) 749 274 553 622 1519 Car / Jeep (Taxi) 5 0 0 6 0 Shared Jeep 115 117 11 189 27 Mini Bus 23 1 1 4 6 School Bus 8 1 6 4 4 Std. Bus 202 77 77 100 181 Maxx/Pick-Up 213 187 169 203 349 LCV (4 tyre) 7 14 13 22 48 LCV (6 tyre) 42 32 38 46 67 2 Axle 47 94 61 112 131 3 Axle 242 123 86 105 181

Page | 2 - 12

Tollable Traffic (nos)

Vehicle Type km 147 km 82 km 62 km 42 km 26

MAV (4 to 6 Axles) 866 284 235 271 361 MAV (> 6 Axles) 0 0 0 0 0 Others 0 0 0 1 0 Total Tollable Vehicles 2519 1204 1250 1685 2874 Total PCUs 6584 2812 2559 3315 5192 Non – Tollable Traffic (nos) 3 Wheeler 93 50 65 65 90 2 Wheeler 2454 2029 3128 2829 3291 Agriculture Tractor 5 8 16 12 14 Agriculture Tractor with 29 97 108 54 90 Trailer Cycle 4 4 26 5 3 Cycle Rickshaw 0 0 0 0 0 Animal Drawn Cart 0 0 0 0 0 Toll Exempted Car 6 0 3 7 9 Toll Exempted Bus 0 0 0 1 0 Toll Exempted Truck 0 0 0 0 0

Total Non-Tollable 2591 2188 3346 2973 3497 (Nos.)

Total Non-Tollable 1466 1515 2155 1753 2172 (PCUs)

Grand Total (Nos.) 5110 3392 4596 4658 6371

Grand Total (PCUs) 8050 4327 4714 5068 7364

Source: Design report and primary survey

2.5.1 Estimated Traffic

Projected traffic for each section is presented in Table 2.11.

Page | 2 - 13

Table 0-11: Projected Total Traffic

Km 147 Km 82 Km 62 Km 42 Km 26 Year Nos PCU Nos PCU Nos PCU Nos PCU Nos PCU

2018-19 5110 8050 3392 4327 4596 4714 4658 5068 6371 7364

2023-24 7123 10873 4746 5805 6478 6383 6556 6888 8927 9968

2028-29 9573 14364 6393 7617 8758 8419 8856 9108 12025 13137

2033-34 12437 18575 8312 9778 11399 10821 11521 11730 15615 16874

2038-39 15668 23507 10466 12278 14341 13564 14494 14727 19622 21140

2043-44 19179 29039 12797 15062 17502 16585 17692 18030 23938 25837

2048-49 22904 35124 15263 18119 20811 19851 21048 21609 28474 30928

2049-50 23734 36490 15811 18803 21546 20579 21793 22408 29481 32064

Source: Design Report And Primary Surveys

2.6 Design Speed

The design standards for the project road have been set from IRC SP 73-2015 “Manual of Specifications and Standards for Two-Laning of Highways with Paved shoulders” and IRC SP 84- 2014 “Manual of Specifications and Standards for Four-Laning of Highways through public private partnership. The project road is proposed for improvement two lanes and four lane with paved shoulders with design speed of 80-100 kmph in throughout the stretch.

2.7 Widening Proposal with Typical Cross Sections

In view of traffic requirements, widening scheme with various typical cross sections have been developed to meet the need of the project road. Details of proposed and widening and upgradation scheme with cross sectional elements for particular typical cross sections and location-wise application of TCS are given in the DPR/Design Report. Corresponding typical cross section are shown in figures below.

Page | 2 - 14

Figure 0-2: Typical Cross Section

Widening to Two lane with Paved Shoulder (Widening & Reconstruction - Existing Pavement)

Two lane with Paved Shoulder with Foot Path and Drain in Urban section (Widening & Reconstruction - Existing Pavement)

Two Lane with Paved Shoulders - Bypasses New Construction (over Existing Road)

Two Lane with Paved Shoulders - Bypasses New Construction

Page | 2 - 15

2.8 Existing and Proposed Pavement The pavement conditions have been assessed based on visual observation (formation of cracks, rutting, potholes, ravelling) and pavement investigation. The existing road condition varies from good to very poor. There are some stretches which are badly damaged because of the poor condition of the sub-grade and other factors. There are also some sections which are overtopped by flood water damaging the pavement. Details of the existing pavement condition survey are given in Table 2.13. The environment concerns associated due to poor pavement are slow movement of vehicles, traffic congestion resulting into generation of high air & noise pollution indirectly affecting the population residing along the road. Table 0-13: Existing Pavement condition of the project Road

S. No. Percentage of Road. Pavement Condition

1 5.8 Failed

2 11.4 Poor

3 17.6 Fair

4 77.6 Good

Source: Design Report

The pavement condition is poor on majority of road length and is a concern from road user’s safety, high vehicle operation and maintenance cost, and increase travel time. Rigid pavement is proposed for Section-1 (Ras – Beawar) and flexible pavement for Section-2 (Beawar – Mandal). The flexible pavement design has been done in accordance to IRC 37-2018 & rigid pavement has been designed in accordance to IRC 58-2015. The overlay proposal has been designed according to IRC 81-1997 based on Benkelman beam survey.

2.9 Embankment Design

Embankment has been designed for ensuring the stability of the roadway. High embankments in all soils has been designed from stability consideration as per IRC-75, IRC SP-58 & MoRTH- Guidelines for Design of High Embankments. Turfing or Plan and Shrubs layer will be provided along the project stretch. Grass and shrubs are very effective for stopping soil erosion. This is primarily because plant roots tend to hold soil together, making it harder to erode. The leaves of the plants also help to reduce the velocity of raindrops falling on the ground, making it harder for them to dislodge the soil and erode it. Ornamental grass and low, spreading shrubs work best as they leave no areas of bare soil exposed to the elements. The locations of high embankment are presented in Table 2.14 and Table 2.15.

Page | 2 - 16

Table 0-14: Locations of High Embankment on LHS

Design Chainage Average Embankment S. No. Length (m) Height Start End

1 21890 21960 6.61 70

2 28970 29050 6.75 80

3 29090 29330 7.23 240

4 31540 31650 7.63 110

5 43610 43790 7.50 180

6 49570 49870 8.13 300

7 71600 71760 6.57 160

8 92500 92570 6.38 70

9 116330 116740 8.50 410

Source: Design Report

Table 0-15: Locations of High Embankment on RHS

Design Chainage Average Embankment S. No. Length (m) Height Start End

1 1190 1540 7.12 350

2 31520 31590 6.78 70

3 33300 33360 7.08 60

4 43590 43760 6.81 170

5 49670 49780 7.79 110

6 71580 71710 6.29 130

7 116370 116690 8.67 320

Source: Design Report

Page | 2 - 17

2.10 Bypasses and Realignments Total three bypasses and 11 realignments have been proposed in the project road. Details of bypasses proposed, are given in Table 2.16.

Table 0-16: Proposed Bypass Locations

Design Chainage Design S. No. Type of Road Bypass Length (m) Start End

1 0 3200 3200 SH-39 Ras

2 21470 30050 8580 Beawar

3 86860 90100 3240 MDR-84 Sareri

Total 15020

Source: Design Report

Re-alignments have been proposed for 11 enroute villages, where geometrics needs to be improved. Total 31 nos. realignments are proposed to enhance the existing geometrics. Details of realignments at villages location are provided in Table 2.17.

Table 0-17: Proposed Realignment Locations

Chainage S. Existing Length Village Remarks No. RoW Start End

1 9.075 11.660 2.585 Babra 8 to 10 Realignment

2 19.690 21.470 1.780 Roopnagar 8 to 10 Realignment

3 30.650 33.500 2.850 Rajiyawas 10 to 15 Realignment

4 36.045 37.100 1.055 Peepli ka Badiya 8 to 10 Realignment

5 43.000 44.100 1.100 Heera ka Badiya 8 to 10 Realignment

6 47.030 48.630 1.600 Kaniya Kheda 8 to 10 Realignment

7 49.600 50.600 1.000 Oziyana 8 to 10 Realignment

8 57.950 59.770 1.820 Badnor 8 to 10 Realignment

Page | 2 - 18

Chainage S. Existing Length Village Remarks No. RoW Start End

9 70.020 72.625 2.605 Asind 15 to 20 Realignment

10 93.700 95.700 2.000 Mod ka Nimhera 7 to 8 Realignment

11 112.830 115.430 2.600 Mandal 10 to 15 Realignment

Source: Design Report

2.10 Service roads Service road has been proposed in major settlement for use by the locals to avoid any conflict with the fast-moving highway traffic. The locations of service roads are tabulated Table 2.18.

Table 0-18: Locations of Service Road

From To Length (m)

Km 60.250 Km 61.350 1100

Km 70.850 Km 71.400 550

Km 71.400 Km 71.550 150

Km 72.600 Km 73.600 1000

Km 83.640 Km 84.750 1110

Km 88.100 Km 88.900 800

Km 97.600 Km 98.550 950

Source: Design Report

2.11 Proposed Structures The project road is having one major bridge, one RoB, 14 minor bridges, 83 slab culverts, 143 pipe culverts, 3 box culverts and 1 causeway. Three new major bridges are proposed on project road. Out of sixteen minor bridges five are proposed for repair and widening, four are proposed for reconstruction and remaining seven are proposed as new structures. One of the existing ROB is retained with repairs and one additional RoB is proposed over Beawar bypass. Total 217 numbers of culverts are proposed including pipe and box culverts. New 5 pedestrian subways have also been proposed. The summary of proposed structures on the project road is presented in Table 2.19.

Page | 2 - 19

Table 0-4: List of Structures

Retained S. Type of proposed Repair & New Total with Reconstruction No. structure Widening Structures Structures Repair

1 Major Bridge 0 0 0 3 3

2 Minor Bridge 0 5 4 7 16

3 Pipe Culvert 1 7 80 0 88

4 Slab Culvert 0 0 0 0 0

5 Box Culvert 0 9 71 49 129

6 ROB 1 0 0 1 2

7 VUP 0 0 0 3 3

8 VUP Grade-II 0 0 0 8 8

Pedestrian 9 0 0 0 5 5 Subway

Total 2 21 155 76 254

Source: Design Report

2.11.1 Major and Minor Bridge

All existing minor bridges are having RCC solid slab type superstructure, stone masonry wall type substructure and with open foundation. The pipe culverts are generally in poor working condition, with pipe dia less than or equal to 0.6 m, however some of them are found in choked condition due to accumulation of waste / garbage and siltation. Total 3 major bridges are proposed on Lildi, Mansi and Khari River respectively. Details of proposed bridges (major and minor both) are provided in Table 2.20 to Table 2.23, respectively below.

Page | 2 - 20

Table 0-20: Proposed Major Bridges in the Project Road

Existing Structure Improvement Existing Design Proposed Structure Details S. Details Proposal Chainage Chainage No. (km) (km) Span / Width Span (C/C Width Type Type Length (m) of exp.) (m) PSC New 1 130+362 1+479 Pipe 34x0.6 - 5x30 2x12.5 Girder Construction PSC New 2 - 71+760 - - - 5x30 16 Girder Construction RCC New 3 - 92+554 - - - 5x19 * 16 Girder Construction

Source: Design Report

Table 0-21: Minor Bridges to Be Repaired and Widened

Existing Structure Proposed Structure Details Existing Design Sl. Improvement Chainage Chainage Span No Span / Proposal (km) (km) Type Width (C/C of Width (m) Type Length exp.)

Widening on RCC 12.5+Median 1 135+912 7+018 3x4.5 13.3 3x4.5 RCC Box both side- 2+2 Slab +12.5 lane (4 lane)

Widening on RCC 12.5+Median 2 137+930 9+033 3x6.5 13.1 3x6.5 RCC Box both side- 2+2 Slab +12.5 lane (4 lane)

Widening on RCC 12.5+Median 3 144+098 15+278 2x5.5 13.5 2x5.5 RCC Box both side- 2+2 Slab +12.5 lane (4 lane)

RCC Widening with 4 79+028 52+836 5x2.9 12.2 5x2.9 16 RCC Box Slab repair

RCC Widening and 5 12+160 115+785 2x3.5 12 2x3.5 16 RCC Box Slab Repair.

Source: Design Report and Primary Survey

Page | 2 - 21

Table 0-22: Minor Bridges Proposed Re-Construction

Existing Structure Proposed Structure Details Existing Design Details S. Improvement Chainage Chainage No. Proposal (km) (km) Span / Width Width Type Span (C/C of exp.) Type Length (m) (m)

RCC Re- 1 79+338 52+527 3x2.8 12 2x4.5 (Clear span) 16 RCC Box Slab Construction

RCC Re- 2 79+210 52+655 3x2.9 12 2x4.5 (Clear span) 16 RCC Box Slab Construction

RCC Re- 3 78+296 53+578 5x2.9 12.2 3x5.0 (Clear span) 16 RCC Box Slab Construction

RCC Re- 4 52+993 74+458 3x2.8 12 2x4.5 (Clear span) 16 RCC Box Slab Construction

Source: Design report and primary survey

Table 0-23: Minor Bridges in New-Construction

Existing Structure Improvement Proposed Structure Details Existing Design Details Proposal Sl. Chainage No Chainage (km) (k m) Span / Span (C/C Type Width Width (m) Type Length of exp.)

2x4.5 (Clear 12.5+Medi RCC New 1 130+342 1+350 Pipe 8x0.6 - span) an+12.5 Box Construction

2x4.5 (Clear 12.5+Medi RCC New 2 142+151 13+356 Pipe 2 x1.2 - span) an+12.5 Box Construction

3x6.0 (Clear 12.5+Medi RCC New 3 - 16+492 - - - span) an+12.5 Box Construction

12.5+Medi RCC New 4 - 29+644 - - - 1x19.0 an+12.5 Girder Construction

RCC New 5 - 46+072 - - - 3x18.0 16 Girder Construction

Page | 2 - 22

Existing Structure Improvement Proposed Structure Details Existing Design Details Proposal Sl. Chainage No Chainage (km) (k m) Span / Span (C/C Type Width Width (m) Type Length of exp.)

RCC New 6 - 89+308 - - - 1x10.0 16 Slab Construction

RCC New 7 - 89+830 - - - 1x19.0 16 Girder Construction

Source: Design report and primary survey

2.11.2 Culverts

Most of the culverts in the alignment will be either widened, retained or reconstructed during up- gradation of the project road. Additional, new culverts will also be provided in the alignment.

2.11.3 Vehicular Under Pass (VUP)

The following are the grade separated structures proposed along the project road. Vehicle underpasses will have minimum vertical clearance of 5.5m while the grade-II vehicle underpasses will have minimum vertical clearance of 4m. The proposal for vehicular underpass (VUP) is given in Table 2.25. Improvement Proposal of VUP Grade-II is shown in Table 2.26.

Table 0-25: Proposal of Vehicular Underpasses

Improvement Proposal Design S. Chainage Width (m) No Span (Km) Proposal Type arrangement (m)

1 10+123 New construction RCC Box 2x10x5.5 10.5+Median+10.5

2 25+834 New construction RCC Box 2x10x5.5 10.5+Median+10.5

3 97+825 New construction RCC Box 2x10x5.5 13

Source: Design report and primary survey

Page | 2 - 23

Table 0-26: Improvement Proposal of VUP Grade-II

Improvement Proposal Design Sl. Chainage Width (m) No Span (Km) Proposal Type arrangement (m)

1 9+643 New construction RCC Box 1x12x4 10.5+Median+10.5

2 20+264 New construction RCC Box 1x12x4 10.5+Median+10.5

3 60+810 New construction RCC Box 1x12x4 13

4 71+518 New construction RCC Box 1x12x4 13

5 71+875 New construction RCC Box 1x12x4 13

6 73+019 New construction RCC Box 1x12x4 13

7 84+250 New construction RCC Box 1x12x4 13

8 88+527 New construction RCC Box 1x12x4 13

Source: Design Report

2.11.4 Major and Minor Junction Improvement On the basis of intersection traffic, neighboring land use, physical constraints, Consultants have proposed appropriate control for major intersections along project road. The improvements, in form of grade separation, signalization and priority control are analyzed based on the Indian Road Congress guidelines. The type of intersection to be adopted is decided on the basis of parameters like number of intersecting legs, traffic volume/speed, available right of way, type of traffic control (signalized/non-signalized) etc. Necessary traffic surveys were carried out as per IRC: SP 19.

2.11.5 Toll Plazas

There are two toll plazas proposed in the project corridor as per details given in Table 2.30.

Table 0-30: Proposed toll plaza locations

S. Applicable Remark (Traffic Location Tollable section No. Length (km) Adopted)

Toll Plaza 1 (Km km 0.000 to km 1 30.050 km 147.000 of SH-39 13.905) 30.050

Page | 2 - 24

Toll Plaza 2 (Km km 30.050 to km 2 86.695 km 42.000 of MDR-84 73.850) 116.745

Total Tollable Length (km) 116.745

Source: Design Report

2.12 Other Structures and Improvements 2.12.1 Pedestrian Subway 5 nos. of subway are proposed along the project road and locations are detailed in Table 2.31.

Table 0-31: Details Pedestrian Subway

Pedestrian Subway Design S. Width Chainage No. Span Vertical (m) (Km) Proposal Type arrangement (m) clearance (m)

1 2+630 New Construction RCC Box 1x4.8 2.75 26

2 12+895 New Construction RCC Box 1x4.8 2.75 26

3 21+730 New Construction RCC Box 1x4.8 2.75 26

4 35+360 New Construction RCC Box 1x4.8 2.75 14

5 106+890 New Construction RCC Box 1x4.8 2.75 14

Source: Design Report

2.12.2 Wayside Amenities

The wayside amenities are proposed at the locations as per the Table 2.32.

Table 0-32: Proposed Wayside Amenities

S. No. Existing Chainage (km) Design Chainage (km) Side Section

1 145+170 (SH-39) 16+350 RHS Ras-Beawar

2 63+380 (MDR-84) 67+700 LHS Beawar-Mandal

Source: Design Report

Page | 2 - 25

2.12.3 Bus Bays and Truck lay-bys

Bus Shelters with and without bus bays are proposed at the locations given in Table 2.33.

Table 0-33: Locations of Proposed Bus Bay and Bus Shelter

Design Chainage Remarks Design Chainage Remarks S. No. Left Right

1 4480 - 3050 Both

2 8150 - 4450 -

3 36650 - 17450 -

4 40330 - 36275 Bus Shelter Only

5 44650 Shelter Only 38960 -

6 45780 Shelter Only 42600 Bus Shelter Only

7 62805 - 44800 Bus Shelter Only

8 63950 - 48100 -

9 66460 - 48750 Bus Shelter Only

10 68925 - 52200 -

11 74600 Shelter Only 54050 -

12 77000 - 56300 -

13 89500 - 61050 -

14 91800 - 66750 -

15 94886 - 68200 -

16 97750 - 77200 -

17 101200 - 80200 -

18 106586 - 91850 -

19 114086 - 94736 -

Page | 2 - 26

Design Chainage Remarks Design Chainage Remarks S. No. Left Right

20 - - 98020 -

21 - - 106786 -

22 - - 109536 -

23 - - 114216 -

Source: Design Report

Truck lay byes has been proposed to cater trucks traversing on project road. The location details of Truck lay byes are given In Table 2.34.

Table 0-5: Locations of Proposed Truck Lay Bay

S. No. Design Chainage Side

1 3+630 RHS

2 61+000 LHS

3 107+250 LHS

Source: Design Report

2.12.4 Drainage

The IRC: SP 42 will generally be followed for design of highway drainage. The planning of highway and drainage is intricately linked with the terrain, alignment of the highway and the proposed cross drainage works. The planning and designing of adequate drainage system is a primary requirement for maintaining a structural soundness and functional efficiency of a road. Pavement structure including sub-grade must be protected from any ingress of water; otherwise over a period of time it may weaken the sub-grade by saturating it and cause distress in the pavement structure. Hence disposal of water from the pavement and sub-grade is a basic consideration in road design. Over and above quick drainage takes away the water from pavement surface and reduces chances of skidding of vehicles. In order to guard the pavement from the poorly drained conditions, planning, designing, construction and maintenance of longitudinal drains on either side of the roads is very much essential. The surface water from the pavement and shoulders will be made to flow in to the drains by providing suitable cross Slopes / Camber. Earthen drains are provided through-out the project corridor to ensure efficient drainage from carriageway to drain. All drains are connected to cross drainage structure. Median drains are

Page | 2 - 27 provided with rain water harvesting structure. Proper drainage arrangements are provided for grade separated structures. If requires, CD work is also provided for loops and ramps. a) Surface Drains Surface drainage is proposed for the road stretch in the built-up sections and with service roads to carry the surface water in to the percolation pits / rainwater harvesting pits provided at the both the ends of Lined Drains. The details of the same are shown in Table 2.35.

Table 0-6: Location of Lined Drainage

Design Chainage Design Chainage S. No. Length S. No. Length From To From To

1 0 780 780 12 68820 70000 1180

2 2520 3030 510 13 70850 71400 550

3 4430 4830 400 14 71400 71550 150

5 5960 6830 870 15 71835 72600 765

6 12720 13020 300 16 72600 73600 1000

7 37300 37600 300 17 83640 84750 1110

8 39700 40000 300 18 88100 88900 800

9 45600 45850 250 19 97600 98550 950

10 54100 54730 630 20 100970 101290 320

11 60250 61350 1100 21 106600 107000 400

Source: Design Report and Primary Survey b) Surface Runoff Harvesting

Harvesting rainwater checks surface run off of water and reduces soil erosion. Rain water can also be collected by creating small artificial ponds. Surface run off harvesting is most suitable in urban areas. In these ponds rain water flows away as surface run off and can be stored for future use. Surface runoff rain water in ponds, tanks and reservoirs built for this purpose. This can provide water for farming, for cattle and also for general domestic use. Water can be stored by redirecting the flow of small streams into reservoirs on the surface or underground. The locations of the ponds are as below in Table 2.36. which can be redeveloped and utilized for water storage.

Page | 2 - 28

Table 0-7: Locations of the Ponds

Distance from Distance from S. Sr. Location Side Proposed Location Side Proposed No. No. Road Road

1 Ch. 2100 RHS 140m 11 Ch.72600 LHS 150m

2 Ch. 33600 RHS 360m 12 Ch.88100 RHS 270m

3 Ch.35800 LHS 390m 13 Ch.91200 RHS 50m

4 Ch.39900 RHS 325m 14 Ch.95600 RHS 50m

Adjacent to 5 Ch.43000 RHS 15 Ch.99800 LHS 780m Road

6 Ch.44600 LHS 300m 16 Ch.101000 LHS 397m

7 Ch.47800 RHS 160m 17 Ch.105000 LHS 550m

8 Ch.48500 RHS 145m 18 Ch.106900 RHS 250m

9 Ch.49600 RHS 50m 19 Ch.112700 RHS 50m

10 Ch.51200 RHS 50m

Source: Design Report and Primary Survey

C) Water Conservation, Harvesting, Channelization of Water, Water Storage

Drinking and daily use water is a basic requirement of every human being. It was recorded during survey and consultation that community has to carry water from the bore well near around their home or purchase tanker for their uses. Mainly women and girls are involved in household work therefore they carry the water from the bore well. Local people asked to proposed water supply in the project corridor. Water Conservation through ponds, rainwater harvesting, channelization of water are the few techniques through which quality and quantity of storm runoff water can be protected and stored separately by means of artificial storage pond. The same can be used by the localities for harvesting and other daily needs. As the project area having scarcity of water, hence rainwater harvesting pits has been proposed at various interval for storm water drain or in case, pits are provided at end point of the storm water drain before meeting to nalla near culverts, minor bridges and major bridges on both side of the road. The details of such locations are shown in the Table 2.37.

Page | 2 - 29

Table 0-8: Locations of Rain Water Harvesting Pits

Location of Rain Water Harvesting Location of Rain Water Harvesting S. No. S. No. Pit Pit

1 0 27 69820

2 500 28 70000

3 780 29 70850

4 2520 30 71400

5 3030 31 71400

6 4430 32 71550

7 4830 33 71835

8 5960 34 72335

9 6460 35 72600

10 6830 36 73100

11 12720 37 73600

12 13020 38 83640

13 37300 39 84140

14 37600 40 84640

15 39700 41 84750

16 40000 42 88100

17 45600 43 88600

18 45850 44 88900

19 54100 45 97600

20 54730 46 98100

21 60250 47 98550

Page | 2 - 30

Location of Rain Water Harvesting Location of Rain Water Harvesting S. No. S. No. Pit Pit

22 60750 48 100970

23 61250 49 101290

24 61350 50 106600

25 68820 51 107000

26 69320

Average annual rainfall in Ajmer and Bhilwara is 636.7mm as per at Indian Metrological Department (IMD). Run-off from the paved surface of the area shall be diverted to the nearby rain water harvesting structure. About 80% of the rainfall at paved surface is likely to be recovered and diverted to rain water harvesting structures. The road configuration wise tentative water harvesting is provided in Table 2.38.

Table 0-9: Tentative Water Rain Harvesting Estimation

Chainage Paved Tentative Total Averag Coniguratio Area Paved Harvested Length rainfall n of the road Width Area (m2) Water Start End (m) (mm) (m) Annually (m3)

4 lane 0.000 30.050 30050 17 510850 636.7 260206.6

2 lane 30.050 116.745 86695 14 1213730 636.7 618225.5

Total 116745 - 1724580 - 878432

2.13 Road Safety

2.13.1 Road Accident Black Spot Identification and Removal Based on the analysis of the accident data, 2 locations were identified as black spot along the project road as given below: • Harnia Mangri near Badnor (17 Fatalities) • Para Chowk near Asind (6 Fatal Accidents) The major road accident locations are marked in the Figure 2.3.

Page | 2 - 31

Figure 0-3: Accident Black Spot Loaction Map

Page | 2 - 32

The Table 2.39 represents the total number of accidents took place during year 2018.

Table 2.39: Accidents Data for the Project Road for 2018

A No. of Affected Persons Accident Vehicle Date Urban / Non Location Responsible Fatal Grievous Minor Rural Injured

15-02- Badnor, Badnor 1 2018

22-02- Balai Kheda Bus 1 1 Rural Car 2018 Stand, Manadal

11-08- Balai kheda Mor, Rural Unknow 1 2018 Mandal Vehicle

19-01- Bhagwanpura, Mandal Rural Bike 1 2018

02-01- Bramhno ki Sareri, Pick-up 1 2018 Asind

03-03- Chatarpura, Badnor 1 1 2018

06-10- Chotiyash Ke pass, 3 2018 Badnor

15-08- Dhunwala, Mandal 1 Rural Car 2018

15-04- Ganeshpura 1 1 Rural Tractor 2018 Chowraha, Mandal

01-04- Guljar Farm House 1 Rural Bike 2018 Dhuvalan, Mandal

12-03- Haripura Chowraha, 1 Rural Bus 2018 Mandal

06-07- Harniya Mangri 15 0 2018 Chowraha, Badnor

Page | 2 - 33

A No. of Affected Persons Accident Vehicle Date Urban / Non Location Responsible Fatal Grievous Minor Rural Injured

16-05- Hripura Chowraha, 1 Rural Tractor 2018 Mandal

18-04- Kalichat, Asind 1 1 Truck 2018

06-02- Kornas Chowraha, 1 1 Pick-up 2018 Asind

06-03- Kornas Chowraham, 1 1 Bike 2018 Asind

06-10- Maharahpura 1 1 Truck 2018 Chowraha, Asind

18-01- Mor Ka Nimbahera, 1 Car 2018 Asind

23-03- Mor Ka Nimbahera, 1 Truck 2018 Asind

21-06- Mor Ka Nimbahera, 1 1 Car 2018 Asind

04-02- Near Mandal Pond, 1 Rural Bike 2018 Mandal

25-01- Near Mandal Puliya, 1 1 Rural Bike 2018 Mandal

13-06- Para Chowraha, 1

2018 Badnor

15-09- Para Chowraha, 1

2018 Badnor

09-05- Pathwari Ke Pass 1

2018 Ojhiyana, Badnor

Page | 2 - 34

A No. of Affected Persons Accident Vehicle Date Urban / Non Location Responsible Fatal Grievous Minor Rural Injured

11-03- Pipli Ka Bariya 1 Rural Truck 2018

14-05- Rajiyavash Sahpura 1 Tractor to 2018 Chowraha, Police Rural Tempo Station Jayaja

02-05- Sarhad Haripura, 1 Rural Car 2018 Mandal

02-07- Sarhad Sidiyash, 1 2 Rural Car 2018 Mandal

Source: Design Report and Primary Survey

It has been observed that most of the accident locations are near curved sections of the project road and near intersections. 3 fatal accidents took place near the first blackspot location of Harniya Mangri Chowraha near Badnor which claimed the lives of 17 people. 6 fatal accidents and 2 grievous accidents took place at the second black spot location of Para Chowraha near New Parasoli which claimed the lives of 6 people and leaving 2 people seriously injured. The proposed upgradation of the project road will be help in avoiding accident and enhance road safety.

2.13.2 Remedies and Improvements for Black Spot Removal

Majority of the accidents have occurred near the intersections and curved sections. Therefore, all the intersections have been designed according to the standards specified in the MORTH Type Design for Intersections on National Highways. Harnia Mangri near Badnor (17 Fatalities): Alignment geometry is improved by providing horizontal curve of Radius 240 m with appropriate super elevation which provides user to travel at a design speed of 80kmph safely. Para Chowk near Asind: The accidents took place due to improper design of intersections. The junction improvement has been proposed as per the standard radius and elements defined in MORTH’s standard Type Design for Intersections on National Highway. • Adequate quantity of sign boards, markings and other control and cautionary devices will be installed along the corridor especially near junctions and curved sections. • The signs should be invariably of retro-reflective and standard type helping the road users in the night.

Page | 2 - 35

• The drivers may tend to increase the speed, hence necessary sign boards at proper intervals will be erected warning about the changes on course of road, speed restriction, other hazards etc. • Pedestrian activities along the project corridor, majorly in urban areas and near major intersections will be taken care by providing sign boards and zebra crossings at junctions. • All the blind spots have been removed or rectified by realignment of the highway or by clearing the obstructions leading to lack of visibility. • Bypasses and realignments are proposed to avoid major settlements were pedestrian vehicle conflicts are common.

2.13.3 Road User Safety Solutions a) Highway Design: Geometry of the road have been designed as per the applicable Design speed and relevant codes and standards. The deficient curves (horizontal and vertical) along the existing geometry will be improved. Super elevation as per the curve radius will be provided in order to avoid overturning of vehicles due to speed. Adequate sight distances will be provided in order to avoid blind spots both horizontally and vertically. b) Road Signs: As per the applicability and requirement, road signs will be place all along the road in order to guide the road user to traverse safely. A combination of road signs like Mandatory – Regulatory signs, Cautionary-Warning signs and Informatory signs will be installed. Variable Message signs will also be placed at identified locations in order to inform road user about various details like climatic conditions ahead, diversions, accident zones, speed reduction zones etc. c) Traffic Lights / Signals: Traffic signals will be generally installed at intersections to control the movement of vehicles. All traffic must move in conformity with the traffic lights or signals. Traffic Signals, Pedestrian Signals and Lane Marking signals, d) Pavement Markings: Pavement markings will be provided to delineate the centre of road, identify travel lane, define road edge. Pavement markings also provide information about special lane use. Markings can also be in the form of patterns, arrows, or other devices set into or attached to the carriageway or kerbs or to objects within or adjacent to the carriageway, for control, warning, guidance or information of road users.

2.13.4 Pedestrian Safety

1) Pedestrian Signals Pedestrian Signals will be installed at the urban locations where pedestrian movement is heavy. At crossings with medium pedestrian crossings a push button traffic light can be installed. Pedestrians can push the button and wait for the light to turn green and then move on and cross cautiously. 2) Guard Rails and Lighting Pedestrian Guard Rails will be installed at the following locations.

Page | 2 - 36 a) Hazardous locations on Straight Sections: In particularly busy reaches where the road is congested and vehicles move at a fast pace, guard rails should be provided on both sides of the carriageway so as to channelize the pedestrian on to the planned crossing locations. b) At Junctions/Intersections: Railing barriers will be provided to prevent people from crossing the junctions diagonally at signalised intersections. The barrier must open only at planned crossing facility (at zebra crossing). At Signalised junctions’ sufficient length of guard rail will be provided to guide the pedestrian to the neared planned pedestrian crossing. c) School Colleges: Guard rails will be provided near schools in order to prevent children’s to run straight into the road. d) Bus Stops, Railway Stations, Temple etc: Guard rails will be provided alongside walks with suitable access at bus stops, railway stations and other areas of heavy pedestrian activity such as cinema houses, stadiums etc. e) Overpass, Subway etc.: Guard-rails is to be provided at Overpasses and subways in order to compel the pedestrians to use the facilities provided for them. 3) Pedestrian Crossings a) Zebra Crossings: Zebra crossings will be provided along with stop lines as per IRC 35 for safe crossing of pedestrians. b) Hump Subways: Hump subways are provided by providing the subway partially under ground and partially over the ground in order to reduce the walking length. c) Full Subways: Full subways are provided by providing the subway fully under the ground. d) Foot Overbridge: FoB will be provided where there are space constraints and heavy pedestrian movement. 4) Footpath Footpath with Kerb and pedestrian guard rail will be proposed continuously throughout the urban and built-up sections in order to provide a safe passage for pedestrians to walk along the traffic.

2.13.5 Road Safety Schedule and Traffic Calming Measures

Detailed road safety schedule and traffic calming measures are provided in the form of detailed design report. The schedule contains the provision and locations of road markings and road Signs for all the major junctions, minor junctions, schools, temples, Govt. Offices, other community buildings etc.

2.14 Construction Materials and Use of Fly Ash

In this project, the cutting /excavated materials are proposed to be reused in construction of pavement, structure and slope protection work. The existing bituminous surface will be scrapped and reused after proper treatment in new construction of pavement. The excess lime quantity present around the vicinity of project road is proposed to be used in stabilization of sub-base layer. Renewable energy sources in the form of solar lighting are proposed along all built-up areas along

Page | 2 - 37 the project road. Water conservation technique is adopted along the streams present along project road which serves purpose for agricultural as well as daily needs of localities. Construction material quantity required for the project with and without conventional approach is presented in Table 2.40. Table 0-40: Construction Materials to be used

Quantity S. Description Unit No. Conventional Green % Saving Approach Approach

Package – 1 Km 0.000 to Km 30.050 (Rigid Pavement)

1 Embankment (Avg. 1.50m)

Use of Excavated Material Cum 328348 328348 -

Use of Soil Borrow Area Cum 705637 395441 43.96

Use of Flyash Cum - 310195 -

2 GSB (150 mm thick) Cum 128353 128353 -

3 PQC (250 mm thick) Cum 117898 117898 -

4 DLC (150 mm thick) Cum 75275 75275 -

5 Concrete (CD Structures) Cum 25768.12 25768.12 -

6 Water KL 411563 337116 18.09

Package – 2 Km 30.050 to Km 74.000 (Composite Pavement)

1 Embankment (Avg. 1.50m)

Use of Excavated Material Cum 281291 281291 -

Use of Soil Borrow Area Cum 105731 - 100

Use of Flyash Cum - 105602 -

2 GSB (150 mm thick) Cum 177974 - 48.33

3 CSTB (200 mm thick) Cum - 177974 -

4 WMM (250 mm thick) Cum 134408 - -

Page | 2 - 38

Quantity S. Description Unit No. Conventional Green % Saving Approach Approach

Recycled Pavement (110 5 Cum - 52955 - mm thick)

32336 (60mm 6 DBM (115 mm Thick) Cum 58100 18.34 thick)

20852 7 BC (50 mm thick) Cum 25537 24.41 (40mm thick)

8 Structure Concrete Cum 16095.92 16095.92 -

9 Water KL 167856.98 126891.49 -

Package – 3 Km 74.000 to Km 116.745 (Composite Pavement)

1 Embankment (Avg. 1.50m)

Use of Excavated Material Cum 113170 79087 30.12

Use of Soil Borrow Area Cum - - -

Use of Flyash Cum - 33894 -

2 GSB (200 mm thick) Cum 173589 - -

3 CSTB (200 mm thick) Cum - 173589 -

4 WMM (250 mm thick) Cum 121848 - -

Recycled Pavement (110 5 Cum - 54976 - mm thick)

32162 6 DBM (115 mm Thick) Cum 55709 42.27 (60mm thick)

19694 7 BC (50 mm thick) Cum 24357 19.14 (40mm thick)

8 Structure Concrete Cum 12288.08 12288.08 -

Page | 2 - 39

Quantity S. Description Unit No. Conventional Green % Saving Approach Approach

9 Water KL 98065.42 77110.38 21.37

Source: Design Report

2.15 Sources of Construction Materials

For construction of project road, stone quarries, sand and borrow area have been identified based on material testing. The lead distances of borrow area, aggregate and sand quarries are given in the DPR/Design Report.

Page | 2 - 40

CHAPTER 3: POLICY, LEGAL AND ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK

This section presents the national and state level environmental legislations and regulations; and World Bank Policies relevant to the “Improvement and upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Ras- Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan”. The various environmental regulations applicable and regulatory consents and clearances required for the proposed up-gradation project are also been incorporated in this section.

3.1 Legal Framework

The Government of India has laid out various policy guidelines, acts and regulations pertaining to environment. The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 provides umbrella legislation for the protection of environment. As per this Act, the responsibility to administer, the legislation has been jointly entrusted to the Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) at National level, whereas Rajasthan State Pollution Control Board (RSPCB) at State level in the present context to “Improvement and upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan”.

3.2 Applicable National and State Regulations

The key environmental and other regulations relevant to Improvement and upgradation of NH- 158 connecting to Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan is presented in Table 3.1. Table 3.1: Environmental Regulations Relevant to the Project Road

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required 1 Environment To protect and Yes It is an umbrella -- MoEF& (Protection) improve overall legislation. Various CC, Act, 1986 environment notifications, rules RSPCB and schedules are promulgated under this act. 2 Environmental Prior Project road is not No SEIAA/ Impact environmental Yes covered under the Prior DEIAA Assessment clearance for preview of EIA Environme Notification, designated Notification 2006 ntal 2006 & activities for towards obtaining Clearance subsequent category A and an EC. However, for activities B projects under for opening of opening the EIA borrow areas and borrow Notification, stone quarry, prior areas and 2006 & environmental stone subsequent clearance will be quarry activities required from SEIAA/DEIAA.

Page | 3 - 1

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required 3 Notification for “No agency, Yes Thermal power Essential MORT use of Fly ash, person or plant at Kota is Use of Fly H 3rd November, organization nearest to the ash in the 2009 and its shall, within a project highway & Road amendment on radius of 300 is located at a 25th January km of a thermal distance of about 2016 power plant 168 km from undertake project Highway. construction or Fly ash can approve design provide for construction technically viable, of roads or environmentally flyover sound & cost- embankments effective with top soils; alternative to the guidelines or natural borrow specifications soil. issued by the Indian Road Congress (IRC) as contained in IRC specification No. SP: 58 of 2001 as amended from time to time regarding use of fly ash 4 Forest To check Yes Project is passing Prior MoEF& Conservation deforestation by through forest Forest CC / Act, 1980 restricting area in Pali, Clearance Dept. of conversion of Ajmer, Bhilwara for Forest, forested areas and Rajsamand diversion Govt. of into non- forest divisions of Forest Rajasth forested areas and districts. Land for an Non Forestry Use 5 Rajasthan Permission for Yes Trees on private Tree District Tenancy Act, Felling of Road land shall be Cutting Authorit 1955 Side trees on felled after taking Permissio y/Forest Private Land permission n Dept. 6 Air (Prevention To control air Yes This act is Consent to RSPCB and Control of pollution & applicable for Establish Pollution) Act, controlling construction (CTO) and 1981 emission of air phase to control Consent to pollutants as per stack/fugitive Operate

Page | 3 - 2

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required the prescribed emissions and to for hot mix standards. manage ambient plant, air quality at batching project site and plant and ancillary activities WMM like crusher plant, Plants, DG hot mix plant, sets, etc. concrete batch mix plant, WMM Plants, DG Set etc, for the road The NAAQ standards (CPCB) for Ambient Air Quality have been promulgated by the MoEF&CC for various land uses. 7 Water To control water Yes This act is Consent to RSPCB Prevention and pollution by applicable for Establish Control of controlling construction (CTO) and Pollution) discharge of phase of the road Consent to Act1974 liquid pollutants to manage to Operate as per the liquid effluent for plants prescribed discharges from and standards worker camp, workers concrete batch camps, mix plant, etc. etc. 8 Noise Pollution The standards Yes This act will be None RSPCB (Regulation and for noise for day applicable for all Control) Rule and night have construction 2000 been equipment/ plant promulgated by and machinery the MoEF&CC including vehicles for various land deployed for uses. construction of the proposed road to regulate ambient noise levels This act will be applicable to regulate noise nuisance during construction phase

Page | 3 - 3

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required 8 Hazardous and Protection to the Yes The rules will be Hazardous RSPCB Other Wastes general public applicable to used Waste (Management, against oil generated from Authorizati & Trans- improper construction on with boundary handling and equipment/ CTE and Movement) disposal of machinery during CTO Rules, 2016 hazardous construction and amended wastes works. The rule thereof includes storage, handling, transportation procedures and requirements for safe disposal of hazardous wastes 9 Construction Safe disposal Yes This rule shall be Constructi Local and Demolition and applicable to on and Municip Waste management of generation of Demolition al Management construction and wastes resulting Waste Corpora Rules, 2016 demolition from demolition of Managem tion wastes bridge and culvert ent Plan structures and should be scarifying of prepared , surface of prior to existing road and commenc from road ement of construction works activities. 10 Solid Waste Collection and Yes This rule is Solid Local Management disposal of applicable to all Waste Municip Rules 2016 municipal solid forms/types of Managem al waste solid waste ent Plan Corpora generated at should be tion construction prepared , activities, camp prior to site, plant sites, commenc etc.. ement of works 11 Mines and This act has Yes The construction Permit and Depart Minerals been notified for of project road will mining ment of (Development safe and sound require aggregate lease for mining, and Regulation) mining activity. through mining stone State Amendment from riverbeds quarry Govern Act, 2015 and quarries ment

Page | 3 - 4

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required 12 Minor Mineral For opening Yes Regulate use of Permit and District and concession new borrow / minor minerals mining Collecto Rules, 2015 quarry like stone, soil, lease for r river sand etc. stone quarry 12 Ancient Protection of No No notified None Archae Monuments Archaeological Archaeological ological and Monuments Monuments is Survey Archaeological sites and located within of India Sites and Remains 300m of the Remains Act, project highway. 1958 13 Explosive Act An Act to Yes If contractor open License Chief 1984 regulate the stone quarry and for storage Controll manufacture, use explosive and er of possession, quarrying handling Explosi use, sale, of ves [transport, explosive. import and export] of Explosives 14 The Building To regulate the Yes To ensure safety None. State and Other employment and welfare Labour Construction and conditions measures for Depart Safety and Workers of construction workers employed ment welfare (regulation of workers and to at construction measures employment provide for their sites. for work and conditions safety, health Compliance to force of service) Act, and welfare provisions of employed 1996 measure and for health and safety at other matter measures for the constructio incidental construction n sites are thereto workers in to be conformity with regulated BOCW rule in concerning safety conformity and health in with this construction. act. These regulations to be complied with during the construction of proposed road works.

Page | 3 - 5

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required 15 Bonded Labour An Act to Yes Contractors shall Labour State System provide for the employ numbers License Labour (Abolition) Act, abolition of of Labours during Depart 1976 along with bonded labour Construction ment Rules, 1976 system with a Phase. Contractor view to will ensure that preventing the there is no economic and Bonded Labour physical by him or sub exploitation of contractors. the weaker sections of the people and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto 16 Contract The Object of Yes Contractors shall Labour State Labour the Contract employ numbers License Labour (Regulation and Labour of work-force Depart Abolition) Act Regulation and during ment 1970 along with Abolition) Act, Construction rules, 1971 1970 is to Phase. The Act prevent applies to the exploitation of Principal contract labour Employer of an and also to Establishment introduce better and the conditions of Contractor where work in 20 or more workmen are employed or were employed even for one day during preceding 12 months as Contract Labour. 17 Employees It is a beneficent Yes Contractors shall State Provident piece of social be employing Complianc Labour Funds and welfare Workman more e of Depart Miscellaneous legislation than 20 persons regulation ment Provisions Acts aimed at during s 1952 along with promoting and Construction EPF Scheme securing the Phase Rules and well-being of the Forms employees

Page | 3 - 6

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required 18 Employees Protect the Yes Contractor shall Insurance State State Insurance interest of be applying large Labour Act 1948 along workers in number of labours Depart with Rules and contingencies during ment Regulations such as construction sickness, which will include maternity, both Men and temporary or Women permanent physical disablement, death due to employment injury resulting in loss of wages or earning capacity. the Act also guarantees reasonably good medical care to workers and their immediate dependents. 19 Equal An Act to Yes Contractor shall State Remuneration provide for the be applying large Complianc Labour Act, 1976 along payment of number of labours e of Depart with allied equal during regulation ment Rules remuneration to construction s men and which will include women workers both Men and and for the Women. prevention of discrimination, on the ground of sex, against women in the matter of employment and for matters, connected therewith or incidental thereto. 20 Inter State Act of the Yes Contractor Shall State Migrant Parliament of be employing Complianc Labour Workmen India enacted to large number of e of (Regulation of regulate the workers during

Page | 3 - 7

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required Employment condition of Construction from regulation Depart and Conditions service of inter- other States also. s ment Service Act state labourers in Indian labour law. The Act's purpose is to protect workers whose services are requisitioned outside their native states in India. Whenever an employer faces shortage of skills among the locally available workers, the act creates provision to employ better skilled workers available outside the state 21 Minimum To ensure that Yes Contractor Shall State Wages Act workman gets at be employing Complianc Labour 1948 along with least minimum large number of e of Depart Central Rules wages as fixed workers during regulation ment 1950 by Govt. Construction s Minimum wages sets the lowest limit below which wages cannot be allowed to sink. 22 Persons with It gives effect to Yes Contractor Shall State Disabilities proclamation on be employing Complianc Labour (Equal the full large number of e of Depart Opportunities, participation and workers during regulation ment Protection of equality of the Construction. s Rights and Full persons with Participations) disabilities in the Act, 1995 along Asian & Pacific with Rules,1996 Region and and National provides for Trust for their education, Welfare of employment,

Page | 3 - 8

Regulatory S. Applic Reason for Act / Rules Purpose Clearances Authority No. able Applicability Required Persons with creation of Disabilities barrier free Act,1999 with environment, rules 2000. social security, etc. 23 Central Motor The Act Yes These rules will Motor Vehicle Act provides in be applicable to Vehicle 1988 and detail the road users Depart Central Motor legislative ment Vehicle Rules provisions 1989 regarding licensing of drivers/ conductors, registration of motor vehicles, control of motor vehicles through permits, special provisions relating to state transport undertakings, traffic regulation, insurance, liability, offences and penalties.

3.3 World Bank Safeguard Policies Applicable to Project Road

The safeguard policies of the World Bank relevant to the Improvement and upgradation of NH- 158 connecting to Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan are given in Table 3.2. Table 3.2: Relevant and Applicability of WB Safeguard Policies

World Bank Policy S. Policy Applicability to Safeguard Key Features Triggered No. Sub Project Policy or Not

1. OP/BP 4.01 Overall governing All potential impacts due to Triggered policy intended to the improvement and up- Environmental ensure Bank-financed gradation project road are to Assessment projects are be assessed and necessary mitigation measures are to environmentally sound be incorporated accordingly. and sustainable

Page | 3 - 9

World Bank Policy S. Policy Applicability to Safeguard Key Features Triggered No. Sub Project Policy or Not

2. OP/BP 4.36 Policy is intended to The proposed improvement Triggered Forests support sustainable and upgradation of the and conservation- project road is passing

oriented forest through forest area and management, harness prior forest clearance is potential of forests to required for diversion of reduce poverty in a forest land for non forest sustainable manner, purpose. integrate forests into

sustainable economic development, and protect vital local and global environmental services and values of forests.

3. OP/BP 4.11 Policy is intended to Construction of road will Triggered Physical ensure that projects be on existing road identify and inventory corridor and will avoid Cultural cultural resources that cultural property Resources are potentially affected resources (CPR) and therefore does NOT by the project. Projects warrant shifting or affect should include CPRs. However, there mitigation measures, may be direct or indirect when there are impact on nearby cultural adverse impacts on properties along the road. physical cultural resources.

4. OP/BP 4.11 Involuntary The proposed improvement Triggered Involuntary Resettlement Policy and upgradation of the Resettlement addresses direct project road require land economic and social acquisition and Involuntary impacts from project Resettlement. activities that may cause involuntary taking of land resulting in: (i) relocation or loss of shelter, (ii) loss of assets or access to assets, and/or (iii) loss of income sources or livelihoods

Page | 3 - 10

3.4 Indian Road Congress (IRC) Code of Practices applicable for the Project Road

Key Indian Road Congress (IRC) Code of Practices applicable for the project road with respect to environment are given below:

Table3.3: Indian Road Congress Code of Practices for Project Road

Sl. No. IRC Code Theme Year Purpose

1. Recommendations for Road IRC:34-2011 Construction in water Construction in Areas logged areas Affected by Water Logging, Flooding and/or Salts Infestation

2. Recommended Practice for IRC:36-2010 Issues relating to Borrow Construction of Earth pits Embankments and Sub- Grade for Road Works (First Revision)

3. Guidelines for Pedestrian IRC: 103 -1988 Safety of pedestrians Facilities

4. Recommended Practice for IRC:120-2015 For recycling of Recycling of Bituminous bituminous pavements Pavements

5. Guidelines for Use of IRC:121-2017 Use of Construction and Construction and Demolition Demolition Waste in Waste in Road Sector Road Sector

6. Guidelines on Landscaping IRC:SP:21-2009 Landscaping and Tree and Tree Plantation Plantation along of the road

7. Guidelines on Road Drainage IRC: SP: 42-1994 Drainage

8. Highway Safety Code IRC: SP: 44-1994 Highways safety

9. Guidelines for Use of Flyash IRC:SP:58-2001 Use of Flyash in Road in Road Embankments Embankments

10. Guidelines for Use of IRC:SP:59-2002 Use of Geotextiles in Geotextiles in Road Road Pavements and Associated Works

Page | 3 - 11

Sl. No. IRC Code Theme Year Purpose Pavements and Associated Works

11. Guidelines for Soil and IRC:SP-89-2010 Soil and Granular Granular Material Stabilization Material Stabilization Using Cement Lime and Fly Using Cement Lime and Ash Fly Ash

12. Guidelines on Requirements IRC:SP-93-2017 Requirements for for Environmental Clearance Environmental Clearance for Road Projects for Road Projects

13. Guidelines for the use of IRC:SP-98-2013 Use of waste plastic in hot Waste Plastic in Hot bituminous mixes (dry Bituminous Mixes (Dry process) in wearing Process) in Wearing Courses courses

14. Use of Cold Mix Technology in IRC:SP-100-2014 Use of Cold Mix Construction and Technology in Maintenance of Roads Using Construction and Bitumen Emulsion Maintenance of Roads Using Bitumen Emulsion

14. Interim Guidelines for Warm IRC:SP-101-2014 Warm Mix Asphalt Mix Asphalt

15. Guidelines on Preparation IRC:SP-108-2015 Preparation and and Implementation of Implementation of Environment Management Environment Plan Management Plan

3.4 Environmental Standards

Environmental standards applicable to the Improvement and upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan are National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009 are as given below: • National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009 • Ambient Noise Standards • Drinking Water Quality Standards-IS:10500:2012 • CPCB Standards for Surface Water Use

Page | 3 - 12

CHAPTER 4: BASELINE ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

4.1 General

The project road, Ras-Beawar-Asind-Mandal Section of NH 158 NH-200 is situated in Pali, Ajmer, Rajsamand and Bhilwara districts of Rajasthan. The baseline environmental conditions along the project road are discussed in the following sub sections: The collection of baseline information on physical, biological and socio-economic aspects of the project area is the most important reference for carrying out environmental impact assessment studies. The description of environmental settings includes the characteristic of area in which the activity of project road would occur and cover area likely to be impacted by anticipated environmental impacts. For environmental assessment along the project road, information and data have been obtained by intensive site visits, primary data collection by monitoring and analysis, secondary data from published sources, and various government agencies. Important ecosystem components have been systematically analyzed in this environmental assessment report. The primary data for ambient air quality, ambient noise level, water quality (ground and surface) and soil quality were collected through environment monitoring undertaken by Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur.

4.2 Study Area

The proposed Right of Way (RoW) of the project road has been considered as Corridor of Impact (CoI) for baseline environmental study, while 10 km area on either side (aerial distance) from the project road have been considered as project influence area (PIA) for collection of primary and secondary data. The primary environmental monitoring and field survey were carried out along the project road.

4.3 Physical Environment

The physical environmental profile along the project road has been discussed in the following subsections:

4.3.1 Topography and Physiography

The terrain along the project road is rolling and plain. Major rivers crossing the alignment are Lilri, Khari and Mansi Rivers at design chainage Km 1.190, Km 71.600 and Km 92.500, respectively. The chainage wise distribution of topography along the project road is tabulated in Table 4.1.

Page | 4 - 1 Table 0.1: Terrain Along the Project Area

Sl. Existing Chainage Road Terrain Length (Km) No. From To 1. SH-39 129.000 130.100 Plain 1.100 2. SH-39 130.100 131.000 Rolling 0.900 3. SH-39 131.000 132.100 Plain 1.100 4. SH-39 132.100 148.660 Rolling 16.560 5. SH-39 73.000 75.660 Rolling 2.660 9. MDR-84 103.640 80.000 Rolling 23.640 10. MDR-84 80.000 76.000 Plain 4.000 11. MDR-84 76.000 57.900 Rolling 18.100 12. MDR-84 57.900 52.800 Plain 5.100 13. MDR-84 52.800 44.900 Rolling 7.900 14. MDR-84 44.900 30.000 Plain 14.900 15. MDR-84 30.000 10.940 Plain 19.060 Total 115.020 Source: Design Report

Project Road

Figure 4.1: Project Road Alignment Marked on Physiographic Map of

Rajasthan State

Page | 4 - 2 The project road alignment marked on physiographic map of Rajasthan is shown in Figure 4.1. 4.3.2 Geology According to the Rajasthan State geological atlas, the project road is the part of Archaean and Lower to Middle Proterozoic formations. In most of part of the area along the project road, weathered gneiss forms upper part of the bedrock. Weathered gneiss with schist occupies under thin cover of alluvium. In schists, phyllites and slates, weathered zone extends to depth greater than in granites and gneisses. Muscovite schist often grades into gneiss. These have well- developed foliation and irregular joints and are intruded by granite, pegmatite and quartz veins. The contact between these intrusives and schists provides good channel for ground water circulation. The project road alignment marked on geological and mineral map of Rajasthan State is shown in Figure 4.2.

Project Road

Figure 4.2: Geological & Mineral Map of the Area Source: Geological Survey of India

Page | 4 - 3 4.3.3 Seismicity

The project road is located in Seismic Zone II as per BIS Classification. The project road alignment marked on seismic map of Rajasthan State is shown in Figure 4.3.

Project Road

Figure 4.3: Seismic Map of the Area 4.3.4 Draughts

The project districts have the varied frequency of draughts occurrence. The information as filtered from draught occurrence map are tabulated in Table 4.2.

Table 0.2: Draughts Occurrence Along the Project Road

Project Districts Frequency of Draught Pali Once in 5 Years Ajmer Once in 4 Years Rajsamand Once in 6 Years Bhilwara Once in 5 Years Source: Disaster Management handbook Rajasthan The project road alignment marked on Draught Frequency map of Rajasthan State is presented in Figure 4.4.

Page | 4 - 4

Project Road

Figure 4.4: Drought Map of the Area

Source: Disaster Management Handbook Rajasthan

4.3.5 Floods The project road alignment marked on Flood Zone Map of Rajasthan state prepared by the Disaster Management, Relief & Civil Defence Department is presented in Figure 4.5. Except few areas near Lilri, Khari and Mansi Rivers, the project road is not located in flood zone.

Project Road

Figure 4.5: Flood Zone Map of the Area Source: Flood Zone Map of Disaster Management, Relief & Civil Defence Department

Page | 4 - 5 4.3.6 Soil The soil of the area along the project road varies from sandy, red-yellow, red and mixed red black in nature. Texture of soil along the project road is sandy. The project road alignment marked on soil map of Rajasthan State is presented in Figure 4.6.

Project Road

Figure 4.6: Soil Maps of the Area

4.3.5.1 Soil Characteristics

For studying the soil characteristics, five samples were collected to assess the baseline soil characteristics along the project road. The physical, chemical, nutrient characteristics of soil samples were determined. The composite soil samples were collected by ramming a core-cutter into the soil up to a depth of 15 cm. Soil samples were analyzed as per the standard methods prescribed in “Soil Chemical Analysis” (M.L. Jackson, 1967). Table 0.3: Details of Soil Sampling Locations S. Monitoring Chainage Locations Land Use No. Station Code (Km) 1 S1 15.000 Mandal Agricultural 2 S2 30.500 Haripura village Agricultural 3 S3 57.000 Beawar Road Asind Agricultural 4 S4 105.000 Near Jawaja; Just Outsite of Beawar Agricultural 5 S5 130.000 Beawar road Ras Agricultural

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Page | 4 - 6 Details of soil sampling locations along the project road are described in Table 4.3 with chainage and land use of sampling locations. The photographs of soil sampling are shown in Figure 4.7.

Figure 0.7: Photographs of Soil Sampling 4.3.5.2 Results of Soil Analysis

The important characteristics of soil namely, Moisture, Calcium Carbonate as CaCO3, Calcium, Magnesium, Porosity, Organic Matter, Organic Carbon, Available Phosphorous, Moisture Retention Capacity, Iron, Available Potassium, Sand, Silt, Clay, Lead and Available Nitrogen were analyzed for the soil samples collected from the sites along the project road. The analysis results for soil characteristics along the project road are presented in Table 4.4.

Texture of soil along the project road is sandy. pH of soil ranges from 8.46 to 8.69, which is alkaline in nature. The soluble calcium content as Ca in the soil samples along the proposed road was found in the range of 1.24% to 1.94 %. Calcium is a highly essential nutrient to plants and affects the activities of certain enzymes. It is remains active in enzyme system and has a vital part in photosynthetic process. Magnesium content as Mg in the soil samples ranges from 0.144% to 0.216%. Magnesium in appreciable amount helps in plant growth. Available phosphorous ranges from 48 to 62 kg/ha. Total organic carbon content was found low in the soil samples and ranges from 0.023% to 0.083%. Potassium content in soil samples was found in the range of 146 to 204 kg/ha. Available nitrogen content in soil samples were found in range of 22 to 172 kg/ha. Porosity of soil ranges from 32.73 to 40.79% along the project road.

Page | 4 - 7 Table 0.4: Analysis Results of Soil Samples

S. Results Parameter Unit No. S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 1. Electrical Conductivity ms 0.175 0.780 0.393 0.850 0.573 2. Moisture % 2.736 2.889 1.786 2.951 2.188

3. Calcium Carbonate as CaCO3 % 3.75 3.35 5.0 5.75 4.5 4. Calcium as Ca % 1.24 1.46 1.72 1.94 1.56 5. Magnesium as Mg % 0.156 0.168 0.168 0.216 0.144 6. Porosity % 39.85 38.79 36.85 40.79 32.73 7. Organic Matter % 0.164 0.082 0.129 0.046 0.152 8. Organic Carbon % 0.083 0.042 0.066 0.023 0.077 9. Available Phosphorous as P Kg/ha 54 62 48 52 60 10. Moisture Retention Capacity % 16.53 18.34 21.58 17.32 17.78 11. Iron as Fe % 0.0018 0.0012 0.0014 0.0014 0.0019 12. Available Potassium as K Kg/ha 168 146 204 178 186 13. Sand % 87.95 86.73 84.92 88.56 88.98 14. Silt % 4.63 4.63 6.16 4.97 4.27 15. Clay % 7.42 8.64 8.92 6.47 6.75 16. Lead as Pb % 0.0002 0.0003 0.0004 0.0004 0.0004 17. Available Nitrogen as N Kg/ha 22 140 134 150 172

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Page | 4 - 8 4.3.7 Water Resources and Quality

Surface Water Resources The project road is crossing Lilri, Khari and Mansi Rivers at design chainage Km 1.190, Km 71.600 and Km 92.500, respectively. The project road alignment marked on soil map of Rajasthan State is presented in Figure 4.8.

Project Road

Figure 4.8: Drainage Maps of the Area

Ground Water Resources

Rainfall is the major source of ground water recharge in the project region. Rajasthan receives much lower rainfall compared to the other parts of the country. Out of the total rainfall, a sizable portion is in the beginning of the rainy season and this is used for building the soil moisture and lost to evaporation because of its arid conditions.

Ground water is predominant source of water in the area for domestic, agriculture and other purposes. Hand pumps, open wells and borewells are used in the area along the project road to exploit ground water resources. In alluvium area, depth is aquifer is confined upto 20 m and yield varies from 250 to 1500 m3/day. In case of gneiss formation, depth of aquifer varies from 150 to 200m and yield of aquifer ranges from 30 to 40 m3/day. Schist/Phyllite formation, depth of boreholes ranges from 150 to 200 m whereas yields from 30 to 40m3/day. In case of dolomitic

Page | 4 - 9 limestone/ sandstone formation depth ranges of borehole varies from 120 to 200 m and yield of aquifer ranges from 40 to 120 m3/day.

Ground Water Quality

During the study period, three ground water samples were collected to assess the ground water quality along the project road. All the basic precautions were taken to avoid any contamination during the sampling. The representative samples of ground water were collected as prescribed in IS 1622:1981-Methods of Sampling and Microbiological Examination of Eater & IS 3025 Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for Water and Waste Water. The locations of ground water samples are given in Table 4.5. The photographs of ground water samples are given in Figure 4.9.

Table 0.5: Ground Water Sampling Locations

S. Location Code Location Chainage (Km) No. 1 GW1 Ras 130.000 2 GW2 Near Jawaja (Just outskirt of Beawar) 105.000 3 GW3 Haripura 30.500

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Figure 0.9: Ground Water Sampling Locations Analysis Results of Ground Water Samples The analysis results of ground samples are tabulated in Table 4.6. Analysis of the ground water sample was carried out as per established standard methods and procedures prescribed by IS nd 3025 Codes and APHA 22 edition 2012. Total hardness (as CaCO3) ranges 412 to 622 mg/l and was found higher than the permissible limit (200 mg/l) at all 3 locations, however at Haripura location hardness was below the permissible limit (200 mg/l). Analyzed values of Total Dissolve Solid, Calcium as Ca, Magnesium as Mg, Chlorides as Cl- and Fluoride were also found exceeding the desirable limit, though these were found within permissible limit as per IS-10500:2012.

Page | 4 - 10 Table 0.6: Physio-Chemical Analysis of Ground Water

S Results IS 10500:2012 Parameters Unit No. GW1 GW2 GW3 Desirable Permissible 1 pH - 7.60 7.82 7.40 6.5- 8.5 No relaxation 2 Color Hazen <5 <5 <5 5 15 3 Odour - Odourless Odourless Odourless Agreeable Agreeable 4 Taste - Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable 5 Temperature °C 22.4 21.8 20.4 - - 6 Turbidity NTU 0.40 0.08 0.06 1 5 7 Total Dissolve Solid mg/l 1972 1408 1324 500 2000 Total Hardness as 8 mg/l 622 622 412 200 600 CaCO3 9 Calcium as Ca mg/l 140.8 143.2 99.2 75 200 10 Magnesium as Mg mg/l 64.8 63.36 39.36 30 100 11 Alkalinity mg/l 368 344 286 200 600 12 Chlorides as Cl mg/l 390 345 290 250 1000 13 Chromium as Cr6+ mg/l <0.01 <0.01 <0.01 0.05 0.05 14 Copper mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.05 0.15 15 Fluoride mg/l 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.0 1.5

16 Sulphate as SO4 mg/l 54.61 53.07 46.73 200 400

17 Nitrate as NO3 mg/l 8.45 7.76 7.17 45 No relaxation 18 Arsenic as As mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.1 0.5 19 Zinc as Zn mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 5 15 20 Lead as Pb mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.01 No relaxation 21 Potassium as K mg/l 14.38 13.49 12.64 - - 22 Sodium as Na mg/l 153.9 128.9 108.9 - - 23 Manganese as Mn mg/l <0.001 <0.001 <0.001 0.1 0.3 24 Iron as Fe mg/l 0.07 <0.01 0.04 0.3 No relaxation MPN/ 25 Fecal Coliform <2 <2 <2 Absent Absent 100 ml MPN/10 26 Total Coliform <2 <2 <2 Absent Absent 0 ml

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Surface Water Quality Two surface water samples were collected from the surface water bodies to assess the surface water quality along the project road. Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur collected surface water samples for testing and analysis of relevant physical and

Page | 4 - 11 chemical parameters as per IS 2296. Surface water quality along the project road was monitored as per the parameters laid down by Central Pollution Control Board for surface water quality criteria classes. All the basic precautions were taken care to avoid any contamination during the sampling. The representative samples of surface water were collected as prescribed in IS:1622 and IS:3025 (Part 1). The locations of surface water samples are given in Table 4.7. The photographs of surface water sampling are given in Figure 4.10. Table 0-7: Details of Surface Water Quality Sampling Location

S. Chainage Type of Location Code Location No. Source 1 SW 1 Prem Sagar Talav Near Ashind Km 54.500 Water Body 2 SW 2 Water Body (Mandal Talav) Km 15.000 Water Body

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Figure 0.10: Surface Water Sampling Locations

Analysis of the soil sample samples was carried out as per established standard methods and procedures prescribed by CPCB, IS 3025 Codes and APHA 22nd edition 2012. The analysis results of ground samples are tabulated in Table 4.8. The results were compared with the Class C water (Drinking Water Source after Conventional Treatment and Disinfection). It is observed from the analysis, that surface water quality meets CPCB water quality criteria for Class C standards and can be used as drinking water source after conventional treatment and disinfection. Presence of Fecal Coliform indicates that there is contamination in surface water through human excreta, household waste, etc. Table 0.8: Analysis for Surface Water Samples

Results Tolerance Limit S. Parameters Unit IS:2296 CLASS No. SW1 SW2 C 1. pH - 8.66 9.15 6.5-8.5 2. Color Hazen <5 <5 300 3. Odour - Odourless Odourless - 4. Taste - Normal Normal -

Page | 4 - 12 Results Tolerance Limit S. Parameters Unit IS:2296 CLASS No. SW1 SW2 C 5.. Temperature °C 21.8 21.7 - 6. Turbidity NTU 0.04 0.0 - 7. Total Solids mg/L 254 188 - 8. Total Dissolved Solids mg/L 254 186 1500 9. Total Suspended Solid mg/L Nil 02 -

10. Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/L 86 58 - 11. Calcium as Ca2+ mg/L 22.4 12.8 - 12. Magnesium as Mg2+ mg/L 7.2 6.24 - 13. Alkalinity mg/L 72 48 - 14. Chloride as Cl- mg/L 101 16 600 15. Dissolved Oxygen mg/L 5.2 6.3 4.0 16. Chromium as Cr6+ mg/L <0.01 <0.01 0.05 17. Copper mg/L <0.001 <0.001 1.5 18. Fluoride mg/L 0.20 0.10 1.5

19. Phosphate as PO4 mg/L 0.33 0.18 -

20. Sulphate as SO4 mg/L 6.54 4.61 400

21. Nitrate as NO3 mg/L 2.43 1.34 50 22. Nitrate as N mg/L 0.55 0.30 - 23. Arsenic as As mg/L <0.001 <0.001 0.2 24. Zinc as Zn mg/L <0.001 <0.001 15 25. Lead as Pb mg/L <0.001 <0.001 0.1 26. Potassium as K mg/L 8.39 2.41 - 27. Sodium as Na mg/L 36.49 14.36 - 28. Manganese as Mn mg/L <0.001 <0.001 - 29. Iron as Fe mg/L 0.04 0.02 50 MPN/100 30. Fecal Coliform 48 64 - ml MPN/100 31. Total Coliform 1.2 X 102 1.4 X 102 5000 ml

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Page | 4 - 13 4.3.8 Climate and Meteorology

Long-term Climatological Scenario The meteorological parameters play a vital role in transport and diffusion of pollutants in the atmosphere. The collection and analysis of meteorological data, therefore, is an essential component of environmental impact assessment studies. The long term and short-term impact assessment could be made through utilization and interpretation of meteorological data collected over long and short periods, respectively.

Climatological (long-term) data is obtained from the closest Indian Meteorology Department (IMD) station or from any other nearby station, which has been collecting meteorological data for more than ten years. Climatological data for the study area was obtained from IMD Stations at Ajmer and Bhilwara and the same is discussed in following sub sections: The long-term climatological data as collected from IMD Stations at Ajmer and Bhilwara is tabulated in Table 4.9 and Table 4.10, respectively. Table 0.9: Climatological Data - Ajmer IMD Observatory

Relative Humidity (%) Temperature (°C) Monthly Mean Wind Month total Rainfall Speed (kmph) Morning Evening Highest Lowest (mm) January 3.4 62 32 29.1 5.4 6.1 February 4.0 53 25 32.4 7.8 7.4 March 5.3 40 17 38.0 12.7 3.5 April 6.9 30 15 41.9 17.4 4.2 May 9.7 37 18 43.6 21.8 18.3 June 9.8 54 32 43.2 22.2 53.2 July 9.1 73 57 39.1 22.7 179.7 August 7.7 79 64 36.0 22.5 159.2 September 6.0 67 49 38.0 21.5 77.0 October 3.7 50 28 37.6 16.2 11.3 November 2.8 54 31 34.1 10.7 3.1 December 2.7 60 34 30.1 6.3 2.1

Source: Climatological Normals, 1981-2010, India Meteorological Department, Ajmer

Page | 4 - 14 Table 0-10: Long-term Climatological Data for Bhilwara IMD Observatory Relative Humidity (%) Temperature (°C) Monthly total Month Morning Rainfall Highest Lowest (mm) January 70 28.1 3.6 5.7 February 60 32.0 5.4 2.2 March 56 37.8 10.6 3.9 April 50 41.6 16.2 7.0 May 49 44.6 20.6 13.4 June 60 44.5 21.4 41.6 July 77 39.0 20.8 208.3 August 82 35.1 20.4 232.1 September 77 36.3 19.6 55.7 October 62 36.5 14.2 10.5 November 64 33.8 7.8 6.5 December 69 29.7 4.7 1.6 Source: Climatological Normal, 1981-2010, India Meteorological Department, Bhilwara Average Annual Rainfall The average annual rainfall recorded at Ajmer and Bhilwara Observatories is 525 mm and 589 mm, respectively. Climate Variability High resolution climate change scenarios for India, generated by PRECIS indicate a rise in annual mean surface air temperature for all parts of India. Temperatures are likely to rise by 2 – 5 °C and 2.5 - 4°C in A2 and B2 IPCC SRES emission scenarios by the end of 21st Century (2071-2100), with warming more pronounced over the northern parts of India. The warming is also expected to be relatively greater in winter and post-monsoon seasons than in the summer monsoon season. Spatial pattern of rainfall change estimates a 20% rise in all India summer monsoon rainfall for the future scenarios. The model projections for mean annual surface air temperature in Rajasthan indicates an increase by 2 ºC to 4°C for the 2071-2100 period. Mean annual rainfall is predicted to decrease slightly, whereas the extreme rainfall is expected to increase in frequency and intensity. Maximum 1-day rainfall is expected to increase by 20mm, and maximum 5-day rainfall by 30mm in the period 2071-2100 (SDC V& A Program, 2009). Regional Climate Modelling projections for Rajasthan using the A 1B SRES scenario conducted for near-term of 2021-2050 project an increase in temperature by about 2 ºC to 2.5ºC. The average rise in temperature in Rajasthan projected by 2035 is in the range of 1.8°C to 2.1°C and maximum rise in temperature is projected for South Eastern part of the Rajasthan. These model runs indicate that minimum temperature

Page | 4 - 15 rise will be much more than maximum temperature rise in Rajasthan. The model runs do not indicate any significant change in precipitation (Gopala Krishnan et al 2011). Onsite Micro-Meteorological Scenario Primary meteorological data of 15th October, 2015 to 14th January, 2016 months was collected along the project road. The coordinates of meteorological data collections are 26°12’42.20”N and 74°21’10.60”E. The summary of micro meteorological data collected during 15th October, 2015 to 14th January, 2016 is presented in below Table 4.11. Table 0.11: Summary of Meteorological Data for NH – 158 Temperature (°C) Average Average Relative Total Rainfall Period Wind Speed Humidity (%) (mm) Max Min Avg. (kmph) 15th Oct. to 31st 39.4 18 27.9 43.2 2.1 0 Oct. 2015 1st Nov. to 30 Nov. 35.6 12 24.2 47.9 1.3 0 2015 1st Dec. to 31st 35.6 7 19.1 48.1 1.2 3.5 Dec. 2015 1st Jan. to 14th Jan. 32.1 12 21.1 51.1 1.0 0 2016 Average 35.7 12.3 23.1 47.6 1.4 0.9

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur The wind rose diagram for the study period is shown in Figure 4.11.

Figure 0.11: Wind rose Diagram

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Page | 4 - 16

Temperature at the monitoring site was found minimum as 7.0°C during December, 2015 and maximum as 39.4°C in the month of October, 2015. The average wind speed at the monitoring site was 1.4 kmph with 82.4% of calm condition.

4.3.9 Land Use

The land use pattern along the project road is mainly barren and agricultural land followed by urban / settlements areas. Table 4.12 gives the details of land use pattern in different sections of the project road. Table 0.12: Land Use Pattern in Project Area Land Use LHS RHS SH-39 (Ras - Beawar) Agricultural 48% 42% Built-up 15% 17.5% Barren 37% 40.5% MDR-84 and SH-61 ( Beawar-Mandal) Agricultural 12% 9% Built-up 20% 19% Barren 68% 72% Source: Design Report

4.3.10 Ambient Air Quality

The ambient air quality with respect to the study area along the project road form baseline information. The study area represents mostly urban, rural/residential environment. The sources of air pollution in the region are vehicular traffic, dust arising from unpaved road and domestic fuel burning. The prime objective of the baseline air quality study is to establish the existing ambient air quality along the project road. This will also be useful for assessing the conformity to standards of the ambient air quality specified by CPCB due to the construction and operation of the project road. This section describes the identification of sampling locations, methodology adopted for monitoring and frequency of sampling. The results of monitoring during the study period are also presented in this section.

Selection of Sampling Locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been established through a scientifically designed ambient air quality monitoring network and is based on the following considerations:

• Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale;

Page | 4 - 17 • Major settlements along the project road; • Topography of the study area; • Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status; and • Representatives of likely impact areas along the project road.

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at 5 locations with due consideration to the above mentioned criteria.

Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Ambient air quality monitoring was carried out with a frequency of two days per week at 5 locations during the study period. The baseline data of ambient air quality was monitored for the below mentioned parameters:

• Particulate Matter (PM2.5);

• Particulate Matter (PM10);

• Sulphur Dioxide (SO2);

• Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2); and • Carbon Monoxide (CO);

Sampling and Analytical Techniques

PM2.5 and PM10 have been estimated by gravimetric method. Modified West and Gaeke method

(IS-5182 part-II, 1969) has been adopted for estimation of SO2. Jacobs-Hochheiser method (IS-

5182 part-IV, 1975) has been adopted for the estimation of NO2.

The techniques adopted for sampling and analysis of ambient air quality are given in Table 4.13 along with the minimum detection limits for each parameter.

Table 4.13: Techniques Used For Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Minimum Detectable Sn. Parameter Technique Limit (g/m3)

1. Particulate Matter (PM2.5) Gravimetric Method 1.0

2. Particulate Matter (PM10) Gravimetric Method 1.0 3. Sulphur Dioxide Modified West and Gaeke 5.0 4. Nitrogen Oxide Modified Jacob & Hochheiser 5.0 5. Carbon Monoxide Non Dispersive Infrared 1 Spectroscopy (NDIR) The ambient air samplers were placed at a height of at least 3 m above the ground level at each monitoring locations at per CPCB guidelines, for negating the effects of windblown ground dust. Also distance of the sampler to any air flow obstacle i.e. buildings, more than two times the height

Page | 4 - 18 of the obstacle above the sampler was ensured. The samples were placed at open space free from trees and vegetation which otherwise act as a sink of pollutants resulting in lower levels in monitoring results. Monitoring was conducted as per the CPCB guidelines and notifications. With a view to collecting the ambient air samples, calibrated Respirable Dust Samplers (RDS) along with gaseous attachment and Fine Particulate Samplers were used. The RDS was well capable of drawing air at a flow rate of 1.0 to 1.5 m3/min with very little pressure drop for RDS and the Impactor system of FPS is designed to operate at an air flow rate of 1 m3/hr. Filter papers were used for the collection of PM10 and PM2.5. SO2 was collected by drawing air at a flow-rate of 1.0 litres per minute (lpm) through an absorbing solution i.e., Sodium Tetra Chloro Mercurate

(TCM) (Modified West and Gaeke Method) as per IS 5182 Part II. Whereas, NO2 samples were collected by drawing air at a flow rate of 1.0 litres per minute (lpm) through the mixture of absorbing solutions i.e. Sodium Hydroxide and Sodium Arsenite (Jacobs and Hochheiser Method) as per IS 5182 Part VI. CO samples were collected with the help of bubbler and analysed in NDIR spectroscope. The monitoring of the ambient air quality (AAQ) was carried out during 15th October’ 2015 to 14th January’ 2016. The ambient air quality monitoring locations details are given in Table 4.14. The photographs of ambient air quality monitoring are shown in Figure 4.12. Table 0.14: Locational Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring

Height of Location Chainage S. No. Station Name Land use Instrument from GL Code (Km) (Meter) Commercial & 1 AAQ 1 130.000 Ras 4.0 Residential 2 AAQ 2 105.000 Near Jawaja Residential 4.5 3 AAQ 3 57.000 Ashind Commercial 5.0 4 AAQ 4 30.500 Haripura Residential 4.0 Pratap Nagar 5 AAQ 5 14.000 Commercial 4.0 (Mandal)

Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Page | 4 - 19

Figure 0.12: Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations Results & Analysis of Ambient Air Quality Ambient air quality monitoring results are summarized and tabulated in Table 4.15. The monitored concentrations of PM2.5, PM10, SO2, NO2 and CO were found well within the prescribed limits of the National Ambient Air Quality Standards. The maximum and minimum concentrations of PM10 were found 84.4 µg/m3 and 74.21 µg/m3 at Ras and Haripura, respectively. The maximum 3 concentration of PM2.5 was found 32.88 µg/m at Ras, while the lowest value of PM2.5 was recorded to be 27.1 µg/m3 at Asind. Among all five selected location maximum pollutant concentration was recorded at Ras (AAQ-1) due to the presence of industrial area in the proximity and high vehicular movement in comparison to other monitoring sites.

Page | 4 - 20 Table 0.3: Ambient Air Quality Along the Project Road Pollutant Concentration (98th Percentile Value)

Monitoring Station Code SO2 NO2 PM2.5 PM10 CO (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (µg/m3) (mg/m3) AQ1 32.88 17.91 32.88 84.35 BDL AQ2 13.64 13.78 29.57 81.19 BDL AQ3 11.87 12.57 27.09 77.04 BDL AQ4 6.15 13.85 30.63 81.57 BDL AQ5 8.40 13.58 31.94 74.21 BDL Standards (Industrial, Residential, 80 80 60 100 2 Rural & other Areas) Standards (Ecologically Sensitive 80 80 60 100 2 area as Notified by Central Govt.) Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

4.3.11 Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Station and Methodology Noise is an important environmental attribute in road projects because vehicular traffic is a major source of noise pollution. To study the baseline noise levels along the project road, noise level monitoring was carried out continuously for 24-hours with one-hour interval at each location using Sound level meter (HTC: made in Taiwan Model No. SL-1350). The day noise level has been monitored during 6 AM to 10 PM and night levels during 10 PM to 6 AM at all locations. During the study period, 5 locations were selected for noise monitoring to characterize the baseline noise levels in the project area. The locations for noise monitoring along the project road were identified based on the land use pattern along the project highway. The ambient noise monitoring locations details are given in Table 4.16. The photographs of ambient noise levels monitoring are shown in Figure 4.13.

Table 0.4: Noise Measurements Locations Station Code Location Land-Use Chainage (km) N1 Ras Commercial & Residential 130.000 N2 Near Jawaja Residential 105.000 N3 Ashind Commercial 57.000 N4 Haripura Residential 30.500 N5 Pratap Nagar Commercial 14.000 Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur Hourly Leq values were computed by the noise integrating sound level meter and statistical analysis was undertaken to compute day and nigh time noise levels equivalents.

Page | 4 - 21

Figure 0.13: Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations

Result of Ambient Noise Monitoring

Ambient noise monitoring result are given Table 4.17. The Leq day and Leq night calculated results were compared with the standards prescribed by CPCB for various zones / land use. It is observed from tabulated result that noise levels (Leq) at Ras, Ashind and Pratap Nagar are well within the stipulated CPCB standard, whereas at Haripura & Jawaja the noise levels were found slightly higher side in respect to stipulated noise standard due to vehicular traffic plying on the road. Table 4.17: Results of Primary Noise Monitoring Monitoring Noise Levels dB (A) Noise Standards dB (A) Location Station Code Leq day Leq night Leq day Leq night N1 Ras 62.8 50.7 65 55 N2 Near Jawaja 62.8 51.5 55 45 N3 Ashind 61.9 50.0 65 55 N4 Haripura 63.0 51.8 55 45 N5 Pratap Nagar 60.9 50.2 65 55 Source: Environmental and Chemical Laboratory, Wolkem India Limited, Udaipur

Page | 4 - 22 4.4 Biological Environment The project road is located in semi arid biogeographical region. Vegetation found in the project are is mostly tropical thorn and dry deciduous types. 4.4.1 Forest Area Along the project road, there are many forest areas. Therefore, improvement and upgradation of the project road will require diversion of about 7.2137 ha of forest land. The division wise details of forest land diversion are tabulated in Table 4.18. Table 0.5: Division-wise Break-up of Forest Land Diversion

Design Chainage (km) Total S. Village Forest Block Length Area (ha) No. Start End (m) Pali Forest Division Gopal Pura 1 Babra 7+013 8+342 1329 1.0946 Unclassified Forest 2 Sumel Reserved 17+691 18+095 404 1.1028 Naharpura 3 Forest 18+573 19+984 1411 2.7898 Ajmer Forest Division Rajiyawas Gohana Protected 4 31+600 32+000 400 0.4822 Raitakhera Forest Rajsamand Forest Division 5 Shayopura 40+850 41+500 650 0.1740 Badiya Hira 6 Reserved Forest 41+635 42+250 615 0.3215 Bhilwara Forest Division Chatarpura 7 Chatarpura 45300 45420 120 0.0814 Unclassified Forest Laxmipura 8 Laxmipura 48500 48900 400 0.201 Unclassified Forest 9 Ojiyana 49250 49450 200 0.0831 10 Ojiyana Ojiyana 49700 49850 150 0.1965 Ojiyana and Unclassified Forest 11 51500 51600 100 0.0003 Mothi Badnor Unclassified 12 Badnor 58200 58250 50 0.0333 Forest Para Unclassified 13 Pura 63850 65450 1600 0.6532 Forest Total 7.2137 Source: Primary survey and Consultation with Forest Dept.

Page | 4 - 23 4.4.2 Vegetation Along the Project Road The baseline study of flora has primarily taken into account the vegetation along the roadside, as the direct impact of the road project is anticipated on the trees within and adjacent to the RoW. The predominant tree species are along the project road are Prosopis juliflora, Neem (Azadirchta indica) and Acacia nilotica. The other species located within the project corridor are peepal and sissoo besides other miscellaneous species. The list of trees species commonly found along the project road is given in Table 4.19. Table 0.6: List of Plants Commonly Found in the Study Area

S. No. Common Name Scientific Name S. No. Common Name Scientific Name 1. Aam Mangifera indica 6. Gurar Albizia procera 2. Amaltas Cassia fistula 7. Kher Acacia catechu 3. Babool Acacia nilotica 8. Neem Azadirachta indica 4. Bargad Ficus benghalensis 9. Pipal Ficus religiosa 5. Ber Ziziphus mauritiana 10. Imli Tamarindus indica

Source: Primary Sighting and Consultation

Rare, Endangered and Threaten (RET) Species along the Project Road

No Rare, Endangered and Threaten (RET) species of flora have been reported along the roadside during the study.

4.4.3 Protected Areas/Wildlife Sanctuary

Todgarh Raoli Wildlife Sanctuary is the nearest protected area from the project road, which is located about 7.6 Km from the existing Ch 31.000 of the project road. Eco-sensitive zone of Todgarh Raoli Wildlife Sanctaury has been notified by Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEF&CC) vide Notification No. 1041 dated 13th April, 2017. The eco sensitive zone of Todgarh Raoli Wildlife Sanctuary covers the area of 1 kilometer wide strip from the outer boundary of the Sanctuary. Therefore, project highway is well outside the eco-sensitive zone of the Todgarh Raoli Wildlfie Sanctaury. The location of wildlife sanctuary with respect to the project road is shown in Figure 4.14.

Page | 4 - 24

Figure 0.14: Project Highway with Respect to Todgarh Raoli Wildlife Sanctuary

4.4.4 Wildlife Occurrence in the Area

Todgarh Raoli Wildlife Sanctuary is located within the 10 km radius study area from the project road. Wildlife occurrence in the 10 km study area is listed in Table 4.20. During the study, it was noted from locals and forest official, that occurrence of wild animal along the project road is occasional.

Table 0.20: List of Faunal Species Commonly Found in the Study Area Conservation Schedule WPA S. No. Common Name Scientific Name status IUCN 1972 3.1 1 Monkey Rhesus macaque LC II 2 Langoor Pressbytis entellus LC II 3 Leopard Panthera pardus VU I 4 Jangle cat Felis chaus LC II 5 Common Mongoose Herpestes edwardsi LC II 6 Nil Gay Boselaphus tragocamelus LC III 7 Spotted Deer Axis axis LC III 8 Sambhar Rusa unicolor VU III

Page | 4 - 25 Conservation Schedule WPA S. No. Common Name Scientific Name status IUCN 1972 3.1 9 Rabit Lepus nigricollis LC NA 10 Sloth bear Melursus ursinus VU I 11 Porcupine Hystrix indica LC IV 12 House Rat Rattus rattus LC NA 13 Indian Fox Vulpes bengalensis LC II Source: Primary Sighting and Consultation

4.4.5 Domesticated Fauna Domesticated fauna like buffalo, cow, camel, sheep, goat, horse, mule, dog, cat, etc are commonly found in the settlements along the project road. 4.4.6 Avi-Fauna Species

The commonly found Avi-Fauna species recorded during the field visits and during the consultation with Forest Department are listed in Table 4.21.

Table 0.7: List of Avi-Fauna Species Commonly Found in the Study Area S. S. Common Name Scientific Name Common Name Scientific Name No. No. Black-winged 1. Elanus caeruleus 13. House Crow Corvus splendens Kite Common Hawk 2. Black Kite Milvus migrans 14. Hierococcyx varius Cuckoo Common King Eudynamys 3. Alcedo atthis 15. Asian Koel fisher scolopacea Indian Spot-billed Anas Dicrurus 4. 16. Black Drongo Duck poecilorhyncha macrocercu 5. Common Teal Anas crecca 17. White Wagtail Motacilla alba Saxicoloides 6. Little Swift Apus affnis 18. Indian Robin fulicata Phoenicurus 7. Little Egret Egretta garzetta 19. Black Redstart ochruros Common 8. Cattle Egret Bubulcus ibis 20. Turdoides caudata Babbler Indian Pond 9. Ardeola grayii 21. Jungle Babbler Turdoides striata Heron

Page | 4 - 26 S. S. Common Name Scientific Name Common Name Scientific Name No. No. Red-wattled 10. Vanellus indicus 22. Indian Peafowl Pavo cristatus Lapwing 11. Common Pigeon Columba livia 23. House Sparrow Passer domesticus Stigmatopelia 12. Spotted Dove 24. Common Myna Acridotheres tristis chinensis

Source: Primary Sighting and Consultation with Forest Department

4.4.7 Rare, Endangered and Threaten (RET) Species along the Project Road

No Rare, Endangered and Threaten (RET) species of fauna has been reported along the roadside during the study. The nearest habitat of significant wildlife fauna is Todgarh Raoli Wildlife Sanctuary, which is located at about 7.6 km from the project road. Eco-sensitive zone of Todgarh Raoli Wildlife Sanctuary is located 6.6 km from the project road.

4.5 Socio-Economic Profile 4.5.1 Socio Economic Profile – Rajasthan The population forms the basic planning parameter for the preparation of any transport related plan/study and also indicates the scale of required development. Rajasthan is situated in the North-Western part of India. It is bounded by Punjab, Haryana, Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, and Pakistan along northern, north-eastern, eastern, south-eastern, south-western and western sides, respectively. Total population of Rajasthan as per 2011 census is 68,548,437 of which male and female are 35,550,997 and 32,997,440, respectively. In 2001, total population was 56,507,188 in which males were 29,420,011 while females were 27,087,177. The total population growth in this decade was 21.31 % while in previous decade it was 28.33 %. The population of Rajasthan forms 5.66 % of India in 2011 4.5.2 Pali District As per Census 2011, Pali district had population of 20,37,573 of which male and female were 1,025,422 and 1,012,151, respectively. In 2001 census, Pali district had a population of 1,820,251 of which males were 918,856 and remaining 901,395 were females. The sex ratio of Pali district is 919 per 1000 males. Child gender ratio is 884. The total literacy rate of Pali district was 62.39% in 2011 which is less than average literacy rate 66.11% of Rajasthan. Population-wise, out of total 1,085,693 literates, males were 667,381 while females were 418,312. Also, the male literacy rate was 76.81% and the female literacy rate was 48.01% in Pali district. 4.5.3 According to census 2011, the total population of Ajmer district is 2583052 comprising 1324085 males and 1258967 females. Nearly 59.9 % population of the district lives in rural areas where proportion of urban population to the total population is 40.1 %. In census 2011, the sex ratio of

Page | 4 - 27 the district is 951. Literacy rate of the district 69.3 % is higher than the state average 66.1 %. Male and female literacy rate of the district are 82.4% and 55.7%, respectively. 4.5.4 Rajsamand District According to census 2011, the total population of Rajsamand district is 11,56,597 comprising 581,339 males and 575,258 females. The density of the district is 248 persons per sq.km. In census 2011, the sex ratio of the district is 990. Literacy rate of the district 63.1 % is little lower than the state average 66.1 %. Male literacy rate of the district is 78.4% and female literacy rate of the district is 48.0%. Work participation rate of the district 47.6% is higher than the 43.6 % of the state. 4.5.5 According to census 2011, the total population of Bhilwara district is 2,408,523 comprising 1,220,736 males and 1,187,787 females. The density of the district is 230 persons per sq.km. Nearly 78.7 % population of the district lives in rural areas where proportion of urban population to the total population is 21.3 %. In census 2011, the gender ratio of the district is 973, which is higher than the state gender ratio (928). Literacy rate of the district 61.4 % is lower than the state average 66.1 %.

4.5.6 Socio-economic Conditions Along the Project Road

The socio-economic conditions of the area along the project road have been described in detail in Social Impact Assessment (SIA) report for the project road.

Page | 4 - 28 CHAPTER 5: POTENTIAL ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND MITIGATION MEASURES

5.1 Introduction This chapter presents the outcome of the assessment of potential impacts of the proposed project on the natural environment in the corridor of influence, due to the design, construction and operation of the proposed NH 158 project. The environmental impacts have been evaluated on severity, scale, reversibility and temporal basis. Accordingly, mitigation measures have been identified to avoid, minimize, control and manage the key environmental impacts. The proposed project is also expected to influence major positive impacts and benefits such as technology transfer, safe, fast as well as energy efficient transport connectivity, improvement in productivity, generation of employment and promote a modal shift from private vehicles to public transport (resulting in relative reduction in air pollutants and greenhouse gas emissions). The subsequent sections in this chapter deal with the assessment and prediction of impacts due to the project on the natural and biological environment and socio and cultural environment as well as recommend mitigation measures and interventions in the pre- construction, the construction stages and the operation stages. The environment in the vicinity of the proposed Project (within 500 m zone of influence), is expected to be affected by: i) The activities pertaining to site preparation and construction of the proposed MAHSR railway line and ancillary component works; ii) Growth of population and economic activity in the surrounding areas due to the project, in due course of time. Evaluation and prediction of impacts is the most important step of an environmental impact assessment. Superimposing predicted impacts over baseline environmental scenario provides an understanding of the resulting environmental impact scenarios. In the present study baseline environmental scenario was established through baseline data generated over the period from October, 2015 to January, 2016. The impacts on the various environmental components were assessed considering following stages of the project planning and implementation: • Planning and design stage; • Construction stage; and • Operation stage The description and magnitude of impacts for the various environmental components as visualised for the project are discussed in the subsequent sections along with proposed mitigation. 5.2 Environmental issues to be considered for project road The main environmental issues, which are important to consider are: • Both side plantation of existing project road are to be removed

Page | 5 - 1

• Flooding issues due to increase run-off from paved area • Soil erosion and sedimentation may take place during monsoon season • Project road will bring development opportunities in area and improved communication, transportation facilities • Project road will improve the traffic movement and subsequently saving in fuel, less traveling time and reduction in accidents 5.3 Type of Impacts of project road During the construction and operation phase of the project road, the environmental impacts may be in the form of: • Direct impact, • Indirect impact, • Cumulative Impact (i) Direct Impacts: Direct impacts of the road include mainly impacts caused by the road construction such as soil and land surface disturbances, vegetation clearance and material removal activities. These impacts are expected to be significant and need to be mitigated properly (ii) Indirect impacts of the project: Indirect impacts occur within the region of influence of the road project, at locations more distant from the construction corridor. These include induced development, water quality deterioration downstream, soil erosion, likely to be experienced at furthest distances from the project. These impacts are normally observed during the operation phase of road projects. (iii) Cumulative Impacts: This type of impact results from synergetic effects or added up of several impacts which results in environmental changes. Due to the possibility of a combination of the different categories of impacts in one of the main elements of the environment that will be affected by the road construction activities impacts evaluation and mitigation measures will take in consideration both categories. 5.4 Physical Environment 5.4.1 Land 5.4.1.1 Physiography Road construction activities involve alterations in the local physiography and drainage patterns. The impacts on physiography may include destabilisation of slopes due to cut and fill operations. Cut-and-fills will be designed for improvement to the road geometry, and parallel cross drainage structures will be added to improve drainage. There would be no grading of the roadside area. Project road stretch falls in plain terrain. 5.4.1.2 Impacts on Soil Impact on soil will comprise change in land use due to land acquisition, diversion of forest land and project activities. During construction phase, Labour camps, stock yards, storage godown etc, will be set up for facilitating the construction process. These activities might lead to a loss of

Page | 5 - 2 productive soils during the pre-construction stage if these activities are located on fertile / productive soils using for agriculture practices. 5.4.1.3 Loss of Productive Soils Some loss of productive soil is anticipated because of land acquisition and borrows areas. But productivity of crops in the region will not be affected significantly by the project road. Efforts have been made to minimize acquisition of productive lands by alignment of cross sections. The location of construction camps and other construction sites shall not be located on productive agricultural land. The topsoil from all areas to be permanently covered shall be stripped to a specified depth of 150 mm and stored in stockpiles. The stored topsoil will be utilized for the redevelopment of borrow areas, top dressing of the road embankments, fill slopes and filling up of tree pits proposed as part of compensatory plantation. Temporary loss of productive soil is likely if haul roads for the transportation of borrow materials, traffic detours during construction etc. are routed through agricultural lands. 5.4.1.4 Soil Erosion During the construction, vegetation will need to be cleared within the proposed RoW, which may pose some soil erosion problem during first few rains. Excavations of earth from borrow areas may also lead to loss of topsoil and soil erosion problem during rains. Embankment/slopes near newly constructed bridges and structures may be prone to the soil erosion in first few rains. Such embankment and slopes will need to be stabilized as soon as construction is over. 5.4.1.5 Contamination of Soil Contamination of the soil may be due to spillage of oil, bitumen, grease etc. by construction machinery, plants and equipment. Further, the contractor shall initiate measures to minimize waste generation from all construction activities. 5.4.1.6 Compaction of Soil During construction phase, soil in the adjoining productive lands beyond the RoW may be compacted by the movement of construction vehicles, machinery and equipment. Mitigation Measures Following mitigation measures to be taken are; • IRC: 56-1974 will be adopted for treatment of embankment slopes for erosion control. • IRC: 36-1970 will be adopted for construction of Earth Embankments for road works. • Compensatory avenue plantation will be done. • Stone pitching/ concrete wall at bridges approaches • Chute drains will be provided at some locations of bridge approaches. • At construction sites, the vehicles and equipment will be maintained properly and refuelled only at fuelling areas, without any spillages. • Construction machinery will be restricted to proposed RoW except authorize parking locations.

Page | 5 - 3

These steps will efficiently mitigate the potential soil erosion problem and by the time the road starts operating, the ecosystems will restore itself. Soil erosion should visually check on slopes and high embankment areas along the road during construction phase. In case soils erosion is found suitable measures should be taken to control the soil erosion. To avoid the soil contamination, at the wash down and re-fuelling areas, “oil interceptors” shall be provided. Oil and grease spill and oil soaked material are to be sold off to the Rajasthan State Pollution Control or Ministry of Environment and Forest (MoEF&CC) authorized venders. If any hazardous waste as per Hazardous Waste (Management & Handling) Rules, 2016 and as amendments thereafter is generated during construction phase, it shall be suitably treated and disposed of accordingly. 5.4.2 Geology Pre-Construction, Construction and Operation Stage Impact on the geological resources will occur from the extraction of materials (borrow of earth, granular sub base and aggregates for base courses and bridges). The boulders will be procured from the authorized suppliers. Relevant rules will be followed for sand and aggregates. At the construction sites, no blasting is envisaged. The impact on general geology of the project will be insignificant. Borrow Area and Quarries The raising and widening of highway require substantial quantity of earth. The demands of soil for road construction would be met through identification of borrow areas meeting with technical specification of soil quality in the project road vicinity. As part of project planning / preparatory 62 nos. of borrows areas has been identified that can be utilize in the project. Tentative location for probable borrow areas as identified along the road has been presented in below table.

Table 0-1: Details of Probable Borrow Area Locations along the Road

S. Chainage Lead Distance from Approx. Road Direction Type of Land No. (Km) Project Road Area Section

1 1+100 Both 100m Pond 100*100m NH-158

2 1+500 RHS 1300m Barren 100*100m NH-158

3 5+000 LHS 50m Hillock 100*100m NH-158

4 6+600 RHS 100m Pond 100*100m NH-158

5 7+500 RHS 100m Hillock 100*150m NH-158

6 8+000 Both 100m Hillock 100*100m NH-158

7 13+000 Both 100m Hillock 100*150m NH-158

8 17+800 RHS 100m Hillock 100*100m NH-158

Page | 5 - 4

S. Chainage Lead Distance from Approx. Road Direction Type of Land No. (Km) Project Road Area Section

9 18+400 LHS 150m Hillock 100*100m NH-158

10 102+700 RHS 100m Barren 200*200m MDR-84

11 102+400 LHS 100m Hillock 100*150m MDR-84

12 101+200 RHS 100m Barren 100*100m MDR-84

13 100+200 Both 150m Pond 100*100m MDR-84

14 99+500 RHS 100m Barren 100*100m MDR-84

15 97+400 RHS 100m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

16 93+000 RHS 5000m Hillock 200*100m MDR-84

17 87+000 RHS 400M Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

18 85+150 LHS 500m Hillock 200*100m MDR-84

19 82+400 RHS 6000m Hillock 200*200m MDR-84

20 80+600 RHS 100m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

21 80+000 Both 100m Barren 200*100m MDR-84

22 78+700 LHS 100m Barren 150*150m MDR-84

23 77+600 LHS 200m Barren 100*100m MDR-84

24 77+300 RHS 200m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

25 77+000 RHS 100m Barren 100*100m MDR-84

26 74+400 LHS 100m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

27 70+200 LHS 500m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

28 69+300 LHS 200m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

29 68+500 RHS 300m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

30 67+000 LHS 200m Hillock 100*150m MDR-84

Page | 5 - 5

S. Chainage Lead Distance from Approx. Road Direction Type of Land No. (Km) Project Road Area Section

31 66+600 Both 100m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

32 65+000 Both 100m Hillock 100*150m MDR-84

33 63+000 RHS 300m Pond 200*100m MDR-84

34 51+600 LHS 300m Hillock 100*150m MDR-84

35 51+000 RHS 300m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

36 47+000 RHS 100m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

37 46+200 Both 200m Hillock 100*100m MDR-84

38 45+900 RHS 200m Barren/Hillock 200*100m MDR-84

39 43+800 RHS 2000m Hillock 100*150m MDR-84

40 42+600 LHS 100m Barren land 100*100m MDR-84

41 41+700 RHS 500m Pond 100*150m MDR-84

42 40+800 LHS 100m Barren land 100*100m MDR-84

43 37+200 LHS 100m Pond 100*100m MDR-84

44 37+200 RHS 2000m Hillock MDR-84

45 34+600 LHS 100m Barren land 200*100m MDR-84

46 32+000 LHS 100m Barren land 200*100m MDR-84

47 30+500 LHS 12000m Hillock SH-61

48 28+200 RHS 150m Barren land 200*100m SH-61

49 27+600 RHS 100m Barren land 200*200m SH-61

50 27+600 LHS 3000m Hillock SH-61

51 27+000 LHS 400m Barren land 100*100m SH-61

52 26+000 RHS 100m Barren land 100*100m SH-61

Page | 5 - 6

S. Chainage Lead Distance from Approx. Road Direction Type of Land No. (Km) Project Road Area Section

53 24+300 RHS 100m Barren land 200*100m SH-61

54 22+600 Both 100m Barren land 200*200m SH-61

55 21+000 RHS 50m Barren land 100*100m SH-61

56 19+700 LHS 100m Pond 100*100m SH-61

57 19+000 Both 100m Barren land 500*500m SH-61

58 18+200 RHS 500m Barren land 500*500m SH-61

59 17+000 LHS 50m Barren land 100*100m SH-61

60 16+500 Both 100m Barren land 200*100m SH-61

61 13+500 LHS 7000m Hillock 200*200m SH-61

62 12+000 Both 100m Barren land 100*100m SH-61

Source: Design Report Mitigation Measures To mitigate the adverse impact, IRC:10-1961 guideline will be followed for excavation of earth. Prior permission of land owners for Borrow areas will be taken and soil will be excavated as per the intended use by the landowner. For identification of new borrow areas following criterias will be used for selection of borrow areas. • Borrow areas should not be located on cultivable lands. However, if it becomes necessary to borrow earth from temporarily acquired cultivated lands, their depth should not exceed 45 cm. The topsoil to a depth of 15 cm shall be stripped and set aside. Thereafter, soil may be dug out to a further depth not exceeding 30cm and used in forming the embankment. The topsoil should then spread back on the land. It is most important to adopt this practice when the soil is borrowed from rich cultivable land. • Borrow areas shall be selected at wasteland, at least 500m away from the road; • Priority should be given to the borrowing from humps above the general ground level within the road land; • Priority should be given to the borrowing by excavating/enlarging existing tanks; • Borrowing should be from mounds resulting from the digging of well and lowering of agricultural fields in vicinity of the road;

Page | 5 - 7

• In case of settlements, borrow pit shall not be selected within a distance 800m from towns or villages. If unavoidable, earth excavation shall not exceed 30 cm in depth. • The haulage distance from site should not be too far. • Borrow areas will be reclaimed except those to be developed as pond by the choice of land owner Borrow area shall be rehabilated to return the borrow pit sites to a safe and secure area, which the general public should be able to safely enter and enjoy. Securing borrow pits in a stable condition is fundamental requirement of the rehabilitation process. Topsoil should be placed, seeded, and mulched within 30 days of final grading if it is within a current growing season or within 30 days of the start of the next growing season. Vegetative material used in reclamation must consist of grasses, legumes, herbaceous, or woody plants or a combination thereof, useful to the community for the fuel and fodder needs. Plants must be planted during the first growing season following the reclamation phase. Selection and use of vegetative cover must take into account soil and site characteristics such as drainage, pH, nutrient availability, and climate to ensure permanent growth. The detailed plan for borrow area management has been attached as Annexure 5.1. Operation Phase No impact is anticipated on soil during the operation phase and therefore, no mitigation measure is required. However, incident of soil erosion should visually check on slops and high embankment areas along the road during operation phase. In case soils erosion is observed, measures should be taken to control the soil erosion. During the operation phase, contamination of soil is not likely to be happened other than accidental spillage. Depending on the nature and magnitude of spill, appropriate land remediation measure should be taken by concerned authorities. 5.4.3 Meteorological Parameters Impact Project Highway is located in semi-arid region with high variation between summer and winter temperatures. Though no change in the macro-climatic setting (precipitation, temperature and wind) is envisaged due to the project, the microclimate is likely to be temporarily modified by vegetation removal and the addition of increased pavement surface. There will be an increase in daytime temperature on the road surface and soil due to loss of shade and big trees, which in turn might lead to formation of heat islands especially along the inhabited sections. In addition, the removal of trees will increase the amount of direct sunlight resulting in higher temperatures along the highway. This increase in the daytime temperature assumes significance especially to the pedestrians and first row of residences / receptors along the corridor, as the entire project stretch experiences temperatures as high as 49°C during summers. Mitigation Although the impact shall be significant and long term in nature, it is reversible in nature and shall be compensated by additional plantation of trees. It must be noted that the impact is unavoidable.

Page | 5 - 8

However, it may be pointed out that the project has taken care to minimise tree felling as no tree felling shall be done beyond corridor of impact. Also free flow of the traffic after proposed improvement shall further helpful in reduction of temperature in comparison to earlier slow moving traffic conditions. 5.4.4 Ambient Air Quality Air quality along the project corridor will be impacted both during the construction and operation stages of the project. Construction stage impacts will be of short term and have adverse impacts on the construction workers as well as the settlements adjacent to the road, especially those in the down wind direction. Operation stage impacts will not be as severe as the construction stage impacts and will be confined generally to a band of up to 100m from the edge of the lane on either side of the corridor. 5.4.4.1 Generation of Dust Pre-Construction Stage Impact Generation of dust is the most likely impact during this stage due to: • Site clearance and use of heavy vehicles and machinery etc.; • Procurement and transport of raw materials from quarries to construction sites; Mitigation The impacts will mostly be concentrated in the ROW. If adequate measures such as sprinkling of water on haul roads around sites where clearance activities are on, covering material trucks especially those carrying sand and dust, then the impacts can be reduced to a great extent. It is likely that impacts due to dust generation are felt downwind of the site rather than on the site itself. Construction Stage Impact Construction activities to be carried out during the dry season when the moisture content would be less, dust generation, particularly due to earthworks will be significant. Dust is likely to be generated due to the various construction activities including: • Mixing of road materials; • Construction and allied activities. Mitigation Generation of dust is a critical issue and is likely to have adverse impact on health of workers working in dust generation activities. The Environmental Action Plan to be prepared by Contractor/Concessionaire must lay emphasis on enforcement of measures such as provision of pollution masks, regular sprinkling of water to suppress dust to mitigate this impact.

Page | 5 - 9

Operation Stage Impact The negative impacts on air quality during operation stage shall not be significant as that of construction stage. This is due to the reduction of dust particles. No dust generation is envisaged during the operation stage as the all road shoulders are proposed to be paved and all slopes and embankments shall be turfed as per best engineering practices. Mitigation The air quality shall also improve due to the plantation activity carried out in the ROW during the end of construction phase. 5.4.4.2 Generation of Exhaust Gases Impact • Generation of exhaust gases is likely during the pre-construction stage during movement of heavy machinery, oil tankers etc. This impact is envisaged to be insignificant during the pre-construction stage.

• High levels of SO2, NO2 and HC are likely from hot mix plant operations. Volatile toxic gases are released through the heating process during bitumen production. Although the impact is much localised, it can spread downwind depending on the wind speeds. Construction vehicles shall also be releasing exhaust gases. • The major impact on air quality will be due to plying of vehicles. The impacts on air quality will at any given time depend upon traffic volume / rate of vehicular emission within a given stretch and prevailing meteorological conditions. Air pollution impacts arise from two sources: (i) inadequate vehicle maintenance; and (ii) use of adulterated fuel in vehicles. Mitigation • Regular maintenance and pollution check is proposed for construction vehicles and machineries • No bad quality fuel shall be used in construction vehicles and machinery • Hot mix plant to be installed in down wind direction from nearby settlement. • Broad-leaved pollution resistant species, which can grow in high pollutant concentrations or even absorb pollutants, shall be planted as they help settle particulates with their higher surface areas along with thick foliage, which can reduce the distance for which particulates are carried from the road itself. • Cassia fistula (Amaltas), Ficus religiosa (Peepal), Ficus bengalensis (Banyan), Tamarindus indica (Imli) and Azadirachta indica (Neem) and other suitable local species are recommended in the rural areas. • Other measures such as the reduction of vehicular emissions, ensuring vehicular maintenance and upkeep, educating drivers about driving behaviour. However, these methods are beyond the scope of the project but will be far more effective in reducing the

Page | 5 - 10

pollutant levels. Project developer together with the Motor vehicles Department and SPCB can arrange for provision for inspection for PUC certificates at all the major junctions. 5.4.5 GHG Emission 5.4.5.1 Carbon Footprint A carbon footprint of the road project is the amount of greenhouse gases primarily carbon dioxide released into the atmosphere during construction and operation phases of Highway. This report deals the total carbon emission and loss of carbon stock from construction of the project road of NH-158. The finding shall help in proposing the mitigation measures for growing carbon emissions. 5.4.5.2 Methodology The life of the road ends when the road needs to be completely reconstructed or when it is abandoned. As a step towards developing this framework, it was recognized that understanding all possible sources of direct and indirect CO2 emissions during the full life period of the road is essential and it is considered in the subsequent sections. This report followed the same framework developed by ADB and adopted the same empirical method to estimate CO2 emission by use of primary data collected. Many reports including those by ARAI, IPCC, etc. were studied and reviewed for finalizing the emission factors for the different vehicle types. The ARAIreport which is based on Indian conditions has given the emission factor for hydrocarbons only and has not provided the emission factors for the different fuel types. Hence the ARAI emission factors were not adopted for the present report. The emission factors from the report published by IPCC were found to be more inclusive than the other reports and were thus adopted in the present report. The sources of information and the reports / technical papers studied / referred have been listed under the references section. The general empirical formula used is for calculation of the CO2 emission is given below: Carbon Emission = Q + X + Y

Where Q, X and Y are the CO2 Emissions during construction Road operation and Road maintenance Phase respectively. 5.4.5.3 Road Construction phase In this phase, road construction process is again divided into three phases: (i) Raw material production, (ii) Material transportation and (iii) On-site construction The total emissions are the summation of each stage: Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3

Where, Q is the total amount of CO2 emission from highway construction; Q1, Q2, and Q3 is the amount of CO2 emission from raw material production, material transportation and onsite construction respectively in Kg CO2e.

Page | 5 - 11

Carbon Emission from Raw Material Production The estimated carbon emission from raw material production is given in table below. Table 0-2: Emission from Raw Material Production

Quantity Used CO2 Emission CO2 Emission S. (Kg) factor Kg CO2 e Construction Material No. (A) (B) (A × B)

1 Aggregate / Base material 959723 0.0216 20730.0

2 Cement 100427 0.88 88375.7

3 Bitumen 25819 0.48 12393.2

4 Galvanized steel (sheet or wire) - 4.978 -

5 Steel 6681 3 20043.1

6 Earthwork 3203336 0.001 3203.3

Total (Q1) 144745.3

Source: Design Report The total Carbon emission from the Raw material production (Q1) is about 144745.3 Kg CO2e.

CO2 Emission from Material Transportation The material transportation means transferring of materials from factories/production site to construction site using vehicles, which is an integral part of highway construction. The estimated carbon emission from raw material transportation is given in table below. Table 0-3: Emissions from Raw Material Transportation

Quantity of material CO2 Emission Total Carbon emission S. used (Gallons) factors (Kg/Gallons) (Kg CO e) Fuels 2 No. (C) (E) (C × E)

1 Diesel 17170294 10.21 175308700.2

Total (Q2) 175308700.2

Source: Design Report The total Carbon emission from the Raw material transportation (Q2) is about 175308700.2Kg

CO2e.

Page | 5 - 12

CO2 Emission from OnsiteConstruction Emissions are produced by various types of operating mechanical equipment during onsite construction phase, which can be calculating the total amount of diesel used and adding up with total electricity used in the project road. The electricity used is for the labour colony set up for the construction work. The data collected on the diesel is from its usage in running DG set and running fixed and movable machinery. The estimated carbon emission from on-site construction is given in table below. Table 0-4: Emissions from Onsite Construction

Quantity of Carbon emission CO2 Emission S. material used factor Kg CO2 e Fuels No. (F) (G) (F × G)

10.21 kg CO2e / 1 Total Diesel used (Gallons) 23436 239281.6 Gallon

2 Total Electricity Used (KWH) 256000 1.26 kg CO2 e / KWH 322560.0

Total (Q3) 561841.6

Source: Design Report The total Carbon emission from the Onsite Construction (Q3) is 561841.6Kg CO2 e. From the evaluation of the CO2 emission from raw material production (Q1), material transportation (Q2) and onsite construction (Q3), the total emission from the road construction phase is 176015287.1 Kg CO2e.

Figure 0-1: Carbon Emission from Each Stage of Road Construction

Page | 5 - 13

5.4.5.4 Road Operation phase

The fuels used in vehicle during the road operation phase contribute to direct and indirect CO2 emission. Vehicular movement for the entire life period of the project roads was estimated by using the data from Feasibility Report. The Reports of the project road give yearly projection for different transport modes or the growth rates of these modes. The vehicle projection data from Feasibility Reports were used to derive the vehicle volumes for the design life of the Project road. The operation phase duration or the design life for the project road was taken for 20 years.

The CO2 emissions from use of vehicles for transportation were estimated using emission factors given by the IPCC report. The amount of fuel used is calculated by the average distance travelled by each vehicle during the total life cycle period of the road. The estimated carbon emission from road operation phase is shown in table below. Overall

Carbon emission from Road operation phase is 4957471.8 Kg CO2e. Table 0-5: Emissions due to Operation Phase

Amount of Caron emission factor CO2 emission (Kg S. No. Vehicle Fuel fuel used (G) kg CO2 / Gallon (H) CO2e) (G × H)

1 Car Petrol 126856 8.78 1113795.7

2 2-wheeler Petrol 258892 8.78 2273071.8

3 Bus Diesel 23350 10.21 238403.5

4 3-wheeler Diesel 14228 10.21 145267.9

5 2 Axle Diesel 16808 10.21 171609.7

6 Multi Axle Diesel 90573 11.21 1015323.3

Total 4957471.8

Source: Design Report The Operation phase of road have different transport during the entire design life of the road is shown in Figure below.

Page | 5 - 14

Figure 0-2: Carbon Emission from estimated Traffic during Design Life of the Road 5.4.5.5 Road Maintenance Phase

Maintenance work contributes to CO2 emissions direct and indirect on account of on-site use of fuels and construction materials and transport of material and/or fuels to the maintenance site. The maintenance site data is not available since the construction work is not started. Therefore approximate calculation has been taken based on previous road projects.

The CO2 emissions from use of construction materials, fuels on-site and for transportation of material and/or fuels to the site were estimated using appropriate emission factors. Since the calculation is similar to road operation phase and the project reports are confined to project construction and operation phase, the total carbon emissions from Road Maintenance phase are calculated from the assuming the 10% of the materials shall be used during the maintenance phase. The carbon emissions during the Road maintenance phase are shown in table below. Table 0-6: Carbon Emission from Road Maintenance

Road Maintenance Stages Carbon Emission( KgCo2e)

Raw material Production (Z1) 11053.2

Material Transportation (Z2) 27905149.8

On-site Construction (Z3) 561841.6

Total (Z) 28478044.6

Source: Design Report

Page | 5 - 15

5.4.5.6 Total Carbon footprint Total carbon footprint for the construction operation and maintenance phase of the project road is summarized in the table 8. It can be observed that construction phase of the project road is higher compare to other two phase. More than 90% of total carbon footprint comes from construction phase, while road operation and maintenance phase together have a very small share in the total carbon footprint. Table 8: Total Carbon Footprint of Project Road

Design Road Road Road Total Carbon Total Carbon Road Construction Operation Maintenance Footprint Footprint length Phase (Q) Phase (Y) Phase (Z)

(Km) (Kg CO2 e) (Kg CO2 e) (Kg CO2 e) (Kg CO2 e) (Tonnes CO2 e)

116.750 176015287.1 4957471.8 28478044.6 209450803.6 209450.8

Figure 0-3: Total Carbon Emission from Project Road Total estimated emission / loss of carbon stock due to the project road is 209450.8 Tons. Since the carbon emissions are calculated for the life cycle of the project road, the carbon emissions per year shall be 10472 tons / year. 5.4.5.7 Mitigation Measures As per the earlier studies, it was observed that maximum carbon is stored in the order of conifers > deciduous > evergreen > bamboos. As per the studies the carbon sequestration Tamarindus

Page | 5 - 16 indica, Mangifera indica and Azardirachta indica having 0.58m girth size is 5tons. Hence, it requires minimum of 2000 trees to be planted to balance the loss. Proper care shall be taken by the concessionaire for the survival of trees to sequester the loss of carbon stock and carbon emitted. List of trees that present along the project road and the list of trees recommended for plantation based on the Green Highways Policy, 2015 promulgated by the NHAI & MoRTH are discussed in Table 4.19 and 5.11 & 51.2 respectively. However, NHAI / concessionaire shall take the consent from the local Forest Department before finalizing the tree species. 5.4.6 Water Resources 5.4.6.1 Surface Water Bodies Design and Pre-construction Stage Impact Three major rivers crossing NH 158 and will be partially affected due to proposed road improvement and widening. Oil and grease from site camp through surface run-off is another major concern. During construction, discharge of oil and Grease is most likely from workshops, oil and waste oil storage areas, diesel oil pumps, vehicle parking areas from the construction camps. Mitigation Measure To the extent possible, loss of water bodies shall be minimized especially those being used by local community. Construction / Site camp will be located approximate 500m away from surface water body. For each construction camp one oil interceptor will be provided so that discharge could not pollute nearby area. Wastewater contaminated with oils and waste oils and grease will be treated in the oil interceptor to remove all oil and grease spills before discharging appropriately. As far as possible the ground will be levelled in such manner that the wastewater will flow in one direction. The wastewater channels will be constructed with a slope of 1: 150 to ensure that wastewater flows into the interceptor before discharge. Oil and grease of the oil interceptors will be cleaned once in a fortnight from outside by skimming of oil film over the surface. Construction & Operation Stage Impact • 3 Major bridge and 16 Minor bridges are proposed to be constructed and other minor cross drainage structures shall be widened or reconstructed as per the need and condition. The surface water bodies along the project road might be subject to adverse impacts due to the various construction activities as well as during the operation stage of the project. • Widening of the cross-drainage structures is proposed for the project. The cross-drainage structures will be widened without compromising on the flow part. Short-term increase in runoff sedimentation load during construction may occur due to the removal of trees, vegetative cover and compaction of the surrounding soil during pre-construction. Thus, the increased sediment load will be a significant impact that needs to be addressed for all water bodies along the corridor.

Page | 5 - 17

• Road widening and improvement are expected to increase surface run off. Proposed widening will cause increased surface runoff along the roadsides. Mitigation • Design made to avoid physical loss to the water bodies to the extent possible. Scope for further design modification is being explored to minimize the physical loss of the Pond likely to be affected due to proposed alignment. Compensatory digging (in case acquisition is unavoidable) to the other side of pond is proposed to prevent the volumetric capacity loss. • Silt fencing will be provided between road and water bodies to avoid any siltation due to run-off from construction area. • Continuous unlined drain in rural sections and covered line drain urban sections has been proposed. Surface runoff shall be drained to the nearest cross drainage structure. The engineering design includes design of cross drainage structures, which should take care of the extra flow. 5.4.6.2 Ground Water Design and Construction Phase Impact The water demand and requirement for construction and domestic consumption would be met from surface and extraction of groundwater through bore / tube well. Contamination of groundwater is not envisaged since all construction camps will have septic tanks or mobile toilets depending on the number of workers in each camp. People and community depending on these water sources will be impact in terms of getting drinking water. Mitigation Measures • All such impacted hand pumps shall be suitably relocated in close coordination with Public Health Engineering Department (PHED). • New groundwater extraction structures shall be dug up considering the geo- hydrological condition of the area. • Requisite permission shall be obtained from Central Ground Water Board for extraction of groundwater. The contractor shall arrange water for construction and domestic consumption in such a way that the water availability and supply to nearby communities remain unaffected Pre-Construction and Construction Stage Impact The most likely significant impact on water during construction is depletion of water table. The cement concrete construction works requires a considerable quantity of potable water for the various activities including construction of the pavement, dust suppression, curing etc. The total demand of water to be used during the construction phase will be around 544118 KL. The demand though is only indicative in nature and shall differ during the lean period of construction. The

Page | 5 - 18 demand shall be met through availability of supply both from surface and ground sources. However, mostly surface water shall be used for the construction work as all the blocks in the project area falls under water scarce zones as per Ground Water Information Booklet, CGWB. The groundwater recharge areas may also be reduced due to an increase in impervious layers from construction. Mitigation Efforts will be made for the use of only surface water during construction phase. Prior approval for taking adequate quantities of water from surface and ground water sources shall be taken from respective authority before start of construction. The depletion of water is predominantly restricted to the construction phase. The road operation does not make a demand on the available water resources apart from time to time requirement during works such as watering of road side tree plantations at required time. However, it is more likely that water from rivers / canals not be tapped at all for this purpose. Operation Stage The depletion of water is predominantly restricted to the construction phase. The road operation does not make a demand on the available water resources apart from time to time requirement during works such as maintenance of road side tree plantations. However, it is more likely that water from rivers / canals not be tapped at all for this purpose. 5.4.6.3 Impact on Drinking/Household Water Resources Pre-Construction, Construction & Operation Stage Impact The impact on the local water supply sources like hand pumps, wells and tanks will be insignificant as almost all of the sources are located beyond COI. Relocations of all these water supply sources (if any) have been recommended and the cost of the relocation shall be paid as per contract provisions. Mitigation The losses have been covered under the utility relocation process. Compensatory water supply sources will be set up before the start of construction with location of the new point as close to the original as possible. 5.4.6.4 Water Quality Pre-Construction & Construction Stage Impact Due to tree felling soils around the water bodies and surface drainage channels will be exposed during the pre-construction stage, during which, the suspended sediments and the associated pollutants can be washed in to these water sources. The impacts due to the increased sediment load will be significant to some extent. Contamination of groundwater is another likely impact of road construction and allied activities. The groundwater recharge areas may be reduced due to an increase in impervious layers due to the construction. The contamination of the groundwater resources due to the project is likely at the following locations:

Page | 5 - 19

• Along construction sites, camps involving moving of construction equipment and machinery. • At the various community water bodies and sources of water supply such as hand pumps etc. • Along the entire length of the corridor especially around urban areas and productive lands. • The contamination by fuel and oil from construction vehicles or bitumen from hot-mix plants Disposal of solid and liquid wastes by labour, spills or leaks can affect the water quality. • Concentration of suspended solids is likely to be highest during the construction stage and immediately after the construction when vegetation has not been fully established on the embankment slopes. • Oil and grease form a film on the water surface and hinder the transfer of oxygen into water. Increased sediment load, lesser sunlight, difficulty to settle, etc. will make the surface water more turbid. If the concentrations are higher, smaller fish may be harmed. Large, heavy sediment, particularly with slow moving water may smother algae and eventually alter the nature of the sub- stratum. Excessive sediment loads may also mean disruption to areas where fish lay their eggs. The water quality of surface drainage channels is likely to be impaired as long as the construction period continues. Mitigation The engineering design shall ensure protection of embankment slopes. The soil heaps around the construction sites are prone to erosion and contribute to the increased sediment load in the near-by water bodies. The major parameter of concern would be the sediment load from the spoils. The major pollutants of concern are suspended solids, oil and grease, lead and other heavy metals. Some ponds are likely to be affected. Flyover proposed along these water bodies. It is also to be taken care of so that the animals coming for water are not driven away. Silt Fencing: Silt fencing has been proposed to control the contamination of pond water associated with run-off from construction area. Silt fencing shall be provided all ponds located within 150m from the project highway. About 2920m will be provided to prevent sediments during construction period near the water bodies. The locational details have been presented in Table below. Table 0-7: Silt Fencing Location

S. Design Distance from Pond Width Silt Fencing Length (m) Side No. Chainage Proposed Road (m)

1 2100 RHS 140m 80m 90

2 43000 RHS Adjacent to Road 380m 390m

Page | 5 - 20

S. Design Distance from Pond Width Silt Fencing Length (m) Side No. Chainage Proposed Road (m)

160 - 3 47800 RHS 160m (Settlement between road and pond)

4 48500 RHS 145m 120 130

5 49600 RHS 50m 230 240

740 - 6 51200 RHS 50m (Bund already available)

7 72600 LHS 150m 240 250

8 91200 RHS 50m 80 90

9 95600 RHS 50m 100 110

10 112700 RHS 50m 1600 1620

Source: Primary Survey & Design Report The silt fencing consists of geo textile with extremely small size supported by a wire mesh mounted on a panel made up of angle / wooden frame and post. It is expected a single person will be able to drive the angles by pressing from the top. The frame will be installed at the edge of the water body along which construction is in progress. The number of such units to be installed shall be decided depending upon the length of the water body along the side of the road construction. Guidelines for Sediment Control are given as Annexure 5.2.

Page | 5 - 21

Figure 0-4: Silt Fencing Oil interceptor: Oil and grease from road run-off is another major concern during construction as well as operation. During construction, discharge of oil and grease is most likely from workshops, oil and waste oil storage locations, and vehicle parking areas of construction camps. Waste having hazardous properties will be stored in designated area only. A total of 4 oil interceptors shall be provided at camp sites to arrest oil and grease, as per above figure. The arrested products shall be disposed as per MoEF&CC and SPCB guidelines. The location of all fuel storage and vehicle cleaning area will be at least 500 m from the nearest drain / water body.

Figure 0-5: Oil Interceptor Operation Stage No contamination of any water source is envisaged during the operation period. However, water quality may be impacted due to washing of the vehicles near the rivers, water bodies etc. Washings from road can contain oil, which may end up reaching into local water bodies.

Page | 5 - 22

5.4.6.5 Drainage Pattern The project road crosses many natural drains. There will be no permanent change in the drainage pattern except for some temporal changes. As such, the surface water flow pattern may be affected insignificantly due to construction work for road widening. Some old CD structures may cause hindrance to flow of water during construction stage. The proposed road improvement will also reconstruct minor bridges and culvert Mitigation Measures The contractor shall ensure that construction debris do not find their way in to the minor drainage channels which may get clogged. To restore the surface water flow/drainage, proper mitigation measures will be taken along the road, like: • Total 12.665 km of lined drains in built-up area proposed based on site conditions and public feedback. • Total 3 nos. major bridges, 16 nos. minor bridges and 88 pipe and 129 Box culverts are proposed to be provided to maintain the drainage pattern in the project area. • Some culverts will be enhanced to accommodate the drainage requirement. • Drainage arrangements will be provided in respect of site conditions in the form of drainage layer and sub-surface drains in the full width of formation or below the shoulder so as to keep the pavement well drained. • Necessary drainage arrangement in turn with the site condition should be provided in the form of drainage layer, longitudinal, cross, chute drains, and toe drains in the full width of formation or below the shoulder. • Good engineering and construction practice should be followed avoid the clogging of water channels along the project road. Operation Phase During the operation phase, drainage pattern or hydrology of the area will not be affected. Therefore, no impact is anticipated during operation phase and no mitigation measures are required. 5.4.6.6 Degradation of Water Quality Existing water quality of the roadside water sources can be degraded mainly in three ways a) by addition of pollutants like debris, siltation, effluent generation from construction works, b) Accidental spillage, and c) encroaching of water bodies. Of these, pollutants due to construction works will cease on completion of construction activities. Construction Stage The degradation of water quality can occur during construction stage of project road from increased sediment load into watercourses/water bodies near the construction site. This may be aggravated by removal of vegetation and consequent increase in soil erosion. Soil types along

Page | 5 - 23 the project road consist of clay loam soil. The impacts of increased run-off laden with fine sediment will make the water more turbid during rains. The project has fish pond abutting the road and specific measures like silt fencing for erosion control measures needs to be taken at such locations to prevent deterioration in water quality that might impact on fish production. The EMP will include contractual requirements for the contractor to avoid/mitigate impacts from increased sedimentation. Degradation of water quality is also possible due to accidental discharges into watercourses from drainage of workers’ camps and from spillage in vehicle parking and/or fuel and lubricant storage areas. To control the degradation of water quality during construction, following mitigation measures are suggested along the project road: • No debris should be dumped in the water bodies, effluent arising out of the construction works shall first be collected in a retention period. After reuse (whatever can be) of the water, it will be discharged in location drain. • Waste oil and POL shall be kept in closed containers and stacked properly in all-weather protected room before final disposal so that leaching does not lake place. Such waste shall be sold/disposed of to CPCB/SPCB approved register waste recycler. • Construction camp if any should properly located to avoid contamination of surface water bodies due to generation of waste and waste water. • Culvert will be proposed to accommodate the drainage requirement along the alignment. • Drainage arrangements are suggested in tune with the site conditions in the form of drainage layer, longitudinal cross and sub-surface drains in the full width of formation or below the shoulder so as to keep the pavement well drained. • During construction period, suitable barrier will be used to protect the adjoining water bodies from the falling earth materials and dust raised to avoid sedimentation. • Water from pond will not be used to meet the water requirement for construction purposes. Operation Stage During the operation stage, there is very less probability of degradation of water quality during normal operations. The implications of accidental discharge are potentially disastrous. But, it must be emphasized that the probability of such an accident is quite low, indeed, as one of the objectives of the design is the enhancement of road safety 5.4.7 Noise levels Though the level of discomfort caused by noise is subjective, there is a definite increase in discomfort with an increase in noise levels. Road noise depends on factors such as traffic intensity, the type and condition of the vehicles plying on the road, acceleration/deceleration/gear changes by the vehicles depending on the level of congestion and smoothness of road surface (IRC: 104-1988). The baseline noise levels monitored at various locations along the Project Road alignment indicate the baseline levels are well will within in the stipulated limits of CPCB for the respective

Page | 5 - 24 land uses of monitoring locations. The noise is concern as during construction and operation phases there will be generation of significant noise. The impacts on noise due to the project will be of significance in both the construction as well as the operation stages. Impact Table 0-8: Noise Impacts

S. Phase Source Impact No.

• Man, material and machinery • Short duration movement 1 Pre-Construction • Localised impact • Establishment of camps, site office, stock yards, construction plants etc. • Negligible

• Plant site • Plant site: significant • Hot mix plants, machineries, impact within 500m excavation, grading, paving activities 2 Construction • Work zones: • Work zones temporary and • Community residing near the work negligible zones

3 Operation • Increase in traffic • Long term impact

Source: Design Report The noise levels are a common concern due to the number of sensitive receptors located along the project road. The impacts on the receptors shall basically relate to increase in noise levels, access and physical damage to the structure. Noise Impact Prediction Noise shall be caused by the vehicular traffic during operation of the proposed highway. About 80 dB (A) of noise shall be generated from vehicular traffic which shall attenuate to less than 45 dB (A) i.e. night time prescribed noise level at about 100 m. The nearest habitation is adjacent to the sites. Therefore, the impact due to the noise shall be significant at these settlements. Prior mitigation measures shall be required for neutralizing the affects. Mitigation The contribution of project design towards mitigation of increased noise levels would be the improved riding surface and geometry, which will reduce vehicular noise generation, at least during the initial years after construction. The mitigation measures for noise are essentially aimed at protecting the receptor.

Page | 5 - 25

Provision of Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) for the crew will be made a part of conditions of contract. Specifying construction timings will prevent disturbance to the local populations. The following mitigation measures as given in table below need to be worked out for the noise impacts associated with the various construction activities Table 0-9: Generic Mitigation Measures

Source of Noise Impacts Generic Mitigation Measures Pollution

• Utilisation of heavy Increased • All construction equipment, plants, machinery construction Noise Levels and vehicles will follow prescribed noise machinery; causing standards. All construction equipment used for discomfort to an 8 hour shift shall conform to a standard of • Acceleration / local residents less than 90 dB (A). If required, machinery deceleration / gear and workers producing high noise as concrete mixers, changes by the generators etc. must be provided with noise vehicles depending on shields; the level of congestion and smoothness of • At construction sites within 500 m of human road surface; settlements, noisy construction activities shall be stopped between 9.00 PM and 6.00 AM; • Construction of structures and facilities; • Vehicles and construction machinery shall be monitored regularly with particular attention to • Crushing plants, silencers and mufflers to maintain noise levels asphalt production to minimum; plants; and • Workers in the vicinity of high noise levels must • Loading, transportation wear ear plugs, helmets and should be and unloading of engaged in diversified activities to prevent construction materials. prolonged exposure to noise levels of more than 90 dB (A) per 8 hour shift; • Hot mix plant, batching or aggregate plants shall not be located within 500 m of sensitive land use and settlements; • The project road designed is a 8 lane carriageway + Granular Shoulder. This design shall help in reducing the impact of highway noise. • Planting of trees, bushes and shrubs shall also to reduce noise levels. • Provision for noise barriers.

Source: Design Report

Page | 5 - 26

Table 0-10: Project Specific Mitigation Measures

S. No. Item Impact Reason Mitigation / Enhancement

• Noise barrier will be provided at all Increase in noise the noise sensitive receptors pollution Man, Sensitive Direct 1 material and• Speed Barriers near sensitive receptors impact machinery receptors movements • No Horn Zone sign Post

• Machinery to be checked and Establishment of Noise Direct complied with noise pollution labour camps, onsite Pollution (Pre- impact, regulations 2a offices, stock yards Construction short and construction• Camps to be setup away from the Stage) duration plants settlements, in the down wind direction

• Hot mix plants to be setup away Asphalt production from the settlements, in the down plant and batching wind direction Noise plants, diesel Pollution Marginal • Noise pollution regulation to be 2b generators etc. (Construction Impact monitored and enforced Stage) Community residing near to the work• Temporary as the work zones will zones be changing with completion of construction

Noise Due to increase in Will be compensated with the Pollution Marginal 2c traffic (due to uninterrupted movement of (Operation Impact improved facility) vehicles Stage)

Measures will be revised and Noise Effectiveness / improved to mitigate / enhance 3 Pollution - shortfall (if any) Any environment due to any Monitoring unforeseen impact unforeseen impact.

Source: Design Report To reduce noise and vibrations, plantation and compound wall as noise barriers (Wall of 2m height) is proposed. As per research carried out in the developed countries, a masonry wall has Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) value between 0.2 to 0.5. Most of the sensitive receptors have their own compound wall. However, costing of the boundary wall have been calculated considering that compound wall need to be constructed afresh. The feasibility of extending the existing boundary wall will be checked by the contractor during construction phase. The

Page | 5 - 27 plantation along the compound wall will act as additional facility to inhibit noise disturbance. Shade and flowering trees shall be planted within the boundary of the sensitive receptor, between the building line and the compound wall. Cross section of the Boundary wall (Noise Barrier) is given as figure below.

Figure 0-6: Compound Wall as Noise Barrier The measures adopted for noise attenuation for receptors (schools and hospitals for all type of land use) identified above are as below: Noise barrier has been proposed for the entire project. The boundary wall can be painted with posters to provide aesthetic views. The option of posters or creepers shall be agreed by the school / health centre administrator. 5.4.8 Management of Debris/ Waste Various type of waste materials have been estimated to be generated due to dismantling of old and weak structures and pavement. Waste concrete, brick bat and unused iron bars or damaged support structures constitutes significant waste. Mitigation for solid waste from construction camp has been described in construction camp section. About 65 % waste material will be used for widening and temporary works. Rest material will be disposed at dump yard in environmental sound manner. Mitigation measures • Maximum use of debris will be done in widening and temporary work. Some dismantled material may be used at village roads to maintain their level on the request of villagers or their requirement. • The existing bitumen surface will be utilized for paving of cross roads, access roads, and paving works in construction sites and camps, temporary traffic diversions and haulage routes. • All excavated materials from roadway, shoulders, verges, drains, cross drainage and the like will be the property of the MoRTH and will be used for backfilling embankments, filling pits, and landscaping. • Unusable debris material should be suitably disposed of at predesignated disposal locations, with approval of the concerned authority. The bituminous wastes shall be

Page | 5 - 28

disposed in environmentally sound manner. For removal of debris, wastes, and its disposal MoRTH guidelines will be followed. • Unusable and surplus materials, as determined by the Project Engineer, will be removed and disposed off-site at appropriate location as decided by Road Agency. The locations of dumping sites should be selected with following considerations. • Unproductive/wastelands shall be selected for dumping sites. • Away from residential areas are located at least 500 m downwind side of these locations, • Dumping sites do not contaminate any water sources, rivers etc • Dumping sites have adequate capacity equal to the amount of debris generated. • Public perception and consent from the village Panchayats about the location of debris disposal site has to be obtained before finalizing the location. • Form works will be re-used to the extent possible, more than 20 times as dictated by good practice. All stripped formworks will be examined for any damage and rectified in the workshop for re-use. Rectification includes plugging holes, and straightening bent steel props. 5.4.9 Biological Environment 5.4.9.1 Impacts on flora Roadside Plantations and Protected Forest Areas • The roadside plantation in Pali, Ajmer, Rajsamand and Bhilwara districts has been enumerated. During the design and construction of project road, following impacts are expected. • A total of 13.4297 ha forest land is to be diverted from Reserve, protected and unclassified forest identified in Pali, Ajmer, Rajsamand and Bhilwara forest division. • Total 1057 to be removed for 2- lanes and 4 lane configuration project road. • The loss of trees and shrub cover at least during the construction phase, is likely to produce some negative impacts over the population of avi-fauna and insects. Mitigation Measures • Alignment has been selected carefully to minimize tree felling specially for bypasses and realignments. • Forest clearance for diversion of 13.4297 ha forest land will be obtained from concerned authority • Prior permission for tree felling will be obtained from forest department, Govt. of Rajasthan. Proper attention will be given towards abutting trees should not be damaged at the time of tree felling. • Compensatory plantation will be carried out as per guidelines of forest department as well as IRC: SP: 21-2009 apart statutory requirement as per available land.

Page | 5 - 29

• The possibility of transplanting of trees to be felled should be explored. • Tree felling will be done under the supervision of forest department and all applicable rules of state forest department will be followed. • In case wild animals found within RoW, contractor will informed forest department. Operation Phase During the operation phase, no adverse impact is anticipated on the flora and fauna of the area. Plantation along the road on available space will be enhanced vegetation in the area. Monitoring of survival of trees should be done at regular interval and suitable mitigation measures should be taken to protect the trees. Table 0-11: Species Recommended in Settlement Areas (Within 1 km of Project Highway)

Scientific name Common Name Reason

Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Economic & Medicinal Azadirachta indica Neem Value

Cassia fistula Indian laburnum Landscaping, Flowering plant, Pollution sink

Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Shade, Supports other Ficus bengalensis Banyan species, Religious values

Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Shade, Supports other Ficus religiosa Peepal species, Religious values

Magnifera indica Mango Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Economic Value, Shade

Table 0-12: Species Recommended for nearby Rural Areas

Scientific Name Common Name Reason

Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Economic & Medicinal Azadirachta indica Neem Value

Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Shade, Supports other Ficus bengalensis Banyan species, Religious values

Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Shade, Supports other Ficus religiosa Peepal species, Religious values

Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Economic Value (fruit Magnifera indica Mango bearing)

Syzygium cumini Jaman Pollution sink, Economic Value (fruit bearing)

Page | 5 - 30

Scientific Name Common Name Reason

Noise barrier, Pollution sink, Economic & Medicinal Tamarindus indica Tamarind Value

Terminalia arjuna Arjun Noise barrier, Pollution sink

Source: Forest working plan Tree Plantation strategy has been attached as Annexure 5.3. 5.4.9.2 Impact on Protected Area Impact The project road is not crossing any protected area (Under Wild Life Act, 1972). Only Todgarh Raoli wildlife sanctuary is nearest Protected Area about 7.6 km from the project (from Sanwa - proposed Ch. 31.000). Mitigation Todgarh Raoli wildlife sanctuary is nearest Protected Area about 7.6 km from the project. During the consultation with wildlife/ forest official, they confirmed that project road area doesn’t have major wildlife corridors and movement of wildlife is very less. However contractor shall consult with forest and wildlife official and prepare a wildlife management plan to mitigate the potential impact on wildlife. 5.4.9.3 Fauna Impact No Endangered/ Schedule-I species recorded from the project area during visit. Forest / Wildlife department also confirmed that there is no movement of wild animals through project corridor. There is a scope of slight impact to local domestic animals, which graze in the area especially after the road is constructed. Increased vehicle movement in the area might lead to accidents involving animals. Apart from this, micro-ecosystems developed on the roadside with the birds, animals and insects using the plantation over the years would be lost due to loss of their habitat. Mitigation • Speed control has been proposed. Design speed should be limited within 45 km/hr in forest and settlement area. Proper signage must be placed at 1 km interval at each side of road (smaller size: 900mm eq. triangle) & 2 km interval at each side of road (Larger Size: 1200 x 600 mm) • Mandatory / Regulatory sign (60 cm circular) for entire section of project road for every 2 km at alternate side is proposed • No negative impacts are envisaged on the fauna during the construction phase & operational phase.

Page | 5 - 31

• Special care of Ponds shall be taken since the wildlife and Public dependent on these water bodies. • No horn zone and no halting sign shall be placed in stretch between km Noise Sensitive receptor like school and Hospitals. • The compensatory plantation shall act as the new habitat for the birds, animals and insects species Conceptual drawing of Roadside Signage is presented in Annexure 5.4. 5.4.9.4 Aquatic Ecology Contamination of the surface water due to spillage of construction material, sediment loading & increased turbidity shall result in decline in the number and diversity of aquatic flora and fauna and thus the food web species during construction period. No negative impacts are envisaged on the aquatic ecology during the operational phase. 5.4.10 Impact on Protected Monuments and Cultural Heritage Sites It has been observed that no archaeological monument and cultural heritage site exists within the proposed ROW and in the vicinity. Therefore, there would not be any impact on the archaeological and cultural heritage sites 5.4.11 Impacts of Construction Workers Camps and Immigration During the construction phase of project road, construction worker will be engaged in construction activities. Most of the workers will be from local area and some may be from other areas. This may affect demography of the area for short a time. Construction stage Although the construction contractors are likely to use unskilled labour drawn from local communities, use of specialized road building equipment will require trained personnel not likely to be found locally. Sudden and relatively short-lived influxes of construction workers to communities along road will not have the potential to ‘skew’ certain demographic variables and the traditional social coherence of towns and villages. It is anticipated that the construction labour inputs for the construction works will be in the order of about 150-200 persons per day. However, this number will fluctuate, and the number of worker on any particular day will be higher or lower. The construction workforce will be made up of the following groups: • Supervision, specialist and administrative personnel, normally about 50 per cent of the workforce-the contractor would probably arrange local accommodation using boarding houses or rented houses. • Skilled workers, normally about 25 per cent of the workforce - the contractor will probably establish a construction camp for the skilled workers. • Unskilled workers, normally about 75 per cent of the workforce - contractors normally recruit these workers locally and do not need to provide accommodation.

Page | 5 - 32

• The contract documents will require the contractor to obtain all necessary approvals before building a construction camp. Mitigation Measures • Construction camp shall be sited at such locations to utilize the existing infrastructure. No productive land should be utilized for construction camp. All sites must be graded, ditched, and rendered free from depressions to avoid water stagnation. Accommodation and ancillary facilities including recreational facility for workers shall be erected and maintained to standards and scales approved by the resident engineer. • All camps should maintain minimum distance of 500 m from habitation and water bodies • All construction camps shall be provided sanitary latrines and urinals with provision of septic tanks attached with soak pits. Storm water drains shall be provided for the flow of used water outside the camp. Drains and ditches shall be treated with bleaching powder on a regular basis. Garbage bins must be provided in the camp and regularly emptied and disposed off in a hygienic manner. LPG cylinders shall be provided as fuel source for cooking to avoid any tree cutting. • At every workplace, the Contactor will ensure, in collaboration with local health authorities that a readily available first-aid unit including an adequate supply of sterilized dressing materials and appliances shall be provided. Workplaces remote and far away from regular hospitals shall have indoor health units with one bed for every 250 workers. Suitable transport shall be provided to approach the nearest hospital. At every workplace, an ambulance containing the prescribed equipment and nursing staff shall be provided. • The Contractor will ensure the good health and hygiene of all workers to prevent sickness and epidemics. These include the HIV/AIDS prevention program to reduce the risk and transfer of HIV virus between and among the workers and community, promote early diagnosis and assist affected individuals. Activities under the program include monthly information, education, and consultation communication campaigns to workers, drivers, delivery crew, and communities on the risk, dangers, and impacts of STD and HIV/AIDS. • The Contractor will ensure that sufficient supply of suitable and hygienically prepared food at reasonable price is available to the workers. • The Contractor will provide adequate and safe water supply for the use of the workers. • The Contractor will ensure that all precautions to protect the workers from insect and pest to reduce the risk to health. This may include the use of insecticides which should comply with local regulations. • Migrant workers may be the potential carriers of various diseases. Local community may get exposed to the diseases carried by migrant workers. Regular health check-up and immunization camps shall also be organized for the workers and nearby population. 5.4.12 Economic Impacts Construction Stage The relatively short-lived economic impacts of the construction stage are likely to be experienced in local communities for the duration of construction as workers make everyday purchases from local traders. This is likely to give a short-lived stimulus to these traders that will disappear as

Page | 5 - 33 soon as the construction is complete. Wider, flow-on economic impacts will be experienced in other sectors of economy as a result of purchase of construction materials and the payment of wages and salaries. Operation Stage Once the upgrading is complete, there is likely to be some long-term changes in the economic structures of the urban and rural areas served by the road. For example, improved accessibility to larger markets may stimulate the production of banana crops. 5.4.13 Transport and Storage of Materials Construction Phase The construction material primarily will consist of aggregate, sand, cement, bitumen, lubricating oil and fuel for vehicle and construction equipment. These will be primarily stored temporarily at construction camps. Project road is located in low lying area and experiences low to high flood situation during monsoon season. During construction phase, storage of hazardous materials like bitumen, oil etc. will an issue in case of flood situation, if it not dealt properly it may cause contamination at large scale through surface runoff. The likely impacts due to transportation and storage including fugitive emission have already been covered under different section above. Mitigation measures Hazardous materials pose a risk to both human health and our environment. All these temporary storage areas will be located at least 500 m away from the habitation and water bodies. It is important that businesses and residents adequately assess the risk posed by hazardous materials they possess and take the necessary precautions to avoid flooding related spills. Some possible actions are: • Identify hazardous materials that are being stored in a flood plain. • Ensure these materials are securely and safely stored. • Implement mitigation strategies to prevent the release of hazardous materials to the environment. • Properly dispose of all hazardous materials that are no longer needed. • Owners and transporters of hazardous materials are directly responsible for the clean-up and remediation of spills regardless of the cause. It is therefore important that persons in possession of hazardous materials protect themselves by conducting a thorough hazard, risk and vulnerability assessment to prevent spills from occurring in the first place. 5.4.14 Human Health and Safety Pre-construction Stage Pre-construction stage activities including site clearances and movement of heavy vehicles & machinery along with transport of earth in trucks is likely to have negative impacts on the health of the people coming in contact with dust and exhausts generated by such activities. Concerns regarding the safety of people due to accidents also arise but are limited. Construction Stage The general mobility of both local residents and their livestock in and around the construction area is likely to be hindered. Unmonitored construction activities like dismantling of structures, cutting of trees, haulage material obstruction vision, spillages of lubricants, on road making it slippery

Page | 5 - 34 may create an accident risk for local residents, particularly to children. Traffic detours are also likely to have an impact on the safety of the vehicular traffic as improve signage during night time may result in accidents, especially for fast moving vehicles. Operation Stage Improvements in geometric design and increase in sight distances would result in increase of allowable traffic speeds. High speeding vehicles are a cause for concern and the impact is likely to increase due to the project, especially for the children, domesticated animals, market commuters along the highway fringe and people visiting the temples and religious places along the highway fringe. Separate lanes for traffic will potentially minimize the risk of collisions between vehicular traffic traveling at higher speeds. The improved roads on the other hand will increase accessibility to local and regional health centers and other community support facilities. Due to the project, pedestrians and school children may get inconvenience to cross the road. Mitigation Measures Construction Stage Adverse impact on safety of pedestrians and passage of traffic approaching or passing are likely if construction works are not managed properly. It is essential that works should be planned before handing over the contractor with due considerations for safety of pedestrians and workers during the night-time. Adequate warning signs, barricades etc. to inform the road users are essential in this regard. Operation Stage the improved roads on the other hand, will increase accessibility to local and regional health centre and other community support facilities. The project will be implemented with due considerations for safety of pedestrians and school children. The measures will include speed humps, speed delimiting signs, service roads etc. at desired locations especially near habitations and sensitive locations, such as, schools and colleges. 5.4.15 Social Environment 5.4.15.1 Land Acquisition & Extent of Loss to Properties Land shall only be required at curve improvement, realignment and bypass location. The details have been provided in the SIA/RAP, which is a standalone document. 5.4.15.2 Project Affected Families The details have been provided in the SIA/RAP, which is a standalone document. 5.4.15.3 Land use Change The development will induce a ribbon development alongside road. The availability of cheap labour and easy access to markets in the city will make roadside areas quite an incentive for the industrialist. Reduced transportation costs and availability of high-class transportation facilities for raw materials and products will be the most important advantage of the improved road. 5.4.15.4 Exploitation of Resources Improvement in the road condition can have an impact on the natural resources. Easy accessibility of the area will increase the population of the region. This means more and more exploitation of the natural resources like ground water, fuel, etc. While the medium term impacts

Page | 5 - 35 may not be large enough to be noticed, the long-term implications of such depletion are potentially disastrous. Separate labour camp away from habitation shall be constructed. All day to day need shall be procured from nearby city markets. No tree cutting shall be permitted for the cooking and other purpose. 5.4.15.5 Traffic congestion during construction Traffic congestion due to construction activities is common phenomena for any road project. Safe and convenient passage for vehicles, pedestrians and livestock to and from side roads and property access connecting the project road is the mostly required. The construction activities that shall affect the use of side roads and existing access to individual properties shall not be undertaken without providing adequate provisions. Detailed Traffic Control Plans will be prepared prior to commencement of works on any section of the project road. These plans shall be approved by the consultant and employer prior to execution. The traffic control plans will contain details of temporary diversions details of arrangements for construction under traffic and details of traffic arrangement after cessation of work each day. Temporary diversion (including scheme of temporary and acquisition) will be constructed with the approval of the Monitoring consultant. Special consideration will be given in the preparation of the traffic control plan to the safety of pedestrians and workers at night. The road safety measures to be adopted for traffic control and safety during construction are provided under Annexure 5.5. 5.4.15.6 Working conditions Contractor is required to comply with all the precautions as required for the safety of the workmen as per the International Labour Organisation (ILO) Convention No.62 as far as those are applicable to this contract. Contractor supply all necessary safety appliances such as safety goggles, helmets, masks, etc., to the workers and staff. Contractor shall to comply with all regulation regarding sage scaffolding, ladders, working platforms, gangway, stairwells, excavations, trenches and safe means of entry and egress. 5.4.16 Risk from Electrical Equipment Adequate precautions will be taken to prevent danger from electrical equipment. No material or any of the sites will be so stacked or placed as to cause danger or inconvenience to any person or the public. All necessary fencing and lights will be provided to protect the public. 5.4.16.1 Risk at Hazardous Activity All workers employed on mixing asphaltic material, cement, lime mortars, concrete etc. will be provided with protective footwear and protective goggles. Workers, who are engaged in welding works, would be provided with welder’s protective eye-shields. The use of any toxic chemical, if any will be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The Monitoring consultant will be given at least 6 working days’ notice of the proposed use of any toxic chemical. 5.4.16.2 Malarial Risk Gravid, blood-laden mosquitoes cannot fly very far, so they generally bite within a kilometre or so of their breeding place. Pits dug up nearby settlement will be adequately drained to prevent water logging. Similarly compensatory measures for filling up part of the water bodies situated adjacent

Page | 5 - 36 to the project corridors will be directed towards deepening of the water bodies concerned. This way the capacity of the water body remains the same, while water surface available for breeding of mosquitoes is reduced. 5.4.16.3 First Aid At every workplace, a readily available first-aid and unit including an adequate supply of sterilised dressing material and appliances will be provided as per the Factory Rules. 5.4.16.4 Potable Water In every workplace at suitable and easily accessible places a sufficient supply of temperate potable water (as per IS) will be provided and maintained. If the drinking water is obtained from an intermittent public water supply then, storage tanks will be provided. 5.4.16.5 Construction Camp Contractor during the progress of work will provide, erect and maintain necessary living accommodation and ancillary facilities for labour to standards and scales approved by monitoring consultant. All temporary accommodation shall be constructed and maintained in such a fashion that uncontaminated water is available for drinking, cooking and washing. The sewage system for the camp shall be properly designed, built and operated so that no health hazard occurs and no pollution to the air, ground or adjacent watercourses take place. Compliance with the relevant legislation must be strictly adhered to. Garbage bins shall be provided in the camp and regularly emptied and the garbage disposed off in a hygienic manner. Guidelines for Sitting and Layout of Construction Camp have been presented in Annexure 5.6. 5.4.16.6 Safety The improvement of the project road will entail increasing the existing carriageway and improve its condition to allow vehicles at design speeds of 80-100 km/hr. Increased vehicular speed mean that the fringe areas of the road are at increased risk from speeding vehicles. The existing facilities and amenities along the road shall be subjected to adverse impacts of road operation. The possibility of accidents is likely to increase. The possibility of this happening is a cause of concern as there are many educational, cultural and health institutes along the road. Provision of road markings footpath and improvement of geometry will be helpful in reduction of accident probability. 5.4.17 Enhancement Measures Road construction project brings lot of concerns for the local communities. Their concerns apprehension and suspicious can only get dispelled through creation of an atmosphere of mutual trust and transparency. Intensive public consultation helps a lot in building rapport between Project Authorities and Stake Holders. Environment enhancement takes this process of a step further apart from improving environment and gives the road-side communities a sense of belongingness. The enhancement locations is being identified based on • Proximity to Road • Improvement of road side Aesthetics

Page | 5 - 37

• Comfort to road users • Community property • Public Demand 5.4.18 Green Belt Development Green belt development will be done at sensitive receptor locations and new alignment. This will work as noise barrier and pollutants absorbent. Many species like Alstonea scholaris, Zyziphus sps., Aegle marmelos, Ficus religiosa, Ficus benghalensis, Cassia fistula, Cassia siamea, Butea monosperma, Bauhinia variegata, Lagerstroemia thorli, Lagerstroemia floriginea, Syzigium cumini,Terminalia arjuna, Tecoma argentia etc. are recommended for plantation.

Page | 5 - 38

CHAPTER 6: ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES

The chapter tries to compare feasible alternative to the proposed project with respect to site, technology, design etc. The alternatives were examined by taking into account of all possible and feasible options and includes both with and without project scenarios and alternative analysis of bypasses in terms of the potential environmental impacts for the justification of the project. The chapter discusses how environmental parameters were assigned due importance and carefully considered in the analysis of alternatives.

6.1 With and Without Project Alternatives

6.1.1 Without Project Scenario

The existing project road section varies from single lane to two lanes with earthen shoulders with varying pavement width. With present and projected high traffic volumes, the capacity of the present highway is insufficient for handling the high volume of traffic and calls in for improvements to a 2 lane and 4 lane carriageways with paved & Granular shoulder. The project highway has many roadside settlements and the traffic flow is seriously impacted by severe conflicts between the local and the through traffic. This is further compounded by the various land use conflicts, in terms of uncontrolled development along the highway. The population growth, increase in traffic volumes and the economic development along the corridor would continue to occur and will worsen the already critical situation. The existing unsafe conditions and the adverse environmental consequences in terms of the environmental quality along the highway would continue to worsen in the absence of the proposed improvements. Moreover, if it is decided not to proceed with the project, then the attendant reduced socio-economic development of this remote, relatively poorly connected area cannot be justified. Therefore, the no-action alternative is neither a reasonable nor a prudent course of action for the proposed project, as it would amount to failure to initiate any further improvements and impede economic development.

6.1.2 With Project Scenario

The ‘with project scenario’ is found to have a positive impact in the long run on social, environmental, economic and financial issues. This scenario includes the widening to 2 / 4 lanes of the existing single / two lanes stretch as envisaged in the project objectives. The scenario is economically viable and will improve the existing conditions. It, would thereby, contribute to the development goals envisaged by the Governments of Rajasthan and India, and enhance the growth potential of the area. To avoid the acquisition of land and properties, the project envisages the development within the minimum RoW as much as possible. However need for land acquisition has been envisaged for Bypass, Realignment and curve improvement sections. In spite of the various development benefits likely to accrue due to the project, as is the case of every road development project, the project would be accompanied by certain impacts on the natural, social and environmental components. The potential impacts on the various environmental components can be avoided through good environmental practices. Wherever avoidance of negative impact has not been possible, appropriate mitigation and enhancement actions will be worked out to effectively offset the environmental damages inflicted due to the project. A detailed Resettlement Action Plan (RAP) has been worked out to improve the well-

Page | 6 - 1 being and livelihood of the people to be impacted. Comparative assessments of the “with and without” project scenarios are presented in the following Table.

Table 0-1: "With and Without" Project Scenarios - A Comparative Assessment

Component "With" Project Scenario 'Without" Project Scenario

2-lane and 4-lane carriageway with Existing single / two lane Highway paved/granular shoulder with geometric carriageway with poor Geometrics improvements geometrics

Design Speed Design speed 80-100 Kmph 40 – 60 kmph

Congestion in Free flow of traffic due to widened Congestion in urban areas Settlements carriageway and improved geometry and rural areas

Felling of trees located near the road No felling of trees. The old edge as these trees shall become a road Felling of road side trees may become a safety hazard. Triple the number of new young trees hazard to the road users with and healthy trees to be planted in passage of time. compensation.

Bypasses, realignment and subways for safety of pedestrian. Along the Pedestrian safety an issue of settlement stretches with significant major concern especially Pedestrian safety pedestrian traffic, provision of pedestrian along the settlements and (zebra) crossings and footpath has been congested sections. kept in urban sections.

Provision of proper road markings, zebra Accident incidents shall rise Road Safety crossings and improvement of geometry with an increased traffic Measures to reduce accidents. volume.

The widening of existing 2 lane and the Poor due to congestion and proposed bypasses will improve slow movement of traffic. A environmental quality due to lowered Environmental further deterioration is pollution levels by relieving of Quality expected due to increase in congestion. Short term increase in dust traffic volumes and further and noise levels during construction congestion within the towns. activities.

Will be improved due to further widening These issues remain Drainage of culverts / bridges with adequate unaddressed without the hydraulics. project

Appropriate road side amenities to be Road Side provided at various locations along the Not adequate. Amenities corridor.

Page | 6 - 2

Component "With" Project Scenario 'Without" Project Scenario

Reduction in time and fuel consumption Increased vehicle operating Better for easy and fast movement through the costs due to reduced speeds Transportation major towns and villages. Better Access Facilities to markets

Economic There will be increased access to The economy will remain Development markets. Local people will be employed static. during construction of the project road. Better transport facilities will lead to access to new employment centers

Loss of Property Some people will lose their property and Project may provide job / and livelihood livelihood due to land acquisition for livelihood opportunities to bypasses and widening of existing road people through commercial where RoW is not sufficient to establishment in area due to accommodate the road design good connectivity with other and towns.

Loss of vegetative Vegetative cover will be removed within No such impact cover corridor of Impact. Compensatory plantation will enhance vegetative cover of area after 3-4 years.

Access to basic Easy access to basic facilities due to fine Difficulty in accessing the facilities such as road basic facilities due to heavy Markets, schools, traffic. Hospitals etc.

Development activities will be Higher potential for development due to greatly hampered by the Development improvement in access and consequent gross inadequacy of increase in connectivity infrastructure.

Source: Design Report and Primary survey By looking at the above table, “with” project scenario, with its minor adverse impacts is more acceptable than the “without” project scenario which would mean an aggravation of the existing problems. The potential benefits of the proposed road improvements are substantial and far- reaching both in terms of the geographical spread and time. Hence, it is clear that the implementation of the project will have definite advantage to area in development of its economy and progress for its people.

6.1.3 Analysis of Alternatives Alignment

After having examined the feasibility of the road-improvement in the existing alignment, it is concluded that some of the project segment (mainly thickly built- up stretches) may have technical, social and environmental constrains during construction because these critical stretches are experiencing congestion, encroachment of RoW and poor geometry. Therefore, it

Page | 6 - 3 is pertinent to develop alternative alignment to these critical stretches. These alternatives have been analyzed keeping in view social, environmental and technical parameters and thus the best alternative has been finalized.

6.1.4 Criteria for Fixing bypasses and realignment

Obligatory sensitive reasons through which bypasses and realignment options should not pass, are detailed in sections below. Habitations: Proposed alignment has been fixed in such a way that it traverses at a minimum distance of 200-300m from built up areas and avoiding important buildings and structures. However, Bye passes and realignment options have been adopted to minimise the impact on settlement due to project. Wildlife Sanctuaries, National Parks, Reserve Forest and other Eco Sensitive zones: No ecologically protected area (Wildlife Sanctuaries, National Parks, etc.) are located in close proximity of the project. While fixing the ealignment near forest area, it was not possible to completely avoid the forest areas. However, every effort has been made to minimise the width and length of forest area. In forest areas mostly existing alignment has been followed. Water Bodies: The alignment has been fixed taking due consideration & importance of retaining the existing water bodies, ponds, tanks etc. as far as feasible. Railway Crossings and Important Structures: The components which increases the project cost are the presence of the Major bridges, ROBs and other structures. In order to reduce the project cost, number of structures and their respective lengths were given due consideration while finalising the option. Moreover, the alternative options have been worked out keeping the following in mind: • The project should be constructible and easy to maintain; the project should reduce the vehicle operation cost with respect to the existing option already available • It should be safe at all stages i.e. during design, construction and operation stages. Safety audits at each stage should confirm the same. • The initial cost of project (capital expenditure), maintenance cost, and operating cost should be optimum, to enable comparison of economics pertaining to life cycle cost versus other re-alignment options. • The alignment should be finalised giving due consideration to siting/location of major structures including Major / Minor Bridges and ROBs • Alignment should follow the unused / barren land to the extent possible to reduce the cost of land acquisition and carbon foot print.

6.2 Justification for Selection

The major difficulties in following the existing alignment option completely, is the magnitude of land acquisition & social disruption and unsafe traffic condition. Therefore, realignment and bypasses have been suggested in the built-up stretches. The project, therefore, involves mostly concentric widening of the existing alignment to fully utilise the available RoW. The project road shall be rigid and flexible pavement throughout the stretch.

Page | 6 - 4

6.3 Alignment Modifications

The selection of the alignment along various sections has been worked out based on continuous interaction between the highway and environmental teams. However, existing alignment has been followed almost throughout the stretch except few curve improvement, Bypass & Realignment locations. Various alignment alterative for Bypasses have been analysed.

6.4 Curve Improvement Locations

Various locations have been identified along the project corridor, where the poor geometrics warrant a deviation from the existing alignment. Most of these locations are situated in curves both horizontal and vertical. Deviation from the existing alignment was followed at the following locations. Care though has been taken to minimise the impact on sensitive, cultural and community features like water bodies, schools, hospitals etc.

6.5 Alternative Analysis of Bypasses

Bypasses have been proposed to avoid various built-up areas along the project highway, where geometric improvements are not possible as per design standards. Before declaring National Highway is comprised with SH-39 and most of the length is MDR-84, is prevailed with poor geometrics. Bypasses and realignments are inevitable at many places to improve the geometrics and mitigating the risks of social impacts. Alternatives alignments for the bypasses have been analysed using google maps and Topo survey maps. The details of alternative analysis furnished in the following sections

6.6 Alternative analysis of Ras Bypass

Table 6 2: Analysis of options for Ras Bypass

Alternate 4 S. Description Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 (Existing No. Alignment)

Route Alignment / 1 RHS RHS LHS Existing road Side

2 Length of bypass 3.20 km 3.10 km 4.24 km 3.10 km

3 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 50 Km/hr

Agriculture, Agriculture, Agriculture, Built up, 4 Land use pattern Barren Barren Barren Barren

6 Culverts,1 4 Culverts,1 4 Culverts, No of Proposed MJB, 5 MNB,1 VUP 1VUP Grade- - Structures Grade-II II 1 VUP

Page | 6 - 5

Alternate 4 S. Description Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 (Existing No. Alignment)

Four lane 6 Service Road - - Required required

7 Junctions 5 4 6 1

8 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 30m 20m

9 Area Required, (Ha) 9.51 9.3 12.72 4.9

Heavy Impact Resettlement & Medium due to 10 Light Impact Light Impact Rehabilitation Impact Built-up area

Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Nil

Wildlife Area/ Nil Nil Nil Nil Notified area 11 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil Nil

Archaeological/Herit Nil Nil Nil Nil age site

Approx. Cost (Crore) 12 1.42 1.37 1.88 LA

Approx. highway 24.16 24.18 33.07 (Crore) LA

Approx. Structure 7.19 1.57 17.55 (Crore) LA

Approx. Total Cost 33.57 27.17 52.5 (Crore) LA

Involved non Involved non Involves non- agriculture agriculture agricultural land land land

13 Merits No major CD structure Shorter than Involves required. Alternative- more number Shorter than 1&3. of structures. Alternative 2.

Page | 6 - 6

Alternate 4 S. Description Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 (Existing No. Alignment)

Length is Length is more than all High R&R more than other issues Alternative 1. alternatives 14 Demerits Design speed Two Major Habitation is less than structures involved. minimum (i.e. required. 40 kmph)

Not Not Recommende Not 15 Recommendation Recommende Recommend d recommended d ed

Source: Design Report and Primary survey

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 0-1: Options for Ras Bypass

Page | 6 - 7

6.6.1.1 Alternative analysis of Beawar Bypass

Table 6-2: Analysis of options for Beawar bypass

S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 (Existing Description No. (Blue) (Red) Alignment) (Magenta) RHS of existing RHS of existing 1 Route Alignment Existing road road road 2 Length of Bypass 8.250 km 4.161 km 9.000 km 3 Terrain Plain / Rolling Plain / Rolling Plain 4 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 50 Km/hr Smooth Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal and horizontal and and vertical vertical geometrics is 5 Geometrics vertical geometrics is possible with geometrics is possible compromised speed possible Agriculture / Agriculture / Built 6 Land use Built up area of Beawar Barren up 1 ROB, 1 MNB,7 No of Proposed 1 MJB , 4 7 Culverts, 1 VUP - Structures culverts, 1 ROB Grade-II 8 Service Road NR Required NR 9 Junctions 7 7 10 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m 11 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Wildlife Area/ 12 Nil Nil Nil Notified area 13 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil Archaeological/Herit 14 Nil Nil Nil age site Area Required, 15 24.75 12.48 8.33 Hectares Resettlement & 16 Light Impact Moderate Impact Heavy Impact Rehabilitation Approx Cost (Crore) 17 1.13 0.57 0.37 LA Approx highway 18 64.35 32.45 32.45 (Crore) LA

Page | 6 - 8

S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 (Existing Description No. (Blue) (Red) Alignment) (Magenta) Approx Structure 19 21.005 32.40 (Crore) LA Approx Total Cost 20 86.48 65.42 (Crore) LA Passes away Length is less 21 Merits from built-up than Alternative 1 area Passes through hillock, major Length is more water body, built Design Speed is less, 22 Demerits than Alternative up area. High R&R issues 2 Comparatively length of travel is more Not 23 Recommendation Recommended Not recommended recommended

Source: Design Report and Primary survey

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 0-2: Options for Beawar Bypass

Page | 6 - 9

6.6.1.2 Alternative analysis Brahmano ki Sareri Bypass

Table 6-3: Analysis of Options for Brahmano ki Sareri Bypass

Alternate 3 (Existing S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Description Alignment) No. (Blue) (Red) (Magenta)

1 Start Chainage Ex. Km 41/227 Ex. Km 41/240 Existing Km 41/240

2 End Chainage Ex. Km 38/306 Ex. Km 37/900 Existing Km 37/900

3 Route Alignment LHS LHS Existing road

4 Length of bypass 3.240 km 3.825 km 3.267 km

Length of existing 5 alignment 2.921 km 3.267 Bypassed

6 Terrain Plain Plain Plain

7 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 65 Km/hr

Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal and vertical and vertical and vertical 8 Geometrics geometrics is possible geometrics is geometrics is with compromised possible possible speed

9 Land use Agriculture/Barren Agriculture/Barren Built UP

No of Proposed 2 MNB, 5 Culvert,1 2 MNB, 5 Culvert,1 10 - Structures VUP Grade-II VUP Grade-II

11 Service Road Required Required

12 Junctions 5 5 4

13 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m

Area Required, 14 6.48 11.48 - (Ha)

Resettlement & Heavy Impact due to 15 Light Impact Light Impact Rehabilitation Built-up area

Approx Structure 16 3.34 3.24 (Crore) LA

Page | 6 - 10

Alternate 3 (Existing S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Description Alignment) No. (Blue) (Red) (Magenta)

17 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil

Wildlife Area/ 18 Nil Nil Nil Notified area

19 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil

Archaeological/Her 20 Nil Nil Nil itage site

Approx Cost 21 1.02 1.20 - (Crore) LA

Approx highway 22 11.34 13.38 - (Crore) LA

Approx Total Cost 23 15.70 17.82 (Crore)

Length is comparatively 24 Merits shorter than alternative 2

High R&R issues Length is higher 25 Demerits Design speed is less than alternative 1 than minimum (i.e. 40 kmph)

26 Recommendation Recommended Not recommended Not recommended

Source: Design Report and Primary survey

Page | 6 - 11

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 6-3: Options for Brahmano ki Sareri Village Bypass

6.6.2 Alternative analysis of Babra realignment

Table 6-4: Analysis of Options for Babra Realignment

S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 (Existing Description No. (Blue) (Red) Alignment) (Magenta)

1 Start Chainage Ex. Km Ex. Km 137/945 Ex. Km 137/945 137/945

2 End Chainage Ex. Km Ex. Km 140/505 Ex. Km 140/505 140/505

3 Route Alignment/ Side RHS LHS Existing road

4 Length of bypass 2.675 km 4.058 km 2.310 km

5 Terrain Plain Plain Plain

6 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 50 Km/hr

7 Geometrics Smooth Smooth Smooth horizontal and horizontal and horizontal and vertical geometrics is vertical vertical

Page | 6 - 12

S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 (Existing Description No. (Blue) (Red) Alignment) (Magenta) geometrics is geometrics is possible with possible possible compromised speed

8 Land use pattern Agriculture, Agriculture, Built up Barren Barren

9 No of Proposed 2 MJB, 4 4 Culverts - Structures Culverts

10 Service Road - - Four lane required

11 Obligatory Points - -

12 Junctions 6 4 4

13 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil

14 Wildlife Area/ Notified Nil Nil Nil area

15 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil

16 Archaeological/Heritage Nil Nil Nil site

17 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m

18 Area Required, (Ha) 8.025 12.174 4.90

19 Resettlement & Heavy Impact due to Light Impact Light impact Rehabilitation Built-up area

20 Approx Cost (Crore) LA 0.266 0.403

21 Approx highway (Crore) 20.865 31.652 LA

22 Merits Involved non Involved non agriculture land agriculture land

No major CD structure required

Shorter than Alternative 2.

Page | 6 - 13

S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Alternate 3 (Existing Description No. (Blue) (Red) Alignment) (Magenta)

23 Demerits Length is more High R&R issues than Alternative 1.

Major CD Design speed is less structure than minimum (i.e. 40 required kmph)

24 Recommendation Recommended Not Not recommended Recommended

Figure 0-4: Options for Babra Realignment

Page | 6 - 14

6.6.2.1 Alternative analysis of Roopnagar Realignment

Table 6-5: Analysis of options for Roopnagar Realignment

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 (Existing Description No. (Blue) (Red) Alignment) (Magenta)

Ex. Km 148538 Ex. Km 148278 Ex. Km 148538 1 Start Chainage Ex. Km 73000 Ex. Km 73000

Ex. Km 148660 Ex. Km 148660 Ex. Km 148660 2 End Chainage Ex. Km 75080 Ex. Km 75080 Ex. Km 75080

LHS/RHS of 3 Route Alignment LHS of existing road Existing road existing road

4 Length of bypass 1.780 km 2.106 km 2.220 km

5 Terrain Plain Plain/Rolling Plain

6 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 30-50 Km/hr

Smooth Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal horizontal and and vertical and vertical 7 Geometrics vertical geometrics is geometrics is geometrics is possible with possible possible compromised speed

Agriculture/Built 8 Land use Agriculture/Barren Built up up

No of Proposed 9 3 Culverts, 1 Bridge 4 culverts - Structures

10 Service Road - - Required

11 Junctions 8 9

12 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil

Wildlife Area/ Notified 13 Nil Nil Nil area

14 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil

Page | 6 - 15

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 (Existing Description No. (Blue) (Red) Alignment) (Magenta)

Archaeological/Heritage 15 Nil Nil Nil site

16 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m

4.44 17 Area Required, (Ha) 5.34 6.318

Resettlement & Heavy Impact due 18 Light Impact Light Impact Rehabilitation to Built-up area

19 Approx Cost (Crore) LA 0.148 0.176 -

Approx highway (Crore) 20 13.884 16.427 - LA

21 Approx Cost (Crore) 6.195 7.770

Light Impact Light Impact 22 Merits Less overall cost

Plain/Rolling High R&R issues terrain 23 Demerits Length is more Design speed is than Alternative less than minimum 1 (i.e. 40 kmph)

Not 24 Recommendation Recommended Not recommended recommended

Page | 6 - 16

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 6-5: Options for Roopnagar Realignment

6.6.2.2 Alternative analysis Rajiyawas Realignment

Table 6-6: Analysis of Options for Rajiyawas Realignment

S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 (Existing Alternate 3 (Existing Description No. (Blue) Alignment) Red Alignment) Magenta Ex. Km Ex. Km 102/580 Ex. Km 102/920(MDR- 1 Start Chainage 102/980(MDR-84) (MDR-84) 84) Existing Km 2 End Chainage Existing Km 100/660 Existing Km 100/260 100/260 LHS of existing 3 Route Alignment Existing road Existing road road 4 Length of bypass 2.850 km 3.620 km 2.860 km 5 Terrain Plain/Rolling Plain/Rolling Plain/Rolling 6 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 50 Km/hr 50 Km/hr Smooth horizontal and Smooth horizontal and Smooth vertical geometrics is vertical geometrics is 7 Geometrics horizontal and possible with possible with vertical compromised speed compromised speed

Page | 6 - 17

S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 (Existing Alternate 3 (Existing Description No. (Blue) Alignment) Red Alignment) Magenta geometrics is possible Agriculture/Barren/Built Agriculture/Barren/Built 8 Land use Agriculture/Barren up up No of Proposed 9 11 6 culverts Structures 10 Service Road - Required Required 11 Junctions 4 5 4 12 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Wildlife Area / 13 Nil Nil Nil Notified area 14 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil Archaeological / 15 Nil Nil Nil Heritage site 16 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 30m Area Required, 17 8.55 10.86 5.72 Hectares Resettlement & 18 Light Impact Moderate Impact Heavy Impact Rehabilitation Approx Cost 19 0.269 0.342 (Crore) LA Approx highway 20 9.975 12.670 (Crore) LA Length is comparatively less Future 21 Merits Development is easy Smooth Geometry is possible LAQ requirement Design speed is less Design speed is less is comparatively than minimum (i.e. 40 than minimum (i.e. 40 high kmph) kmph) 22 Demerits

High R&R issues

Page | 6 - 18

S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 (Existing Alternate 3 (Existing Description No. (Blue) Alignment) Red Alignment) Magenta 23 Recommendation Recommended Not recommended Not recommended

Source: Design Report and Primary survey

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 6-6: Options for Rajiyawas Realignment

6.6.2.3 Alternative analysis Pipali Bariya Realignment

Table 6-7: Analysis of options for Pipali Bariya Realignment

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 (Existing Description Alternate 2 (Red) No. (Blue) Alignment) (Magneta) Existing Km 1 Start Chainage Ex. Km 98/040 Existing Km 97/140 97/292

Page | 6 - 19

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 (Existing Description Alternate 2 (Red) No. (Blue) Alignment) (Magneta) Existing Km 2 End Chainage 95/672 Ex. Km 95/620 Existing Km 96/080

3 Route Alignment RHS LHS Existing road 4 Length 1.055 km 1.901 km 1.654 km 5 Terrain Plain Plain Plain 6 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 km/hr 30-50 Km/hr Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal and vertical and vertical and vertical geometrics is 7 Geometrics geometrics is geometrics is possible with possible possible compromised speed 8 Land use Agriculture/Barren Agriculture/Barren Built-up No of Proposed 9 2 Culverts 4 Culverts - Structures 10 Service Road - - Required 11 Obligatory Points - - 12 Junctions 1 2 4 13 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Wildlife Area/ Notified 14 Nil Nil Nil area 15 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil Archaeological/Heritage 16 Nil Nil Nil site 17 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m Area Required, 18 3.165 5.703 3.318 Hectares Resettlement & Heavy Impact due 19 Light Impact Light Impact Rehabilitation to Built-up area 20 Approx Cost (Crore) LA 0.177 0.319 Approx highway (Crore) 21 3.693 6.654 LA

Page | 6 - 20

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 (Existing Description Alternate 2 (Red) No. (Blue) Alignment) (Magneta) Passes from Far away distance to built up area Future Future 22 Merits Development is Development is easy easy Length is Doesn’t involves comparatively agricultural land less Length is comparatively High R&R issues more 23 Demerits Comparatively Design speed is High Land less than minimum acquisition (i.e. 40 kmph) 24 Recommendation Recommended Not recommended Not recommended

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 0-7: Options for Pipali Bariya Realignment

Page | 6 - 21

6.6.2.4 Alternative analysis Hiradhani Realignment

Table 6-8: Analysis of Options for Hiradhani Realignment

Alternate 3 (Existing S. Description Alternate 1 (Blue) Alternate 2 (Red) Alignment) No. (Magneta) 1 Start Chainage Existing Km 89119 Existing Km 89623 Existing Km 89119 2 End Chainage Existing Km 88022 Existing Km 87880 Existing Km 88022 RHS of existing 3 Route Alignment LHS of existing road Existing road road 4 Length of bypass 1.000 km 2.325 km 0.942 km 5 Terrain Plain Plain/Rolling Plain 6 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 50 Km/hr Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal and vertical and vertical and vertical 7 Geometrics geometrics is possible geometrics is geometrics is with compromised possible possible speed 8 Land use Agriculture/Barren Agriculture/Barren Built up No of Proposed 9 1 1 MNB, 3 culverts - Structures 10 Service Road - - Required 11 Junctions 2 4 1 12 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m 13 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Wildlife Area/ 14 Nil Nil Nil Notified area 15 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil Archaeological/H 16 Nil Nil Nil eritage site Area Required, 17 3.00 6.975 2.079 Ha Resettlement & Heavy Impact due to 18 Light Impact Light Impact Rehabilitation Built-up area Approx Cost 19 0.216 0.502 (Crore) LA

Page | 6 - 22

Alternate 3 (Existing S. Description Alternate 1 (Blue) Alternate 2 (Red) Alignment) No. (Magneta) Future Future Development Development is is easy 20 Merits easy Smooth Geometry Smooth Geometry Design speed is less Length is 21 Demerits than minimum (i.e. 40 comparatively more kmph) Passing through High R&R issues major water bodies 22 Recommendation Recommended Not recommended Not recommended

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 6-8: Options for Hiradhani Realignment

Page | 6 - 23

6.6.2.5 Alternative analysis Kaniyakhera Kotra Realignment

Table 6-9: Analysis of Options for Kaniyakhera Kotra Realignment

Alternate 3 (Ex. S. Alternate 1 Description Alternate 2 (Red) Alignment) No. (Blue) (Magenta) 1 Start Chainage Ex. Km 85/106 Ex. Km 85/120 Existing Km 82/620 2 End Chainage Ex. Km 83/369 Ex. Km 82/620 Existing Km 83/120 3 Route Alignment RHS/LHS LHS Existing road 4 Length of bypass 1.630 km 2.385 km 2.459 km 5 Terrain Plain Plain Plain 6 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 50 Km/hr Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal Smooth geometrics and vertical and vertical is possible with 7 Geometrics geometrics is geometrics is compromised speed possible possible 8 Land use Agriculture/Barren Agriculture/Barren Built up No of Proposed 9 1 MNB 1 MNB - Structures 10 Service Road - - Required 11 Junctions 4 3 1 12 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m 13 Area Required, (Ha) 4.89 7.155 4.918 Resettlement & Heavy Impact due to 14 Light Impact Light Impact Rehabilitation Built-up area 15 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Wildlife Area/ Notified 16 Nil Nil Nil area 17 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil Archaeological/Heritage 18 Nil Nil Nil site 19 Approx Cost (Crore) LA 0.236 0.346 Approx highway (Crore) 20 5.705 8.348 LA Passes away from Most of alignment Length is 21 Merits built up area straight in nature comparatively low

Page | 6 - 24

Alternate 3 (Ex. S. Alternate 1 Description Alternate 2 (Red) Alignment) No. (Blue) (Magenta) Future Future Development is Development is easy easy Length is comparatively short Length is more High R&R issues

22 Demerits Design speed is less than minimum (i.e. 40 kmph) Recommended Not Not recommended 23 Recommendation recommended

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 0-9: Options for Kaniyakhera and Kotra Realignment

Page | 6 - 25

6.6.2.6 Alternative analysis Ojiyana Realignment

Table 6-10: Analysis of Options for Ojiyana Realignment

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 (Red) Alternate 2 (Existing Description No. (Blue) Alignment) (Magenta) 1 Start Chainage Ex. Km 82/399 Ex. Km 82/399 Ex. Km 82/399 2 End Chainage Ex. Km 81/106 Ex. Km 81/106 Ex. Km 81/106 LHS of existing RHS of existing 3 Route Alignment Existing road road road

4 Length of bypass 2.005 km 1.000 km 1.04 km

5 Terrain Plain Rolling Rolling 6 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 50 Km/hr Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal Smooth geometrics and vertical and vertical is possible with 7 Geometrics geometrics is geometrics is compromised speed possible possible Existing Land use Agriculture/Barren Agriculture/Barren Built-up 8 pattern through proposed alignment No of Proposed 9 4 culverts 2 - Structures 10 Service Road - - Required 11 Junctions 4 2 2 12 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Wildlife Area/ Notified 13 Nil Nil Nil area 14 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil Archaeological/Heritage 15 Nil Nil Nil site 16 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m

17 Area Required, (Ha) 6.015 3 2.02

Resettlement & Heavy Impact due to 18 Light Impact Light Impact Rehabilitation Built-up area

19 Approx Cost (Crore) LA 0.680 0.399

Page | 6 - 26

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 (Red) Alternate 2 (Existing Description No. (Blue) Alignment) (Magenta) Approx highway (Crore) 20 7.018 3.5 LA Passes away from Passes away from built up area built up area 21 Merits Future Future Development is Development is easy easy Length is Passes through Design speed is less 22 Demerits comparatively rolling terrain than minimum (i.e. more 40 kmph) Recommendation Not Recommended Not recommended 23 Recommended

Source: Design Report and Primary survey

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 0-10: Options for Ojiyana Realignment

Page | 6 - 27

6.6.2.7 Alternative analysis Badnor Realignment

Table 6-11: Analysis of Options for Badnor Realignment

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 (Existing Description Alternate 2 (Red) No. (Blue) Alignment) (Magenta) Existing Km Existing Km 1 Start Chainage Existing Km 73/912 73/912 73/912 Existing Km Existing Km 2 End Chainage Existing Km 71/560 71/560 71/560 3 Route Alignment LHS/RHS LHS Existing road 4 Length of bypass 2.396 km 1.820 km 3.235 km 5 Terrain Plain Plain Plain 6 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 30 Km/hr Smooth Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal horizontal and and vertical and vertical vertical geometrics is geometrics is 7 Geometrics geometrics is possible possible with possible compromised speed Existing Land use Agriculture/Barr Agriculture/Barren Built up 8 pattern through en proposed alignment No of Proposed 5 culverts 4 Culverts - 9 Structures 10 Service Road Required - Required 11 Junctions 4 4 4 12 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m 13 Area Required, (Ha) 7.188 5.46 6.65 14 Approx Cost (Crore) LA 2.694 2.047 Approx highway (Crore) 15 8.386 6.370 LA 16 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Wildlife Area/ Notified 17 Nil Nil Nil area 18 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil Archaeological/Heritage 19 Nil Nil Nil site

Page | 6 - 28

Alternate 3 S. Alternate 1 (Existing Description Alternate 2 (Red) No. (Blue) Alignment) (Magenta) Resettlement & Moderate Heavy Impact due 20 Light Impact Rehabilitation Impact to Built-up area 21 Approx Cost (Crore) 8.23 11.32 Passes from far away Smooth distance to built-up Geometry area. 22 Merits Future Development

is easy. Smooth Geometry Involve Involve R&R agriculture/Barren High R&R issues. issues land acquisition. 23 Demerits Design speed is less than minimum (i.e. 40 kmph) Not 24 Recommendation Recommended Not recommended Recommended Source: Design Report and Primary survey

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 0-11: Options for Badnor Realignment

Page | 6 - 29

6.6.2.8 Alternative analysis Ashind Realignment

Table 6-12: Analysis of options for Asind Realignment

Alternate 3 (Existing S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Description Alignment) No. (Blue) (Red) (Magenta) Existing Km Existing Km Existing Km 57/969 1 Start Chainage 57/969 58/140 Existing Km Existing Km Existing Km 54/827 2 End Chainage 54/827 54/827 LHS of existing LHS of existing Existing road 3 Route Alignment road road 4 Length of bypass 2.105 km 2.765 km 3.278 km Length of existing 1.974 3.278 km 5 alignment Bypassed 6 Terrain Plain Plain Plain 7 Speed 80-100 Km/hr 80-100 Km/hr 30-50 Km/hr Smooth Smooth horizontal Smooth horizontal horizontal and and vertical and vertical 8 Geometrics vertical geometrics is geometrics is possible geometrics is possible with compromised possible speed Existing Land use Agriculture/ Agriculture/Barren Residential, 9 pattern through Barren Commercial proposed alignment No of Proposed 10 1 MJB 1 MJB 1 MJB Structures 11 Service Road Required - Required 12 Junctions 6 5 6 13 Land Acquisition 30m 30m 20m Area Required, 3.948 14 6.315 8.295 Hectares Resettlement & Light Impact Light Impact Heavy Impact due to 15 Rehabilitation Built-up area 16 Approx Cost (Crore) LA 4.153 5.456

17 Forest Land Nil Nil Nil Wildlife Area/ Notified 18 Nil Nil Nil area 19 Water Bodies Nil Nil Nil

Page | 6 - 30

Alternate 3 (Existing S. Alternate 1 Alternate 2 Description Alignment) No. (Blue) (Red) (Magenta) Archaeological/Heritage 20 Nil Nil Nil site Approx highway (Crore) 7.368 9.678 21 LA Length is comparatively shorter than 22 Merits alternative 2 & 3 Uses existing alignment Length is High R&R issues comparatively 23 Demerits higher than alternative 1 Design speed is less than minimum (i.e. 40 kmph) Recommended Not Not recommended 24 Recommendation recommended Source: Design Report and Primary survey

Source: Design Report and Primary survey Figure 0-12: Options for Asind Realignment

Page | 6 - 31

6.7 Cold Mix & Hot Mix Technology Analysis Cold Mix Technology involves cold asphalt which is a high-quality, polymer-modified cold mix asphalt available in batch orders. Hot Mix Technology involves Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) which is a combination of approximately 95% stone, sand, or gravel bound together by asphalt cement, a product of crude oil. Asphalt cement is heated aggregate, combined, and mixed with the aggregate at an HMA facility. The comparison between the two technologies is given in Table below. Table 6-13: Analysis of Cold & Hot Mix Technology

S. Parameter Cold Mix Hot Mix No.

• Hot mix asphalt is used primarily as • Street Cold Asphalt is a paving material and consists of a relatively new product mixture of aggregate and liquid developed in 1995 through asphalt cement, which are heated the introduction of new and mixed in measured quantities. polymer technology and research into the • Hot mix asphalt facilities can be manipulation of viscosity broadly classified as either drum mix and material design, of the plants or batch mix plants, according 1 Description various components of an to the process by which the raw asphalt mix - Street Cold materials are mixed. Asphalt is soft and sticky out • In a batch mix plant, the aggregate is of the bag, but it quickly dried first, then transferred to a mixer hardens after application where it is mixed with the liquid and the end result is a asphalt. pavement patch with better strength but similar • In a drum mix plant, a rotary dryer properties to hot asphalt. serves to dry the aggregate and mix it with the liquid asphalt cement.

• Cold patch, also known as • Hot mix asphalt concrete (commonly cold mix or cold asphalt, abbreviated as HMAC or HMA) is was first recognized as a produced by heating the asphalt way to make road repairs binder to decrease its viscosity and quickly because it can be drying the aggregate to remove applied right from the moisture from it prior to mixing. container without heating. • Mixing is generally performed with the 2 Requirements • Cold asphalt also doesn’t aggregate at about 300 °F (roughly require any special heavy 150 °C) for virgin asphalt and 330 °F rolling machines or special (166 °C) for polymer modified applicators as it can be asphalt, and the asphalt cement at shovelled or poured into a 302 °F (150 °C). pothole or utility cut and • Paving and compaction must be tamped down with a hand performed while the asphalt is tool. sufficiently hot

Page | 6 - 32

S. Parameter Cold Mix Hot Mix No.

• Cold mix asphalt concrete is produced by emulsifying the asphalt in water with (essentially) soap prior to mixing with the aggregate. While in its emulsified state • HMAC is the form of asphalt concrete the asphalt is less viscous most commonly used on high traffic and the mixture is easy to pavements such as those on major work and compact highways, racetracks and airfields 3 Use • The emulsion will break • Asphalt concrete has different after enough water performance characteristics in terms evaporates and the cold mix of surface durability, tire wear, will, ideally, take on the braking efficiency and roadway noise. properties of cold HMAC • Cold mix is commonly used as a patching material and on lesser trafficked service roads

• Actually less expensive to use over the life of a road repair • Less expensive for new road 4 Merits • Completely seals and construction patches potholes, utility cuts, edge repairs, and even overlays.

• Less resilient and more 5 Demerits • Expensive vulnerable to cracking

Source: Design Report Benefits of Cold Mix over Hot-mix Asphalt Concrete are as follows. • Durability and strength equivalent to using hot mix • Permanent repair compared to traditional cold-mix which is only a temporary fix • No Priming required • Works even when water is present • Works at low ambient temperatures (hot-mix cannot be used in cold weather as the asphalt will cool to much prior to compacting) • Instantly ready for traffic – and in fact product cures and hardens more quickly with compaction forces. Rapid access over the surface reduces down time where there are time-critical schedules

Page | 6 - 33

• Limited mess than other brands – product will not stick to or stain hands or shoes even when bucket is freshly opened • No bleeding • No drift of bitumen to the surface requiring surface preparation prior to any further overlay • Reduced labour time and therefore cost • No requirement for special equipment • Environmentally beneficial as its noxious fumes are reduced & wastage avoided Cold Mix technology is more suitable for repair of potholes and cracks on roads, bridges, overlays, parking lots and other asphalt and concrete surfaces. Cold Mix is fast, permanent, easy to use and environmentally preferable cold asphalt product. However for constructing of new roads hot mix technology is better suited. Contractor/Concessionaire shall utilise the same where ever suitable. 6.8 Environmental Considerations The various mitigation measures for minimising the extent of environmental impacts and avoiding of sensitive environmental features have been worked out. The table below provides the measures that have been adopted for offsetting the impacts. A description of the measures has been presented in the following sections.

Table 6-14: Minimization of Environmental Impacts

Criteria Means

Maintenance of Design Speed for Improved geometrics through traffic

Intersection Improvements; Geometric Improvement of Road Safety improvements at curves

Adequate drainage Provision of drains

Intersection improvements; aggressive tree Reduction of Air and Noise Pollution plantations; good EMP

Displacement of Local Population Maximum utilization of available ROW, SIA & RAP

Minimisation of Direct Impact on Sensitive Receptors, cultural and Public consultations, Good EMP measures religious properties

Minimisation of Property acquisition Concentric widening, SIA & RAP

Loss of Water body Wise design

Avoidance of contamination due to Silt Fencing, Oil Interceptor Siltation / spillage

Page | 6 - 34

Criteria Means

Displacement of Commercial Properties Concentric widening, SIA & RAP

Minimisation of Loss of Utility Lines Centre line alterations

Maximum effort shall be given to avoid avoidable Minimisation of Tree Loss tree felling

Stabilisation of Slope Turfing / Pitching

Accidental Road Kill of Fauna Proper Signage, Speed Control

Avoidance of Loss of Forest Area Wise modification in design

Source: Design Report

6.8.1 Improvement of air and noise quality • By improving intersections; • By removing traffic bottlenecks; • Provision of Noise barrier; • By maintaining a steady flow of traffic 6.8.2 Avoidance of Impact of Sensitive, Cultural and Community Properties • By lateral shifting of the alignment; • By providing zebra crossing for smooth and safe travel of local populace • Providing noise attenuation measures mainly along schools and hospitals • Avoiding direct impact on sensitive receptors

Page | 6 - 35

CHAPTER 7: CONSULTATIONS WITH KEY STAKEHOLDERS

7.1 Public consultation

Public consultations have acquired a very important role in the planning process for development projects. Globally, the practice of involving communities in the planning process has been recognized as an effective tool for mitigating the negative impacts due to the projects and ensuring its timely completion. The effectiveness of participation and consultation is directly related to the degree of involvement of the affected groups. The project requires detail planning to ensure that likely project affected persons, local community, interested groups, non- governmental organizations, civil society organizations; local government, line departments, etc. are consulted regularly at different stages.

7.1.1 Definition of a Stakeholder

A person, group, or organization that has direct or indirect stake in an organization because it can affect or be affected by the organization's actions, objectives and policies. Key stakeholders in a business organization include creditors, customers, directors, employees, government (and its agencies), owners (shareholders), suppliers, unions, and the community from which the business draws its resources. Although stake holding is usually self-legitimizing (those who judge themselves to be stakeholders are stakeholder), all stakeholders are not equal and different stakeholders are entitled to different considerations. It is extremely important to involve stakeholders in all phases of the project for two reasons: Firstly, experience shows that their involvement in the project significantly increases your chances of success by building in a self- correcting feedback loop; secondly, involving them in project builds confidence and will greatly ease its acceptance in your target audience.

7.1.2 Types/ Categories of Stakeholders

Based on their role towards the project, stakeholders have been categorized into following; 7.1.2.1 Owners or Project proponent This is related to the stakeholder who risks their own money in a venture. Whilst they will get a return on their investment, usually in the form of a dividend they have a vested interest in seeing the Organization being successful, to not only guarantee their dividend but also to ensure it grows. 7.1.2.2 Government Agencies Some government departments which will be affected positive or negative or both by proposed road are required to give their inputs to make project successful. These government agencies are Revenue department, Forest department, Electricity department, Agriculture department, Panchayti-raj department, Education department etc. 7.1.2.3 Communities This is very important stakeholder category i.e. PAFs/PAP who are being affected directly through land acquisition or their structures removal full or partial. Persons other than PAF/PA but residing

Page | 7 - 1 in same location are also significant to provide their opinions/ suggestions in terms of project design. 7.1.2.4 Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs) The non-government organizations which are working in project affected area can be considered as stakeholder.

7.1.3 Process of Stakeholder Consultation

Public consultation is an important method of involving various stakeholders particularly, local community with reference to the proposed development initiatives. It provides a platform to participants to express their views, concerns and apprehensions that might affect them positively or negatively. Through participation and consultation, stakeholders influence development initiatives, and decision making process. The effectiveness of participation and consultation is directly related to the degree of involvement by the likely project affected persons and the local community and integration of outcome of consultations wherever feasible in the proposed development initiatives. Detailed planning is required to ensure that likely project affected persons, local community, interested groups, non-governmental organizations, civil society organizations; local government, line departments, etc. are consulted regularly, frequently and purposefully during different stages of the project including project preparation.

7.1.4 Levels of Consultations

The public consultations were carried out at three stages namely screening, feasibility and environmental impact assessment of the project. Public consultations at screening and feasibility levels were conducted at those locations which could likely have more impacts than other affected areas in the region. Environmental consultations were carried out at village and district level. Types of consultations done with various participants using different tools including, interviews with government officials, individual consultations, key informant interviews, focus group discussion, stakeholder consultations, etc., are presented in Table 6.1.

Table 7-1: Types of Consultations

Level Type Key Participants

Individual Local level Consultation People along the project corridor

Local level Consultation People along the project corridor including those that are impacted directly or indirectly Individual

Settlement Focus Group Discussion PAP, women, truckers, weaker sections, agriculturist, school teachers

Institutional Stake holder Discussion Line departments

Page | 7 - 2

7.1.5 Methodology Adopted

Different techniques of consultation with stakeholders were used during project preparation, viz., in-depth interviews, public meetings, group discussions, Individual Consultations etc. to understand the socio-economic profile of the community and the affected families, structured questionnaires were used and information was collected from the individuals on one-to-one basis. The consultations have also been carried out with special emphasis on the vulnerable groups. The key informants during the project preparation phase included both individuals and groups namely: • Heads and members of households likely to be affected • Groups/clusters of PAPs • Village Panchayat, Sarpanch and members • Local voluntary organizations and NGO • Government agencies and departments such as local revenue authority • Other project stakeholders with special focus on PAPs belonging to the vulnerable group.

7.1.6 Types of Consultations

The dissemination process and type of information shared with the stakeholders during consultations are described below: • While undertaking inventory of road side utilities, structures and PAHs census survey the information disseminated focused on the proposed road improvements. • Potential PAHs were consulted about the proposed road improvement program, resultant impacts, possible socio-cultural conflict (if any) and loss of CPRs and its relocation. • People were requested to gather at common places including Panchayat Bhawan, temples, schools, etc. During these consultations pictorial methods were also used to explain proposed improvement and possible environmental and social impacts in the concerned villages.

7.1.7 Major Findings from Consultation

Major findings related to key issues such as existing environment, land acquisition, compensations for land and structures, alternative alignments, underpasses, general perception about the project, suggestions to mitigate hardships resulting from dislocation and loss of livelihood, resettlement options, perception about HIV/AIDS awareness, CPR requirement etc. However, consultation has been done at different locations at stages as required in the project stretch. Information collected during consultation has been shared with environmental and technical team. Suggestion obtained from people and their representatives have been analysed on technical and economic merits. Final decisions of engineering design team on alternative alignments, location of pedestrian crossing, location of enhancement of community properties are conveyed to the people. Most of the PAPs suggestions were incorporated in the final design.

Page | 7 - 3

7.1.7.1 Consultations with Institutional Stakeholders The institutional level consultations were held with representatives of institutions having stakes in implementation of the project. The institutions contacted included State Forest Department, State Wildlife Department etc. Several meetings were held with NH-PWD Officials and their inputs have been incorporated in the Reports. Details of Consultations with Institutional Stakeholders are given in below table.

Table 7-2: Consultations with institutional Stakeholders

Contacted Officials Issues Discussed Outcome of the Discussion

Mr. Rakesh • Details of forest land along existing project road is Mathur ACF, WL • Information on presence of forest obtained land along the road • Todgarh Raoli, the nearest • Presence of Notified Protected Mr. Jain ACF, IT Protected Area from Project Area (covered under Wildlife Cell Site is located at about 7.6 Protection Act, 1972) Km away from project (from Sanwa - Ch. 31.000). Map • Record of sighting of obtained General idea Endangered/Migratory species in about floral & faunal pattern the vicinity of Project Area Mr. Dinesh Gupta obtained (Forest),ACF, • Forest Map showing the alignment • No specific corridor has FCA Wildlife crossing/ corridor crossing been established for the project area Wildlife crossing/ corridor in the project area.

Mr. Om Prakash, • Briefed about total waste Nagar Palika, generation, plastic waste Asind • Information of plastic waste generation, Waste generation and solid and municipal segregation method and waste generation. Mr. Hari Ram Ji and landfill locations. Waste Om Prakash,Nagar management plan. Prishad Beawar

Source: Consultation conducted by Environment Team 7.1.7.2 Consultations with Community The extent or the likely level of adverse impacts was one of the major criteria in deciding locations for public consultation sessions. A listing of the various consultation sessions conducted at different locations along the project roads is presented in table below

Page | 7 - 4

Table 7-3: Consultations with Community / Primary Stakeholders

Location Issues Raised Response Given

• During the discussion with local resident of Ras village, following points discuss and recorded. • They have accounted several environmental impacts like Air • From consultant side –A pollution, noise pollution, major bypass will be proposed to accidents due to heavy vehicular mitigate all environment traffic due to existing highway impacts on local. People which passing through Ras supporting the bypass option. village. • Minor impact on water bodies • Traffic congestion is the major may occurred during the issue construction phase. All safety • There is seasonal Lildi river measures will be adopted to flowing close to Ras village which minimize the impact on water have no water during the period bodies. of consultation. There are no such • Proper signage along the ponds observed nearby Ras sensitive areas will be provided Ras Village village. and noise barrier and plantation 06.10.2018 • People also informed that water work will be done after Local Residents, table goes below due to consultation with local villagers Villagers and public establishment of cement industry • During the construction phase in Ras area. Earlier the water temporary employment will be table is around 300-400 ft and generated and preference will now its 500-600 ft in the study be given to local resident area. Maximum water of the bore according to their qualification wells used by the cement and experience industries. • Proper drainage facility to be • Water quality of hand pumps and provided and bus stand and bore well is not good for drinking shelter will be provide for local purpose due to high fluoride and villagers. iron content in the water. • Compensation will be given • There should be road safety according to the National policy measures, noise barriers, along or state policy on R&R road side, school and near villages suggested by the villagers to mitigate the impacts. • Bypass provision suggested by the local villager as the proposed

Page | 7 - 5

Location Issues Raised Response Given road passing through the village. Air and noise pollution causes health effects, irritation and sleep disturbance. • Major occupation observed in the study area agriculture and labouring in cement industry. Water scarcity, unemployment is the major problem people facing in the area. • There is no archaeological, Migratory birds sighting spot and historic place identify along the project road. Local villagers also suggested for provision of drainage, toilet, and bus stops facility in Ras village. • Compensation issues

• Accident hotspots has been identified all along the highway • Villagers facing difficulty due to and safety measure heavy trucks ply on the road implemented during which create noise and air/ dust construction and post pollution in the area which causes construction phase several health impacts. • Proper signage along the • Due to poor road condition and sensitive areas will be provided heavy vehicles movement causes and noise barrier and plantation dust pollution Bagatpura village work will be done after • Water quality of hand pumps and consultation with local villagers Local Residents, bore well is not good for drinking, Villagers and public • During the construction phase therefore people use tanker temporary employment will be supply water from nearest village. generated and preference will Ground water table is 500-600ft in be given to local resident the village. Three- four accidents according to their qualification have been accounted in last six and experience months along the road. • Proper drainage facility to be • Villagers suggested accident provided and bus stand and safety measures. shelter will be provide for local villagers.

Page | 7 - 6

Location Issues Raised Response Given • To mitigate air and noise pollution, • Compensation will be given plantation and noise barriers according to the National policy nearby school. or state policy on R&R. • There is no archaeological, Migratory birds sighting spot and historic place identify along the project road. • Local villagers demanded for drainage, toilet, and bus stops facility in Bagatpura village. • People facing un-employment due to lack of opportunity

• During the interaction people • People of the Roopnagar were openly sharing their views village welcome the project as on proposed highway activity. the project will generate • Most of the people are in favor of employment and reduce the provision of Bypass because of dust pollution in the area. heavy truck movement inside the • People want implanting agency village which may causes of to plant trees all along the accident. highway with the help of local • Water quality of hand pumps and people bore well is good but ground water • Accident hotspots has been table is much deeper around identified all along the highway 450ft. Drinking water is supplied Roopnagar village and safety measure from pipeline and tankers. implemented during Local Residents, • There is no archaeological, construction and post Villagers and public Migratory birds sighting spot and construction phase. historic place identify along the • Proper signage along the project road. sensitive areas will be provided • Villagers found difficulty due and noise barrier and plantation heavy trucks ply on the road work will be done after which create noise and air/ dust consultation with local villagers pollution. • During the construction phase • Water quality of hand pumps and temporary employment will be bore well is not good for drinking, generated and preference will therefore people use tanker be given to local resident supply water from the according to their qualification surroundings. and experience

Page | 7 - 7

Location Issues Raised Response Given • There is no accidents recorded in • Proper drainage facility to be last one year however villagers provided and bus stand and suggested accident safety shelter will be provide for local measures. villagers. • Major occupation observed in the • Road geometry and curve study area agriculture, labour. improvement proposed to avoid the accident • There is no archaeological, Migratory birds sighting spot and • Compensation will be given historic place identify along the according to the National policy project road. or state policy on R&R • People welcome the project and demanded for employment during the construction phase. • Local people demanded for public facilities along the road site like bus stands, shops etc

• During the discussion with local • People of the Roopnagar resident of sohapura village, village welcome the project as following points discuss and the project will generate recorded. employment and reduce the • Air pollution, noise pollution, due dust pollution in the area. to heavy vehicular traffic. There is • Accident hotspots has been two large ponds observed nearby identified all along the highway sohapura village. and safety measure • People use pond water for implemented during construction and post Sohapura village domestic purposes Water quality of hand pumps and bore well is construction phase. Local Residents, not good for drinking purpose due • Proper signage along the Villagers and public to high fluoride and iron content in sensitive areas will be provided the water. However people and noise barrier and plantation manage use tanker water. work will be done after • There should be road safety consultation with local villagers measures long road side, school • During the construction phase and near villages to prevent the temporary employment will be road accident in the area. generated and preference will • Noise barriers, plantation be given to local resident suggested near school, hospital according to their qualification and other sensitive zones. and experience

Page | 7 - 8

Location Issues Raised Response Given • There is no archaeological, • Proper drainage facility to be Migratory birds sighting spot and provided and bus stand and historic place identify along the shelter will be provide for local project road Local villagers also villagers suggested for provision of • Road geometry and curve drainage, toilet, and bus stops improvement proposed to avoid facility near sohapura village the accident Compensation will be given according to the National policy or state policy on R&R • Employment will be generated during construction phase and preference will be given to local villagers. • Wayside amenities will be provided during the operation phase.

• Following are the observation recorded during the consultation • People of the Chatarpura village welcome the project as • Villagers found difficulty due project will connect them to heavy trucks ply on the road major cities and beneficial for which create noise and air/ dust economic and social growth of pollution which creates health the area. hazards. • Accident hotspots has been • Water quality of hand pumps and identified all along the highway bore well is good for drinking, and safety measure Chatarpura village people also use tanker supply implemented during water from the surroundings. Local Residents, construction and post Ground water table is 400-600ft in Villagers and public construction phase. the village • Proper signage along the • There is no accidents recorded in sensitive areas will be provided last one year however villagers and noise barrier and plantation suggested accident safety work will be done after measures. consultation with local villagers Major occupation observed in the study area agriculture, labouring • During the construction phase and business. temporary employment will be generated and preference will • There is no archaeological, be given to local resident Migratory birds sighting spot and

Page | 7 - 9

Location Issues Raised Response Given historic place identify along the according to their qualification project road. and experience People welcome the project and • Proper drainage facility to be want public facilities along the provided and bus stand and road site like bus stands, shops shelter will be provide for local etc. villagers • Road geometry and curve improvement proposed to avoid the accident Compensation will be given according to the National policy or state policy on R&R • Employment will be generated during construction phase and preference will be given to local villagers.

• During the discussion following • People of the Brahmano ki points discussed sareri village aware about the They have accounted several project and welcome the impacts like Air pollution, noise project. pollution, water scarcity, unemployment, major accidents • People want plantation of trees due to heavy vehicular traffic. all along the highway with the There are no such ponds help of local people. observed nearby Brahmano ki • Accident hotspots has been sareri village. identified all along the highway Brahmano ki sareri • Water quality of hand pumps and and safety measure bore well is not good for drinking implemented during Local Residents, purpose due to high fluoride and construction and post Villagers and public iron content in the water. construction phase. • People expecting good • Proper signage along the compensation from the highway sensitive areas will be provided authority. and noise barrier and plantation work will be done after • There should be road safety consultation with local villagers measures long road side, school and near villages to prevent the • During the construction phase road accident in market area. temporary employment will be generated and preference will • Noise pollution is due to heavy be given to local resident vehicular movement on the road.

Page | 7 - 10

Location Issues Raised Response Given Road condition is not so good. according to their qualification Bypass or flyover provision and experience suggested by the local villager as • Proper drainage facility to be the proposed road passing provided and bus stand and through the village. shelter will be provide for local • Major occupation observed in the villagers study area agriculture and • Road geometry and curve labouring in cement industry. improvement proposed to avoid • Noise barriers, plantation the accident Compensation will suggested near school, hospital be given according to the and other sensitive zones. National policy or state policy on R&R • There is no archaeological, Migratory birds sighting spot and • Employment will be generated historic place identify along the during construction phase and project road. preference will be given to local Local villagers also suggested for villagers. provision of drainage, toilet, and bus stops facility

• Environmental consultation has • People of the Mandal villager been carried out at Mandal welcome the project village. Following are the • People want plantation of trees observation recorded during the all along the highway with the consultation. help of local people. • Villagers found difficulty due • Accident hotspots has been heavy trucks ply on the road identified all along the highway which create noise and air/ dust and safety measure Mandal village pollution. implemented during construction and post Local Residents, • There are several industries construction phase. Villagers and public surrounding the Mandal village which also hamper the local • Proper signage along the villager’s day to day life due to sensitive areas will be provided direct emitting pollution from the and noise barrier and plantation source. Water quality of hand work will be done after pumps and bore well good for consultation with local villagers drinking, people also use tanker supply water from the • During the construction phase surroundings. Ground water table temporary employment will be is 400-600ft in the village generated and preference will be given to local resident

Page | 7 - 11

Location Issues Raised Response Given • There is no accidents recorded in according to their qualification last one year however villagers and experience suggested accident safety • Proper drainage facility to be measures. provided and bus stand and • Major occupation observed in the shelter will be provide for local study area labouring and villagers business • Road geometry and curve • There is no archaeological, improvement proposed to avoid Migratory birds sighting spot and the accident Compensation will historic place identify along the be given according to the project road. People welcome the National policy or state policy project and want public facilities on R&R along the road site like bus • Employment will be generated stands, shops etc. during construction phase and preference will be given to local villagers.

• Environmental consultation has • People of the Rajiyawas been carried out at Rajiyawas villager welcome the project village. Following are the • People want plantation of trees observations recorded during the all along the highway with the consultation. help of local people. • Villagers found difficulty due • Accident hotspots has been heavy trucks ply on the road identified all along the highway which create noise and air/ dust and safety measure pollution. implemented during Water quality of hand pumps and construction and post Rajiyawas village bore well is not good for drinking, construction phase. Local Residents, therefore people use tanker Villagers and public supply water from the • Proper signage along the surroundings. Ground water table sensitive areas will be provided is 500-600ft in the village. and noise barrier and plantation work will be done after • There is no accidents recorded in consultation with local villagers last one year however villagers suggested accident safety • During the construction phase measures. temporary employment will be Major occupation observed in the generated and preference will study area agriculture, labour. be given to local resident according to their qualification • There is no archaeological, and experience Migratory birds sighting spot and

Page | 7 - 12

Location Issues Raised Response Given historic place identify along the • Proper drainage facility to be project road. provided and bus stand and People welcome the project and shelter will be provide for local demanded for employment during villagers the construction phase. • Road geometry and curve

improvement proposed to avoid • Local people demanded for public the accident Compensation will facilities along the road site like be given according to the bus stands, shops et National policy or state policy on R&R • Employment will be generated during construction phase and preference will be given to local villagers.

Source: Consultation conducted by Environment Team A brief discussion held at Nagar palika Asind and Beawar to get the information of Plastic waste and municipal waste generation in the project area. Following are the outcome of the discussion:

7.1.7.3 Consultation with Nagar parishad Beawar Beawar is a town and a Municipality in Ajmer District in the State of Rajasthan. It is located at 184 kilometres southwest of the state capital Jaipur, amidst Aravalli hill and along the National Highway No.8. As of 2011 India census, Beawar has a population of 1,51,152 and approx. 200 villages comes under Beawar tehsil. Beawar is developing fast due to its locational advantage and its proximity to the - Industrial Corridor which are reflected in rapid growth of the town. Total waste collected from the surrounding villages and Beawar city is calculated around 60 ton as informed by the staff. The collected waste from cities goes directly to the dumping ground dumped at Bari Ghati Dumping site (3 km away from the Beawar city). The dumped waste is mixed in nature. Almost, entire waste collected is dumped and only in selected cities. • There is no waste segregation and waste management facilities available. • Segregation of MSW at source or at household level is not practiced. • Partial waste segregation practice observed in few towns where public are provided with infrastructure facilities and created awareness by the civic bodies. • Door-to-door collection of waste is practiced in town. • The community bins set up and maintained properly. • There are unaccounted generation of recyclable materials collected by waste pickers at source

Page | 7 - 13

7.1.7.4 Consultation with Nagar Palika, Asind • Asind is a city and a municipality in Bhilwara district, Rajasthan, India. It is a Tehsil (sub- division) for many villages • Some of major villages and towns are, Badnor, Shambhugrah, Patan, , Parasoli etc. • During the consultation with Nagar palika staff it was recorded that waste will be collected on daily basis and records are maintained at Palika level. • All type of waste collected and dumped on Nagar palika land near Gayri Asharam dumping site. • There is no waste segregation and waste management facilities available. • Approx. 1000 kg waste generated and collected by the Nagar palika vehicle from surrounding villages and dumped without segregation and processing at dump yard. • Consultation with wholesaler of plastic waste dealer Beawar • During the consultation with Gopal Singh it was found that there is 3-4 plastic wholesaler based out in city • Plastic waste collected from by the local vendors from the city and villages and sell to wholesalers • Total plastic waste 50 ton plastic waste every month send for recycling from Beawar city. • 6-10 Ton plastic per month collected by the each wholesaler in the city. • All raw plastic waste supply to Delhi for recycling and cost of plastic waste varies between 3-13 Rs/Kg. • Consultation with wholesaler of plastic waste dealer Beawar Asind • During the consultation with Mr. Ambu Nath, it was found that there are two plastic wholesalers available in Asind. • Plastic waste collected from by the local vendors from the city and villages and sell to wholesalers. • Total plastic waste 10-15 ton plastic waste every month send for recycling from Asind and supply to Delhi for recycling purpose. • 6-10 Ton plastic per month collected by the each wholesaler in the city.

7.1.8 Stakeholder Analysis Matrix

Analysis reveal that majority of stake holders are very supportive and shown positive interest in the project and ensure good support during execution of the project. The District Administration were very positive for the project. Local users of the road were also very excited and supportive for the project. Adversely project affected persons are also in favour of the project but with some

Page | 7 - 14 concerns about the compensations and restoration of livelihood. The outcome of stakeholders for the project is presented in Table 7.3.

Table 7-4: Stakeholder Analysis

Characteristics Influence (Social, location, Interests in (H-High, Stakeholder Relevant terms of size, M- Category Stakeholders organizational, support/ opposition Medium, capacity) L- Low) District Collector, of High Government Both the district i.e. District Head Largely positive Pali, Ajmer, Quarters, Tehsil Head with assurance of Rajsamand and Quarters full support. Bhilwara and High Revenue Officers Other Telecom, Water concerned supply, Electricity Supportive Medium departments Road Users, Local Mixed user group, all Intended villagers and along the road Supportive High beneficiaries Transporters Children, women, Dispersed across the Supportive High elderly corridor Road Side small Supportive with Adversely business units, Almost all along the apprehensions of High affected residents and land project corridor adverse Persons owners impact Town and small Supportive but Organized village business apprehension of groups having their adverse impact interest All major habitat groups businesses along and about quality areas along side road High (business side road corridors, of associations Transport construction and trade Organizers etc. unions) Civil society NGO’s working in (NGOs, the region All District Supportive High CBOs, religious

Page | 7 - 15

Characteristics Influence (Social, location, Interests in (H-High, Stakeholder Relevant terms of size, M- Category Stakeholders organizational, support/ opposition Medium, capacity) L- Low) organizations) Other external / internal N.A N.A N.A N.A stakeholders

Source: Consultation conducted by Environment Team

7.1.9 Conclusion / Recommendations

Major findings (arising out of the consultations) related to key issues such as general perception about the project, suggestions to mitigate hardships resulting from dislocation and loss of livelihood, the details of which are presented below and the summary of consultation is given in. • All people around the project vicinity aware of the project • People were convinced about the importance of good highways in their region since it will reduce the incidence of accidents and enhance economic opportunities • People consented to cooperate if adequate compensation is given • Requests were made by the people for providing facilities and amenities like bus shelter and safer accessibility at points of congestion and intersections • No or minimum impact on structures along the road • PAPs wanted to know when construction work would commence • Affected People asked about creation of employment opportunities during road construction and later phases of the project for them • People suggested that adequate safety measures should be provided such as speed breaks, signage’s etc. near inhabited areas, school and hospitals • Bypass should be provided and widening should be done in the existing alignment Based on the finding of the consultation with the various stakeholders and especially with the people living along the project corridor, the various minimization options has been worked out to reduce the loss of assets and livelihood of the people in project impact zone. The consultation process was continued during the detail design period to minimize the adverse impact to its minimum level and involve people’s concern.

Page | 7 - 16

CHAPTER 8: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN AND MONITORING

8.1 General

The environmental monitoring programme is devised to ensure that the envisaged purpose of the project is achieved and results in the desired benefit to the target population. To ensure the effective implementation of the EMP, it is essential that an effective monitoring programme be designed and carried out. Broad objectives of the monitoring programme are: • To evaluate the performance of mitigation measures proposed in the EMP; • To suggest improvements in the management plans, if required; • To satisfy the statutory and community obligations; and, • To provide feedback on adequacy of Environmental Impact Assessment

8.2 Monitoring Indicators

The monitoring programme contains monitoring plan for all performance indicators, reporting formats and necessary budgetary provisions. Physical, biological and environmental management components identified as of particular significance in affecting the environment at critical locations have been suggested as Performance Indicators. The Performance Indicators shall be evaluated under three heads as: • Environmental condition indicators to determine efficacy of environmental management measures in control of air, noise, water and soil pollution; • Environmental management indicators to determine compliance with the suggested environmental management measures. • Operational performance indicators have also been devised to determine efficacy and utility of the mitigation/enhancement designs proposed For each of the environmental condition indicator, the monitoring plan specifies the parameters to be monitored, location of the monitoring sites, frequency and duration of monitoring. The monitoring plan also specifies the applicable standards, implementation and supervising responsibilities. The Environmental Monitoring Programme has been detailed out in Table 7.1 along with stipulated standards. Successful implementation of the Environmental Monitoring Program is contingent on the following: The Monitoring Consultant to request the Concessionaire / Contractor to commence all the initial tests for monitoring of air, water quality, soil and noise levels early in the contract to establish the 'baseline' i.e. to assess the existing conditions prior to effects from the Construction activities being felt. The Monitoring Consultant to request the Concessionaire / Contractor to submit for approval a proposed schedule of subsequent periodic tests to be carried out. Monitoring by the Monitoring Consultant of all the environmental monitoring tests and subsequent analysis of results.

Page | 8 - 1

Where indicated by testing results, and any other relevant on-site conditions, Monitoring Consultant to instruct the Concessionaire / Contractor to:

• Modify the testing schedule (dates, frequency) • Modify (add to or delete) testing locations • Verify testing results with additional testing as/if required • Require recalibration of equipment, etc., as necessary • Request the Concessionaire / Contractor to stop, modify or defer specific construction equipment, processes, etc., as necessary, that are deemed to have contributed significantly to monitoring readings in excess of permissible environmental "safe" levels.

8.3 Monitoring of Earthworks Activities

Most of the environmental problems related to the construction works are anticipated to be associated with the earthworks, particularly for the Quarries and Borrow Areas. Details regarding the guidelines and procedures adopted to minimize the environmental impacts of opening, operating and closing of Borrow Areas are presented in Annexure 5.1. Other environmental effects associated with the earthworks include the development of adequate temporary drainage to minimize detrimental effects (e.g. erosion) due to run-off, and safety aspects related to Works implementation.

8.4 Monitoring of Concessionaire / Contractor's Facilities, Plant and Equipment

All issues related to negative environmental impacts of the Concessionaire / Contractor's facilities; Plant and equipment are to be controlled through: The Concessionaire / Contractor's self-imposed quality assurance plan Regular / periodic inspection of the Concessionaire / Contractor’s plant and equipment Monthly appraisal of the Concessionaire / Contractor. Other environmental impacts are to be regularly identified and noted on the monthly appraisal inspection made to review all aspects of the Concessionaire / Contractor's operation. The Monitoring Consultant is to review all monthly appraisal reports, and instruct through team leader to the Concessionaire / Contractor to rectify all significant negative environmental impacts.

8.5 Environmental Monitoring Plan

An Environmental Monitoring Plan (EMoP) provides a basis for monitoring the status of different components of environment in the construction and operation phases of the project. The information derived from environmental monitoring activities can be used to mitigate and reduce environmental impacts and enhance project benefits through adaptive management. The implementation of the EMP is adopted in all project works. An EMP is important as it provides useful information and helps to:

Page | 8 - 2

• Assist in detecting the development of any unexpected environmental or social situation and thus provides opportunities for adopting appropriate control, management or mitigation measures. • Defines the responsibilities of the project proponents, site engineers, contractors and environmental monitors and provides means of effectively communicating environmental issues among them. • Defines the monitoring mechanism and identifies monitoring indicators, methods and parameters. • Provides information, which allows for the evaluation of the performance and effectiveness of mitigation measures proposed in the EMP and enables managers to make improvements in management plan. • Identifies training requirement at various levels. A monitoring plan normally involves three main types of activity: Routine Supervision of the Work: Observation of the construction/operation work to ensure mitigation measures are implemented effectively. Such a programme is primarily conducted by the contractor and design consultant. Environmental and Social Impact/Mitigation Monitoring: The monitoring to be conducted to determine the social impact. Such a programme is primarily conducted by the Social & Environmental Managing Unit (SEMU). Comprehensive Environmental and Social Monitoring: Broad area is monitored comprehensively to confirm the effectiveness of mitigation measures, conducting by SEMU. A comprehensive Environmental Monitoring Programme (EMoP) has been formulated and presented in Table below.

Page | 8 - 3

Table 8-1: Monitoring Plan for the Performance Indicators Env. Project Method/ Frequency Parameters Location Standards Implementation Supervision indicator stage guidelines and duration Air Quality Construction PM10, PM2.5, SO2, Respirable dust Hot mix plants, 24 hr Air quality Contractor PIU NH-PWD NOX, CO, HC sampler to be stone crushers continuous, standard by through approved / SC located 50 m from and once per CPCB monitoring the plant in construction / month at each agency downwind earthwork sites location for 2 direction. Use and as years method specified suggested by by CPCB for SC (Total 8 analysis Locations) Operation Respirable dust Major Road 24 hr Air quality PIU NH-PWD PIU NH-PWD sampler to be Intersections continuous, 24 standard by through Approved / MoRTH located 50 m from and samples at 2 CPCB monitoring the plant in Residential locations for 2 agency downwind area (2 year direction. Use Locations) method specified by CPCB for analysis Water Construction Ground water: (IS: Grab sampling Groundwater 2 times / year Water quality Contractor PIU NH-PWD Quality 10500:1991) at Construction (Pre-monsoon standard by through Approved / SC and Surface water for Camps / site & Post- CPCB monitoring Class D and Class E and Surface monsoon) for agency (Propagation of Fish) water at total 6 2 years as prescribed by locations for 2 CPCB and for vector years borne diseases

Page | 8 - 4

Env. Project Method/ Frequency Parameters Location Standards Implementation Supervision indicator stage guidelines and duration Operation Grab Sampling 2 times / year 2 times / year Water quality PIU NH-PWD PIU NH-PWD Pre- monsoon (Pre-monsoon standard by through approved / MoRTH Water quality & Post- CPCB monitoring monsoon & monsoon) for agency Post-monsoon) 2 years for year at 2 locations Siltation in Construction Visual Checks for All rivers/ 1 Once during Guidelines Routine work of Contractor PIU NH-PWD Water presence streams/ drainage rainy seasons from water Engineering / SC Bodies of construction channels and of the resources Team debris/waste and other water construction department blockade of drainage bodies along the period channels stretch Operation Once during PIU NH-PWD, PIU NH-PWD operation of 1st with support of / MoRTH year Water Resource Department Noise levels Construction Equivalent Noise Free field at 1 m Construction 24 hr As per National Contractor PIU NH-PWD levels on dB (A) from the sites samples continuous, Ambient Noise through approved / SC scale for day and equipment whose at 8 locations once per year Standard monitoring night noise levels are thrice a year for 2 years agency being determined. for 2 year Operation Equivalent Noise At 4 locations Once in a year specified in PIU NH-PWD PIU NH-PWD levels using an for 2 year for 2 years Environment al through approved / MoRTH integrated noise Protection Act, monitoring level meter kept at agency

Page | 8 - 5

Env. Project Method/ Frequency Parameters Location Standards Implementation Supervision indicator stage guidelines and duration a distance of 15 m 1986 amended from edge of 2002 Pavement Soil Quality Construction NPK (ICAR As specified by 4 samples / Twice per year CPCB Contractor PIU NH-PWD standard ) and heavy the site engineer locations for 2 standard and through approved / SC metals for dredging MoRTH / year NPK as per monitoring sites supervision ICAR standard agency consultant Soil erosion Construction Visual check for Soil Through the After first rain Visual Checks Contractor MoRTH erosion and siltation Project Corridor especially at River banks, bridge locations and river training structures Operation Once during Visual Checks Engineering MoRTH operation of Team of MoRTH 1st year Drainage Construction Visual Checks Through-out the Once in a year None Specific Contractor’s PIU NH-PWD / Congestion Project Corridor before rainy Engineering SC season Team Operation Once in a year MoRTH before rainy Engineering Team

Page | 8 - 6

Env. Project Method/ Frequency Parameters Location Standards Implementation Supervision indicator stage guidelines and duration season for 2 yrs Borrow Construction Visual Checks Identification of Borrow areas Once in a IRC Contractor with PIU NH-PWD Areas borrow areas to be operated month guidelines and approval from PIU / SC Best Practices NH-PWD, MoRTH for Borrow area operation Operation Rehabilitation as Closed Borrow Quarterly for 1 Borrow Area MoRTH recommended in Areas year rehabilitation SIA Plan Constructio Construction Storage Area, Rapid audit as per Construction Quarterly IRC guidelines Contractor with PIU NH-PWD n Sites and Stage Construction Sites reporting format Sites and during and to the approval from / MoRTH Labour for Hygiene, Camp construction satisfaction of NH-PWD, MoRTH Camp drainage Medical period MoRTH Facilities Etc. Tree Construction Surveillance Throughout the During site As suggested PIU NH-PWD / Plantation monitoring of trees Project Section clearance in by Forest Dept Local Forest felling construction Departments phase Operation Audit for survival rate Throughout the Once in a year The Engineer of trees plantation Project Section for 2 years will be responsible for monitoring up to the Defect Liability Period in any particular

Page | 8 - 7

Env. Project Method/ Frequency Parameters Location Standards Implementation Supervision indicator stage guidelines and duration stretch. After this period the PIU NH-PWD will be responsible for monitoring Aquatic Construction Disturbance to water bodies Once in a year None specific Independent PIU NH-PWD / Fauna aquatic fauna due to where fishery Expert Fishery Including increased siltation, activity is reported Department Fisheries impact on fish and enhancement productivity , for small pond breeding and near Harnaut spawning Operation water bodies End of First None Specific Independent PIU NH-PWD / where fishery year of expert Fishery activity is reported operation Department Accident Construction Record of Accidents Throughout the Every year of - Part of contract Environment and PIU NH-PWD Rate and its causes, section especially Construction Safety officer of / SC different level of Construction Sites period Contractor disabilities / fatalities Operation Record of Accidents Throughout the Throughout -- Part of regular EA in coordination MoRTH and its causes, project Section the Project life operation and with Police different level of cycle Maintenance Department disabilities / fatalities. cost

Page | 8 - 8

Table 8-2: Role and Action Plan of Various Departments

S. Department Disaster Specific Action Plan No. 1 Disaster • Ensure coordinated movement of all departments, Management & officials and agencies for combating the disaster Relief (DM&R) • Issue necessary directions and ensure effective and coordinated response of all departments. • Arrange regular meetings for updating the apex body on a daily basis. • Provide inputs to concerned departments for effective implementation of the rehabilitation plans. • Document the experiences and best practices. 2 Animal Husbandry • Prepare contingency plan • Constitute veterinary mobile teams with required resources like medicines, doctors, subordinate staff, laboratories, protective gears, antibiotics, vaccines and antitoxins, etc. in abundance. • Constitute technical groups at state, zone and district levels. • Identification of affected areas. • Disposal of dead carcasses. • Focused attention to veterinary health. • Mass vaccination programme of animals in affected areas Make arrangements for rescue and evacuation of stranded livestock. • Pool in sufficient doctors for treatment of sick animals/ poultry. • Control spread of animal disease. • Carry out epidemiological surveillance to evade biological disasters. • Promote awareness through IEC activities. 3 Public Health • Prepare Contingency plan Engineering • Enforce ground water legislation Department (PHED) • Strict monitoring and vigilance on water for drinking purpose only. • Identify additional sources of water for maintenance of regular supply. • Ensure supply of sufficient water through tankers for habitats and cattle camps. • Provide household water purification tablets. • Augmentation of existing Resources • Hiring of Private Wells

Page | 8 - 9

S. Department Disaster Specific Action Plan No. • Hand Pump repair programme • Installation of New Hand Pumps and Tube wells • Revival of traditional water sources like Wells, Bawdis, Tankas, etc. • Transportation of water through road tankers and by Rail • Earmark water for drinking purpose available in the tanks and ensure no illegal pumping takes place. • Provide adequate quantity of bleaching powder to PRI, especially Gram Panchayats to protect spread of water and vector borne diseases. • Promote awareness on safe hygienic practices and sanitation. 4 Department of • Health and epidemiology surveillance Medical and Health • Constitute mobile teams with required resources like medicines, doctors, subordinate staff, laboratories, protective gears, antibiotics, vaccines, etc. in abundance. • Mobile clinics for health checkups • Organise regular rural health camps and keep public informed of such camps. • Check the nutritional status especially for women and children and give treatment. • Check samples of food grains, cooked food in community kitchens, etc. • Promote general awareness of health and hygiene • Issue warnings to all officials/ staff. • Manning of control room 24x7. • Maintain regular contact with EOC. • Keep all ambulances, mobile teams, specialists, blood, medicines, paramedics, etc. in a state of readiness. • Carry out triage. • Provide first aid to minor injuries. • Evacuate injured to hospitals. • Constitute and effectively deploy mobile teams having Doctors paramedical, • Set up health centres in relief camps and assure hygiene and sanitation. • Prevention/ control of epidemics and vaccination, availability of adequate x-ray machines and orthopaedic, neurology equipment.

Page | 8 - 10

S. Department Disaster Specific Action Plan No. • Availability of stretchers, blood, medicines, ambulances. • Arrange additional beds and medical treatment in local and nearby hospitals as required. • Psychosocial counselling to distressed people. • Health and epidemiology Surveillance • Monitor nutrition status of affected people and take appropriate actions. • Maintain continuous supply of medicines and emergency services till normalcy is restored. 5 Disaster • Ensure coordinated movement of all concerned Management & departments, officials and agencies for combating Relief (DM& R) Drought. • Make sufficient funds available for Drought response • Arrange regular meetings for updating the apex body and issue directions to all concerned departments regularly. • Document experiences and best practices. 6 National Highway - • Listing of works that could be done as relief Public Works programmes - pond desilting, excavation of water Department (PWD ) structures, construction of Government infrastructures, etc. • Carry out sudden checks and supervise the relief works. • Generate employment through cash for work/ food for work relief programmes, Issue warnings to all officials/ staff. • Manning of control room 24x7. • Maintain regular contact with EOCs at district/ state levels. • Keep all resources in the state of readiness. • Assessment of damage to infrastructure, roads, bridges and buildings and commencement of restoration work. • Carry out search, rescue, evacuation, relief operation. • Clearance of roads and debris of collapsed infrastructures. • Identification and demolition of unsafe buildings/ infrastructures. • Barricade the disaster site and unsafe areas. • Identification and demarcation of safe areas and preparation of temporary shlters for relief camps.

Page | 8 - 11

S. Department Disaster Specific Action Plan No. • Prepare temporary roads and bridges, helipads and air strips on the need basis for effective relief operations. • Deployment of heavy equipment like dozers, excavators, cranes, pulleys, power saws, gas cutters, L&Ts, JCBs and other specialist equipment and vehicles. • Restoration of buildings, roads, bridges and other Government buildings. • Ensure close monitoring of response and rehabilitation operations and relief camps. 7 Civil Supplies and • Distribution of food packets, dry rations, fuel, oil and Public Distribution lubricants System (PDS) • Take precautionary steps against hoarding and profit mongering and ensure normal prices of commodities in the market. • Adequate supply and reserves of FOL and coordinate with all the national agencies for smooth transportation of food and civil supplies. • Supply daily necessities of food items, stock position and ensure continuous supply, in relief camp too. • Coordination with FCI/ warehouses. • Make public aware through media about food distribution and also about the availability of items at subsidized rates. 8 Municipal • Coordination and supply of safe drinking water using Corporation tankers, etc. • Manning of control room 24x7. • Issue warnings to all Fire Service stations. • Keep all resources in a state of readiness • Assist in evacuation, search and rescue operations. • Ensure availability of all types of extinguishers for fire following earthquakes. • Appoint labourers for excavation works; dismantle unsafe buildings, disposal of solid garbage and liquid waste, disposal of dead persons and carcasses. • Control other potential hazardous situations that might arise from oil, gas and hazardous material spills. • Organise relief camps wherever required; ensure pure drinking water, Sanitation, food, temporary shelters, basic relief materials as per requirements and needs.

Page | 8 - 12

S. Department Disaster Specific Action Plan No. • Assist in post disaster response and rehabilitation work 9 District • Prepare Drought Contingency Plan. Administration • Issue necessary directions/ instructions to all concerned departments to combat the upcoming situation in an effective and coordinated manner. Ensure effective coordination with all departments, agencies, NGOs and stakeholders. • Arrange/mobilize equipment and resources like water tankers, trucks/ vehicles to transport food supply, fodder, mobile medical vehicles, ambulances, etc. • Arrange for disposal of dead carcasses. • Generate daily reports of relief activities and disseminate. • Organise relief camps wherever required; ensure pure drinking water, Sanitation, food, temporary shelters, basic relief materials as per requirements and need. • Media Management • Procure tents, sanitation block, essential materials, etc. for relief camps. • Generate daily reports of relief activities and disseminate. 10 Department of • Information dissemination, issue periodic bulletins to Information and media. Public Relation • Ensure information given to media are facts and true to avoid rumours. Arrange visit for local and foreign journalists in affected areas. • Information dissemination, update public on various relief interventions. • Operate the Control Room round the clock. • Nodal person to be designated as spokesperson for the Government. • Information dissemination, issue periodic bulletins to media. 11 Emergency • Coordinate and issue direction to all concerned stake Operation Centre holders/ departments regularly (EOC) • Brief the Disaster Management & Relief Commissioner regularly. • Coordinate the relief and rescue operation. • EOC to function as control room where all SDMA members and experts from various departments are

Page | 8 - 13

S. Department Disaster Specific Action Plan No. available and take charge for effective coordination monitoring and implementation of rescue operations. • Prepare, forward and compile reports and returns from time to time. • Brief media regularly about the situation’ • Brief/ Update the chief minister and cabinet about the situation. 12 Police • Manning of control room 24x7. • Maintain regular state of readiness • Communication to EOC and stakeholders instantly. • As first responder assume command for security and law and order • Demarcate entries and exits for rescue and relief operation and proper traffic management. • Support SDRF, Civil Defence, Home Guard, Army, Sainik Kalyan and other first responders for search and rescue. • Take necessary actions to avoid rumours. • Ensure prevention of theft and loot. • Provide effective communication network work. • Deployment and monitoring of 108 ambulances. • Deployment of lady police personnel in relief camps for Gender concerns. 13 Electricity Board • Issue warnings to all officials/ staff. • Manning of control room 24x7. • Keep all resources in a state of readiness • Immediately shut down the supply of electricity in the area • Start restoration work of the damaged lines • Simultaneously, make electricity arrangements at the rehabilitation, relief camp areas. 14 Rural Development • Issue warnings to all officials/ staff. Department (RDD) • Manning of control room 24x7. • Keep all resources in a state of readiness. • Distribution of relief materials to Panchayats, • Relief equipment, tractors, labour, digging/ excavation tools, etc. to be arranged to mobilising and raising fund Support PRI in organising relief camps wherever required

Page | 8 - 14

S. Department Disaster Specific Action Plan No. • Ensure pure drinking water, Sanitation, food, temporary shelters, basic relief materials as per requirements and needs. • Arrangement of Rural relief camps • Arrangement of community kitchens. • Assist in post disaster response and rehabilitation work 15 Indian • Transmit updated information to EOC Meteorological • Mass media publicity/ issue bulletins at regular Department intervals. 16 Railways • Manning of control room 24x7. • Alert officials/ staff and keep all resources in a state of readiness. • Search, rescue and evacuate injured persons to safer places. • Assess the situation for appropriate actions. • Regulate the movement of all trains • Carry out inspection of railway bridges and lines. • Deployment of equipment like generators sets, pump sets, cranes pulleys, dozers, gas cutters, earthmovers, labourers for clearance of fallen bogies, electricity Poles, damaged tracks, etc. • Transport and provide emergency tents, water, medicines, food, etc. to the accident site. • Adequate arrangement of specialized trains for transportation of rescue and relief material. • Restoration of damaged railway lines, electricity poles to restart services as soon as possible. 17 NGO • Provide first aid, health services, financial assistance and relief materials etc.

Page | 8 - 15

ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN

8.6 General The Environmental Management Action Plan (EMP) is required to ensure managing environment impacts within acceptable limits in addition to environmental enhancement during construction and operational phases. EMP is location and time specific. In general, NH-PWD, Rajasthan (with assistance from Contractor/Concessionaire and Monitoring Consultant) is the responsible entity for ensuring that the mitigation measures are carried out. Impact mitigation measures are provided under in Table 8.4. The list provides reference (MoRTH specification), implementing organization and responsible entity. 8.7 INSTITUTIONAL ARRANGEMENT FOR EMP IMPLEMENTATION The Implementation of Environmental Management Plan during the construction phase will be carried out by Environmental team duly appointed by the Contractor/Concessionaire. The overall supervision of Environmental monitoring works during construction and operation stage shall be carried out by NH-PWD, Rajasthan with the help of the Monitoring Consultant. The institutional arrangement proposed for the Project has been presented here with defined roles and responsibilities. The responsibility of implementing the mitigation measures directly lies with Contractor/Concessionaire. The Monitoring Consultant shall monitor the effectiveness of the implementation of the work on behalf of NH-PWD, Rajasthan. In the pre- construction phase of the project the Contractor/Concessionaire shall study the EMP to identify environmental issues and arrive at a suitable strategy for implementation 8.7.1 PROPOSED IMPLEMENTATION SETUP The institutional arrangement proposed for the Project has been presented in Figure below.

Figure 0-1: Institutional / Implementation Arrangements

Page | 8 - 16

8.7.2 CONTRACTOR/ CONCESSIONAIRE

The Contractor / Concessionaire is responsible for the physical implementation of the mitigation measures proposed in the Environmental Management Plan (EMP). To ensure the effective implementation of the EMP, the EMP will be made as part of the Contract Document between Construction Contractor/Concessionaire and Client (NH-PWD, Rajasthan). It follows that the Contractor/Concessionaire has to have environmental expert to incorporate environmentally sound construction methods. 8.7.3 Environmental Expert

For effective implementation and management of the EMP, the Contractor/Concessionaire should depute an Environmental Expert to deal with the environmental issues of the project. This officer shall interact with the Road Manager to ensure that the mitigation and enhancement measures mentioned in the EMP are adhered. His prime responsibility shall be to apprise the Road Manager about the ground conditions. He shall also monitor that the requisite clearances and the NOCs for the project has been taken and shall also strictly supervise the adherence to the EMP. The qualifications and responsibilities of Environmental Expert are given in table below.

Table 0-1: Proposed Qualification and Responsibilities of Environmental Expert (EE)

Qualifications & Experience • Postgraduate in Environmental Science / Environmental Management / Zoology / Botany / Ecology / Environmental Planning / Degree in Civil Engineering with specialization in environment. • 10 years of total experience with a minimum of 5 years in the implementation of EMP of highway projects and an understanding of environmental, health and safety issues. • Prior practical experience in the field of Highways would be an advantage. • Roles & Responsibilities • He / She shall be reporting directly to the Chief Project Manager of the Contractor/Concessionaire • Primarily responsible for implementation of the EMP on site and ensuing that the environmental quality is meeting the standards laid down by Central Pollution Control Board and other related authority. • The EE shall implement the EMP by assigning the necessary resources (manpower, money and machinery) and attend such meetings as are required for the effective implementation of the EMP on site. • He shall maintain a “Complain Register” to record any grievances from public. • He shall maintain a register of all road side trees planted and present within ROW. • The EE shall be the interface of the Concessionaire with the client and the IE/SC.

Page | 8 - 17

8.7.4 Monitoring Consultant (MC) The Monitoring Consultant, to be procured through ICB shall assist NH-PWD, Rajasthan in the implementation of project, once the project documents are ready. The Environmental Specialist of the MC shall be the key personnel to ensure the successful implementation of EMP provisions. Since ICB procurement is envisaged, the selected consultants are expected to have the necessary professional(s) to tackle the issues that the project is likely to bring up. The Environmental Specialist of the MC will be a key position, which can be leveraged to ensure that the Contractor/Concessionaire complies with the various EMP requirements. The EMP prepared for the Project road under, needs to be followed during the implementation of the civil works. The EMP is integrated in the technical specification and contract documents. The key responsibility of the Environmental Specialist will be the successful implementation of the EMP. In addition, he / she will update NH-PWD, Rajasthan on the progress of environmental protection and / or enhancement works as envisaged in the EMP. It is envisaged that the responsibilities of the Environmental specialist of the MC will include:

• Supervise and monitor the implementation of EMP by the Contractor / Concessionaire • Review and approve site-specific environmental mitigation / enhancement designs worked out by the Contractor / Concessionaire based on the EMP prepared during project preparation • Review and recommend the Contractors’ / Concessionaire’s Implementation Plans for approval (with any changes that may be necessary) to ensure compliance with the environmental provisions of the Contract • Monitor tree plantation programs and the periodic Environmental Monitoring (Air, Noise, Water, etc.) Programs to ensure compliance with the State requirements and the efficacy of EMP • Hold regular meetings with Contractor/Concessionaire and keep it updated to NH- PWD, Rajasthan reg. the progress of environmental works • Prepare and submit monthly and Quarterly Environmental progress report to NH-PWD, Rajasthan • Develop and organize environmental training programme to upgrade the skills within the staff of the environmental cell, contractors / concessionaire • Document and develop good practices during project implementation for wider dissemination The project will require continuous environmental supervision from the IC’s/SC side. Since the Sr. Environmental Specialist for IE projects are deployed on intermittent basis, it is desirable to have the field Jr. Environmental Specialist and engineers supervising the construction works be trained on environmental aspects, who then shall apprise the Team Leader and the Sr. Environmental Specialist of any significant development on environment.

8.7.5 REPORTING SYSTEM

Reporting system provides necessary feedback for project management to ensure quality of the works and that the program is on schedule. The rationale for a reporting system is based on accountability to ensure that the measures proposed as part of the Environmental

Page | 8 - 18

Management Plan get implemented in the project. Reporting system for the suggested monitoring program operates at two levels as:

• Reporting for environmental condition indicators and environmental management indicators • Reporting for operational performance indicators at the NH-PWD site level. The reporting system will operate linearly – contractor/concessionaire who is at the lowest rung of the implementation system reporting to the Project Manager, NH-PWD, who in turn shall report to Environmental Expert, PWD subsequently Project Director, NH-PWD as per Figure 8-1. All reporting by the Contractor/Concessionaire shall be on a monthly/Quarterly basis. The NH-PWD Site Office will be responsible for setting the targets for the various activities anticipated during construction phase in consultation with the MC and obtaining agreement from the Contractor/ Concessionaire after mobilization but before beginning of works on site. The Contractor/ Concessionaire will report from then on regarding the status on each of these. The NH-PWD Site Office will monitor the activities through its own staff or the Monitoring Consultant’s Environmental Specialist after obtaining the Contractor’s/Concessionaire’s report with the Consultant’s remarks during the construction phase. During the operation phase, the supervision as well as reporting responsibilities will lie with the NH-PWD Site Office or NH-PWD may appoint the Independent Expert for this period. Table 0-2: Summary of Reporting of Environmental components and Responsibilities

Monitoring Consultant NH-PWD Format (MC) Office Item Timing No. Overseeing / Supervision Reporting Compliance PRE-CONSTRUCTION PHASE Reporting by Contractor / Before start Concessionaire to MC M1 of As required Quarterly As required for dumping locations & construction construction and labour camp site Reporting by contractor Before start M2 to MC for construction of As required Quarterly As required and labour camp site construction Target sheet for Tree Before start M3 As required After cutting As required cutting of work Before start Reporting for borrow M4 of As required Quarterly As required areas construction CONSTRUCTION PHASE As per Target sheet for After C1 Monitoring As required As required Pollution Monitoring Monitoring Plan

Page | 8 - 19

Monitoring Consultant NH-PWD Format (MC) Office Item Timing No. Overseeing / Supervision Reporting Compliance Before start C2 Top soil Conservation As required Quarterly As required of work OPERATION PHASE Target sheet for During After O1 As required As required Pollution Monitoring Operation Monitoring After Redevelopment of completion After O2 As required As required Borrow Areas of usage of Monitoring Borrow Area During After O3 Survival Rate of Trees As required As required Operation Monitoring

8.8 ENVIRONMENTAL CAPACITY BUILDING

Training of staff will be done at a number of levels to raise their levels of environmental awareness. The training can be conducted by either some external agency or through the help of in-house expertise. The main focus of training programme shall be on efficacy on implementation of EMP The basic objective of giving training to different Stakeholder is to enhance their capabilities for implementation of Environment Management and Monitoring Plan. It is recommended that training be given at least 4 times both offsite and on site

• Pre-Construction Stage • Construction Stage • Before de-mobilization of Contractor/Concessionaire The training modules have been developed for different stakeholders involved in the Project during. Pre-construction, Construction and before demobilization of the Contractor / Concessionaire. Table 0-3: Training Modules

Environmental Training Module Training Mode of Aspects to be Conducting No. Recipients Training covered in Agency training Module For Training Before Start Of Construction Work SESSION-I Staff of NH-PWD Overview. Need (Nodal Level), Lecture NH-PWD / MC / Module-I and Value of staff of MC, NH- Sessions, Contractor’s / Environment PWD engineers,

Page | 8 - 20

Environmental Training Module Training Mode of Aspects to be Conducting No. Recipients Training covered in Agency training Engineering Staff Presentation Assessment Concessionaire’s of contractor / and discussion Representative concessionaire and collaborating Government agencies Staff of NH-PWD (Nodal Level), staff of MC, PWD Institutional Set-up engineers, Monitoring Lecture Role and Engineering Staff Consultant / Module- Sessions, Responsibility of of contractor Concessionaire / II Workshops & Stake Holders and /concessionaire Contractor’s Presentation Contractual and Representative obligations collaborating Government agencies. Staff of NH-PWD (Nodal Level) involved in the Overall generic project, staff of Environment MC, NH-PWD Monitoring Lecture Issues, engineers Consultant / Module- Sessions, Regulations & involved in Concessionaire / III Workshops & Statuary construction, Contractor’s Presentation requirements and contractor / Representative Mitigation concessionaire, Measures and collaborating Government agencies SESSION–II Staff of NH-PWD (Nodal Level), staff of MC, Project related NH-PWD Project Monitoring Engineers, Lectures; related Consultant / Module- Engineering Staff Demonstration environmental Concessionaire / IV of contractor / sessions issues and Contractor’s concessionaire mitigation Representative and other measures concerned agencies.

Page | 8 - 21

Environmental Training Module Training Mode of Aspects to be Conducting No. Recipients Training covered in Agency training Environmentally Staff of NH-PWD Sound (Nodal Level), Monitoring Group Construction Staff of MC, NH- Consultant / Module- Discussions Management & PWD engineers, Concessionaire / V and action plan Environmentally, Engineering Staff Contractor’s for the project Sustainable of Concessionaire Representative operations of /contractor. Highways Staff of NH-PWD (Nodal Level), Supervision and Monitoring Staff of MC, NH- Lectures; Consultant / Module- Monitoring, PWD engineers, Group Concessionaire / VI Reporting Engineering Staff Discussions Contractor’s of contractor/ Formats Representative Concessionaire Module for Training during Construction Staff of NH-PWD Implementation of (Nodal Level) Environment involved in the Management Plan, Monitoring project, staff of Lecture Environmental Consultant / MC, NH-PWD Sessions, Friendly Module-I Concessionaire / engineers Presentation & Construction Contractor’s involved in Workshops Methodology and Representative construction, Workers Safety contractor/ during Concessionaire Construction Staff of NH-PWD (Nodal Level) involved in the Interactive Monitoring project, staff of Lecture discussion, Consultant / Module- NH-MC, PWD Sessions, Monitoring and Concessionaire / II engineers Workshops & Reporting Contractor’s involved in Presentation Representative construction, System contractor / Concessionaire Module for Training during Construction at Site NH-PWD Environmental Monitoring Lecture engineers, Staff of Friendly Consultant/ Sessions, Module-I MC, All Staff of Construction Concessionaire Workshops & contractor / Methodology and /Contractor’s Presentation Concessionaire Workers Safety Representative

Page | 8 - 22

Environmental Training Module Training Mode of Aspects to be Conducting No. Recipients Training covered in Agency training NH-PWD Monitoring engineers, Staff of Consultant / Module- Practical on MC, All Staff of Safety Practices Concessionaire / II Site contractor / Contractor’s Concessionaire Representative Module for Training before Contractor Demobilization NH-PWD Staff & Monitoring Engineers, Staff of Lecture, Consultant / Module-I MC, Engineering Presentation Restoration of Site Concessionaire / Staff of Contractor Sessions Contractor’s / concessionaire. Representative NH-PWD Staff & Lecture Monitoring Engineers, Staff of Sessions, Reporting Formats Consultant / Module- MC, Engineering Presentation, for Concessionaire / II Staff of Contractor Workshop and Restoration Contractor’s / concessionaire. lesson learned Representative Module for Training after Construction before Start of Monitoring Monitoring Lecture Consultant / NH-PWD Staff & Sessions, Environment Module-I Concessionaire / Engineers Presentation Monitoring Contractor’s and Workshop Representative Monitoring Lecture Consultant / Module- NH-PWD Staff & Sessions, Reporting Formats Concessionaire / II Engineers Presentation, Contractor’s Workshop Representative

Page | 8 - 23

Table 0-4: Environmental Management Plan

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 1. Pre-Construction Stage 1.1. Pre-construction activities by PIU NH-PWD 1.1.1 Utility Relocation Clause 110, • While relocating the utilities (handpump, tube-well, Corridor of PWD- NH and Common Clause 110.1. telephone and electric line, etc.) and facilities, all Impact (CoI) Division Property and 110.7 of concerned agencies including PIU NH-PWD shall Resources MoRTH take necessary pre-cautions and provide for (CPRs) specification barricading / delineation of such sites to prevent accidents including accidental fall into bore holes, pits, drains both during demolition and construction / relocation of such facilities. • Standard safety practices shall be adopted for all such works. Relocation sites for all CPRs shall be selected in consultation with concerned communities, local administrative authorities / departments and the gram sabha. • The concern authority will relocate these utilities in consultation and written agreement with the agency / owner /community prior to initiation of any type of construction work/activity in such stretches. • The dismantled bore wells, wells and tap points shall be properly packed and sealed so that no external water or pollutants can enter such openings. 1.1.2 Land • Land acquisition shall only be limited at curve LA act 2013 PWD- NH Acquisition improvement location, realignment and bypass areas. Division • The acquisition of land and properties (Govt. /private) will be carried out in accordance with the LA act and the State Road Resettlement and Rehabilitation Policy.

Page | 8 - 24

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • Land dept. has to ascertain that the environmental impacts due to the additional acquisition of land during project implementation shall be addressed and the same shall be integrated in the EMP and other relevant contract documents. 1.1.3 Tree Cutting: Design MoRTH • In all 1057 trees have been identified for cutting after Corridor of Contractor The total number 201.6 design finalization. Tree cutting is to proceed only after Impact (CoI) and PWD- of trees to be cut all the legal requirements including attaining of in- NH Division for the project is principle and formal clearances from the Forest Dept. / 1037 MoEF&CC. • No construction activity and tree felling can be taken up in forest under project (13.4297 ha), which has not been cleared by the MoEF&CC, Govt. of India. • Activities pertaining to tree felling, logging, stacking of fire wood and passing of timber and removal are to be synchronized and removal of the converted materials shall be taken up by the responsible agencies as per tree cutting and removal rules as or as specified by the Competent Authority. • Tree cutting should not be carried out simultaneously all along the corridor as this will adversely impact the traffic movement and road safety. It should be carried out on priority basis at locations of diversions, bridge and culvert construction, and such other places where the construction work is scheduled to be started early i.e. as identified in the Contract Package. • On the spot records shall be maintained for all trees felled and logs, fire wood, stacks, obtained from such trees in the conversion register, which shall be

Page | 8 - 25

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity available for verification by any competent supervising authority of the Forest Department. • No sooner the trees are felled, the same has to be kept under watch and ward by the felling agency and steps taken for its authentication by ‘passing’ carried out at stump site. 1.1.4 Relocation of • All cultural properties within the Col, whose structure is Corridor of Contractor cultural Religious getting affected fully, shall be relocated at suitable Impact (CoI) and PWD- Properties locations, as desired by the community; and for partially NH Division impacted structures enhancement measures shall be applied at the same sites before construction begins, depending on the availability of space, requirement of the communities and fund availability. • No cultural properties or religious structures shall be removed or relocated without the knowledge and written consent of the concerned parties or communities and local administration as the case may be. • Sites for the relocation of these religious structures shall be identified in accordance with the choice of the community. 1.2. Pre-construction activities by the Contractor / Engineer 1.2.1. Joint Field • The Environmental Officer of Supervision Consultant Along project Contractor Verification and the Contractor will carry out joint field verification to road under the ascertain the possibility to saving trees, environmental supervision and community resources wherever such of the representations or suggestions in writing have been Engineer received and forwarded by the project authority or by

Page | 8 - 26

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity the site engineer in accordance with the local situations. • In all such cases the interested organization / representatives, authority, expert (as required for a specific situation), executing and supervising agencies together with the local administrative set-up has to undertake a joint field verification for assessing the pros and cons of such demands/suggestions to assess the need for any changes in the design and implementation plan for the activities earlier approved by the project authority. • The complaints / suggestions together with the observations and expert opinion of the joint verification team containing the need for additional protection measures or changes in design / scale / nature of protection measures including the efficacy of enhancement measures suggested in the EMP shall be summarized in a written document containing all the details with date, time, place and signature of the individuals involved and this shall be sent to the Environmental Officer. • The Authority shall maintain proper documentation and justifications / reasons in all such cases where deviation from the original EMP is proposed. Assessment of • The Authority shall maintain proper documentation and Along project Contractor Impacts due to justifications / reasons in such cases where deviation road under the Changes / from the original EMP Is proposed. supervision Revisions in the • The Engineer In-charge shall assess the impacts and of the Project Work revise/modify the EMP in consultation with the NH- Engineer

Page | 8 - 27

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity PWD in accordance to the recommendation made by the field survey party in the event of changes / revisions (inducing addition or deletion) in the project's scope of work 1.2.2. Procurement of Machinery 1.2.2.1 Crushers, Hot- Emission • Specifications of crushers, hot mix plants and batching All construction Contractor Mix Plants & control plants shall comply with the requirements of the machineries under the Batching Plants legislations of relevant current emission control legislations. (Crushers, Hot- supervision CPCB / GPCB • Hot mix and batching plants shall be located 1000m mix Plants & of the for air, noise away from settlements, forests, wildlife movement Batching Engineer etc. areas and commercial establishments, preferably in the Plants) should Clause 111.5 of downwind direction. No plants can be setup within be MoRT&H 1000m from the residential/ settlement locations. kept/stationed specification for • Arrangements to minimize dust pollution through at least 1000m Pollution from provision of windscreens, mist spray units, and dust away from plants and encapsulation shall have to be provided at all such settlements/ha Batching Plant sites. Specifications or crushers, hot mix plants and bitations: batching plants shall comply with the requirements of the relevant current emission control legislations and Consent I NOC for all such plants. • The Contractor shall follow all stipulated conditions for pollution control as suggested by the RPCB in the consent / NoC for establishing and operating the Hot- mix and Batching Plant. • No such installation by the Contractor shall be allowed till all the required legal clearances are obtained from the competent authority and the same is submitted to the Engineer

Page | 8 - 28

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 1.2.2.2. Other Discharge • The discharge standards promulgated under the Along project Contractor Constructi standards and Environment Protection Act. 1986 shall be strictly road under the on Vehicles, Noise limits as adhered to. All vehicles. Equipment and machinery to supervision Equipment and per be procured for construction shall conform to the of the Machinery Environment relevant Bureau of Indian standard Engineer Protection Act, • Noise limit for construction equipment's to be procured 1986 Emission such as compactors. Rollers, front loaders, concrete standards as mixers, cranes (moveable). Vibritoll and saws shall not per Bureau of exceed 75 dB (A), when measured at one meter Indian Standard distance from the edge of the equipment in free field, (BIS) preferably as specified in the Environment (Protection) Rules l986. Bharat IV Efficient and environment friendly equipment emission norms conforming to the latest nuke and effluent emission Air Pollution control measures available in the market shall be used Control Act, in the project. 1981; Noise • The Contractor shall maintain a record of PUC for all Rules; Motor vehicles and machinery used during the contract Vehicle Act, period, which shall be procured to the PIU NH-PWD 1988; and the Super vision Consultant for verification whenever required. 1.2.3. Identification & Selection of Material Sources 1.2.3.1. Borrow Areas Clause 305.2.2 • Arrangement for locating the source of supply of Ecological of MoRT&H material for embankment and sub-grade as well as Sensitive area Specification for compliance to environmental requirements as borrow material applicable shall be the sole responsibility of the & Clause contractor.

111.2 of • The environmental personnel shall be required to MoRT&H Inspect every borrow area location prior to approval Specification for

Page | 8 - 29

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity borrow pits for • No borrow areas shall be opened within 1000m of embankment wildlife movement zones and forest areas. The borrow construction areas shall be at least 300m from schools and village access roads • The Contractor shall not borrow earth from the selected borrow area until a formal agreement Is signed between land owner and Contractor and a copy of this agreement is submitted to the Engineer • Such measures shall include, but not limited to. Frequent sprinkling of water, repairing of the mad. Road safety provisions (warning and informatory sign etc.), and ensure cover overall of loaded vehicles by waterproof tarpaulin; consultation with public and special precautions are required when measures are implemented near schools. health centers and settlement areas • All borrow areas whether in private. Community or private land shall be restored either to the original condition or as per the approved rehabilitation plan • Fly ash shall be utilized to the extent possible for reduction in requirement of borrow material 1.2.3.2. Quarries Clause 111.3 of • The Contractor shall identify materials from existing Along project Contractor MoRT&H licensed quarries with the suitable materials for road under the Specification for construction. Apart from approval of the quality of the supervision Quarry quarry materials, the Engineer's representative shall of Operation verify the legal status of the quarry operation, as to the Engineer whether approval from Government is obtained. • No quarry and / or crusher units shall be selected or used, which is within 1000m from the forest boundary,

Page | 8 - 30

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity wildlife movement path, breeding and nesting habitats and national parks / sanctuaries. No plants can be set- up within 1000m ·from the residential settlement locations. • Contractor shall work out haul road network to be used for transport of quarry materials and report to Engineer who shall inspect and approve the same. 1.2.3.3. Arrangement for • The Contractor will provide a list of locations and type All rivers / Contractor Construction of sources from where water for construction will be surface water under the Water used to the SC and the authority. To avoid bodies that can supervision disruption/disturbance to other water users, the be utilized of the Contractor will extract water from fixed locations and within the Engineer consult the Environmental Officer before finalizing the project area locations. • All efforts shall be made to ensure avoidance of competitive use of a single water source, which may be depleted on account of the stress caused by drawing of water for road construction activity by the Contractor. • The Contractor should use surface water depending on the availability and quality by developing its own water storage units in a river bed during sand quarrying or by developing pond during borrowing earth from where water can be lifted using diesel or electric pump sets. • Use of ground water facility shall be subject to the local legislation; ground water availability in the area and the granting of necessary permission by the Competent Authority as declared by the State Govt. • Use of any other water source such as irrigation canals, ponds, water harvesting structures and river/stream,

Page | 8 - 31

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity which is likely to strain and deplete availability for surrounding and downstream inhabitants will not be allowed. • Contractor can use ponds, which are not in use by the community/wildlife or have been identified for filling-in for the proposed works, but in such a case, he will obtain a written consent from the owner and submit this to the SC. 1.2.3.4. Sand (all river and Clause 111.3 of • This procurement shall be made only after declaration Along project Contractor stream beds used MoRT&H of sand quarry sites by the local Circle Officer the road under the directly or Specification for concurrence of the concerned District Collector with supervision indirectly for the Quarry due regard Rajasthan state prevalent mining Rules of the project) Operation and regulation. Engineer • In case of selection of new sites for sand quarrying, the Contractor shall obtain prior approval and concurrence from Competent District Authority and the Environment Officer of the SC keeping in view the objections and convenience of the local population, who may restrain such activities for their own security and safety. • Where the supplier of sand is another party, the authentic copy of lease agreement that has been executed between the local circle officer and the supplier has to be submitted to Executive Engineer of the project before any procurement is made from such a site. To avoid accidents and caving in of sand banks at quarry sites, sand shall be removed layer by layer. • Digging deeper than the permissible limit has to be completely avoided by the Contractor. Such quarry should be barricaded 10m away from the periphery on

Page | 8 - 32

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity all sides except the entry point, so as to prevent accidental fall of domestic cattle, wildlife and human beings. • The flood embankment on either side of the river shall not be used for movement of tippers and loaders, which are likely to damage and destroy such structures. Instead, alternative haul roads will be constructed, avoiding the embankment for safety and security of the vehicles, road users and the habitations along the banks of the river. • In case of selection of new sites for sand quarrying, the Contractor shall obtain prior approval and concurrence from Competent District Authority. • To avoid accidents and caving in of sand banks at quarry sites, sand shall be removed layer by layer. Digging deeper than the permissible limit (0.9 meter) shall not be allowed. Such quarry shall be barricaded 10m away from the periphery on all sides except the entry point, so as to prevent accidental fall of Domestic cattle, wildlife and human beings. 1.2.4. Setting up construction sites 1.2.4.1 Labor Camp Clause 111.8.4 • The Contractor preferably will use unskilled labor drawn Along project Contractor Selection of MoRTH from local areas to provide maximum benefit to the road under the requirement and Specification for local community especially to the SC and ST population supervision Construction Construction along the corridor. of the Locations – Camps • Construction camps will not be proposed within 1000 m Engineer Design & Layout from the nearest settlement to avoid conflicts and stress on the local infrastructure facilities resources.

Page | 8 - 33

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • Stock piling of construction materials and go downs shall be at least 1000m from the nearest water source. These are to be located on higher ground to avoid impact during floods due to pollution or due to any accidental spillage of stored / stockpiled materials. • All location and lay-out plans of such sites will be submitted by the Contractor prior to their establishment and will be approved by the Environmental Officer. Other conditions laid out in the Framework for Construction Camps (part of this EMP) shall apply. • The waste disposal and sewage treatment shall be such that the environment is not polluted with the waste material and foul odour including the effluents and wastewater generated at the campsite. The designing and setting up of these structures should be as per the approved site plan. • This should include soak pits, septic tanks and arrangements for carriage of extra sewage by sealed mechanized containers for disposal at designated sites, as available in the locality, with due written permission from the Competent Local Authority. • In case of non-receipt of any such permission from the competent authority as stated above, the provision of wider safety tanks and storage facility for garbage has to be made at the camp site as additional measures. Arrangements for Clause 108.3 of • The Contractor will carry out negotiations with the land Areas Contractor 1.2.4.2. Land Temporary MoRT&H owners for obtaining their consent for temporary use of temporarily under the Requirement Specification their lands for haulage roads, approach roads, acquired for supervision temporary diversions; stockpiling of bulk construction

Page | 8 - 34

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity construction materials; establishment of camps, hot- sites / hot mix of the mix plants, batching plants and crusher units with plants / borrow Engineer proper agreement, detailing the terms and conditions areas / agreed between both the parties. This needs to include diversions conditions governing activities to be ensured during the /detours construction stage and at the time of decommissioning of the project. • The agreement must contain the details of the land involved with relevant records of ownership. A copy of such agreement/s (use and clean-up operations) shall have to be submitted to the Supervision Consultant. 1.2.4.3. Stock-yards Clause 105.7 of • The Contractor shall identify the location for stock yards Surface water MoRTH for construction materials at least 1000m away from sources along Contractor Specification for watercourses. the road are under the Delivery, • Separate enclosures shall be planned for storing given in the supervision Storage and construction materials containing fine particles such Some surface of the Handling of that sediment-laden water does not drain into nearby water pond Engineer Materials storm water drains Remains dry during summer. 1.2.4.4. Fuel storage and Clause 2.1.1.6 • The Contractor shall ensure that all construction vehicle Surface water Contractor re-fueling areas of EMP parking locations, fuel / lubricants storage sites, sources along under the (Stripping of vehicle, machinery and equipment maintenance and the road supervision Soil) Clause refueling sites are located at least 1000 m from rivers Some surface of the 2.1.4.1.2 of and irrigation Canal / ponds. water pond Engineer EMP (dispose Remains dry the spent oil during summer. and grease) 1.2.5. Labour Camp Management

Page | 8 - 35

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 1.2.5.1 Location of Factories Act, • Contractor will follow all relevant provisions of the Along the Contractor Construction 1948 and Factories Act, 1948 and the Building and the other project road at under the labour camps: Building & other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and the location of supervision Accommodation Construction Conditions of Service) Act, 1996 for construction and construction of the Workers maintenance of labour camp. labor camps Engineer (Regulation of • The location, layout and basic provision of facilities at Employment each labour camp site will be submitted to SC. The and Conditions construction or hiring of such facilities shall commence of Service) Act, only after the written approval from the SC. 1996 • The Contractor will maintain necessary living (construction & accommodation and ancillary facilities (including maintenance of provision of clean fuel to prevent damage to forests and labor camp) to prevent fuel wood cutting and burning by labour) in functional and hygienic manner. Any non-compliance or damage shall be made good by the contractor at his own cost. 1.2.5.2 Potable Water The Contract • The contractor will also provide availability of potable Construction Contractor Labour water within the precincts of every workplace in a cool labor camps under the (Regulation and and shaded area, which is easily accessible as per supervision Abolition) Act, standards set by the Building and other Construction of the 1970 and Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Engineer Factories Act, Service) Act, 1996. 1948 • The contractor will ensure the fulfillment of the following Building and conditions at all work places for the benefit of workers: Other o Supply of sufficient quantity of potable water (as Construction per IS) in every workplace/labor camp site at Workers suitable and easily accessible places shall be made. Such facilities shall be regularly maintained (Regulation of from health and hygiene point of view. Employment

Page | 8 - 36

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity and Conditions o All potable water storage facilities will be on a of Service) safely raised platform that is at least 1m above the Act, 1996 surrounding ground level. o In the camp sites, water purifier units shall be installed for providing potable water. o As far as possible shallow well will not be used as potable source of water. However, if water is drawn from any existing well, irrespective of its location from any polluting sources, regular disinfection of the water source (which may include application of lime, bleaching powder and potassium permanganate solution) has to be ensured at weekly/fort nightly interval. o All open wells will be entirely covered and will be provided with a trap door to prevent accidental fall and contamination from dust, litter etc. A reliable pump will be fitted to each covered well. o A drain shall be constructed around the well to prevent flow of contaminated water into the well from road, camp or other sources. o Water quality testing of all potable water sources will be done every month as per parameters prescribed in IS 10500:1991. o Environmental Officer of SC will be required to inspect the labour camp once in a week to ensure compliance to these health and hygienic standards prescribed in the EMP. The camp-in-charge will be responsible for day to-day monitoring.

Page | 8 - 37

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 1.2.5.3 Sanitation Factories Act, • The sewage system for the camp are designed, built Construction Contractor facilities 1948 for and operated in such a fashion that no health hazards labor camps under the sanitation occurs and no pollution to the air, ground water or supervision Clause 111.9 of adjacent water courses takes place. of the MoRTH • Separate toilets and bathrooms for women workers Engineer Specification for wherever required, screened from those of men, are Occupational provided with markings in vernacular language. Health and • All such facilities must have adequate water supply with Safety of the proper drainage and disposal facility. Workforce • All toilets in workplaces are with dry earth systems which are to be maintained, cleaned and disinfected daily using proper disinfectants. The location of such provisions should not affect the air, surface water and ground water of the locality or the agricultural field’s located near-by. • Portable toilets may be brought to use and the night soil from such units has to be disposed through designated septic tanks so as to prevent pollution of the surrounding areas. • In the main camp, no night soil or sewerage shall be disposed of at any place other than the septic tanks constructed at the site. • All these facilities shall be inspected on a weekly basis to check the hygiene standards. 1.2.5.4 Waste Disposal Clause • The Contractor will provide garbage bins in the camps Construction 301.2.10 of and ensure that these are regularly emptied and labor camps Contractor MoRTH disposed off in a hygienic manner as per the Waste under the Specification for Comprehensive Solid Waste Management Plan collecting bins / supervision Use and approved by the Environmental Officer of SC. dust bins shall

Page | 8 - 38

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity Disposal of • No incineration or burning of wastes shall be carried out be provided on of the Excavated by the Contractor. The disposal of kitchen waste and both side at Engineer Materials. other biodegradable matter shall be carried out in pits start and end of Clause 201.4 covered with a layer of earth within the camp site. The the Following and 202.5 contractor may use the compost from such wastes as locations or as of manure in the plantation sites. directed by the MoRTH for • Discarded plastic bags, paper and paper products, Engineer. Disposal of bottles, packaging material, gunny bags, hessian, Material. metal containers, strips and scraps of metal, PVC Municipal Solid pipes, rubber and poly urethane foam, auto mobile Waste spares, tubes, tires, belts, filters, waste oil, drums and Management other such materials shall be either reused or will be Rules – 2016 sold / given out for recycling. for effective • Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Contractor waste disposal Appointing a facilitating agency 1.2.5.5 HIV / AIDS Clause 111.9 of • The Contractor shall implement the following measures Construction Contractor Prevention MoRTH towards ensuring HIV/AIDS prevention during the site, workshop under the Measures Specification for entire Construction period. area, plant area supervision Occupational • Conduct awareness campaign including dissemination & labour camps of the Health and of IEC materials (posters, pamphlets, stagers, ribbon Engineer Safety of the etc.) on HIV/AIDS for all construction Workforce personnel(including laborers, supervisors, engineers and consultants) on HIV / AIDS / STDs within three months of mobilization and once a Quarter subsequently during the construction period and six monthly during the operation; • Carry out screening of construction personnel for HIV/AIDS, within a quarter of mobilization

Page | 8 - 39

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • Conduct quarterly health check-up of all construction personnel including testing for STDs; • Minimum five HIV/AIDS awareness posters shall be displayed at each locations i.e. labour camp, construction site, vehicle repairing workshops, HMP, Batching plant and crusher plant etc. • Erect and maintain hoardings/ information signage’s on HIV/AIDS prevention at the construction sites, labour camps and truck parking locations; • Install two numbers of condom vending machines at the Construction camp and plant site/labour camps, including fortnightly replenishment of supplies. 2. CONSTRUCTION STAGE 2.1. Construction Stage Activities by Contractor 2.1.1. Site Clearance 2.1.1.1. Clearing and Clause 201 of • Site clearance including clearance of marked trees for Along project Grubbing MoRT&H felling and removal has to be carried out much before road at pecification the actual road construction takes place. construction • Structures and utilities (cabins, commercial properties, sites hoardings, overhead power transmission lines, cable Connections, telephone lines, bore wells, stand posts, wells, statues, temples etc.) should have been compensated/relocated as per RAP and EMP provisions before tree felling work and clearing or grubbing activities are undertaken since such activities may damage structures (private and govt.) and essential facilities/utilities of public use.

Page | 8 - 40

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • All works shall be carried out in a manner such that the damage or disruption to flora is minimum. Only ground cover/shrubs that impinge directly on the permanent works or necessary temporary works will be removed with prior approval from Environmental Officer of SC. • Any tree up to 30 cm girth at breast height shall be uprooted mechanically with ball of earth intact for relocation and transplantation at various degraded sites, embankment of water body, ponds, temples, market places, schools and along road corridors for preventing complete loss of such vegetative cover. • Top soil (upto 10 cm) shall be preserved and stockpile 2.1.1.2. Dismantling of Clause 202 of • All necessary measures shall be taken while working At locations Contractor Bridgework / MoRT&H closely to cross drain. Channels to prevent earthwork, where bridge under the Culverts Specification stonework. materials and appendage as well as the works and supervision method of operation from impeding cross-drainage at culverts are of the Construction rivers, streams, water canals and existing irrigation and proposed. Engineer and Demolition drainage systems. There are Waste • All reusable materials can be stacked and treated existing Management separately. All possible efforts to reuse, recycle and culverts in Rules 2016 reduce waste quantity Shall be undertaken. addition more culverts are added to ease the flooding/ drainage issues. 2.1.1.3. Generation & Clause 202.5 of • Debris generated due to the dismantling of the existing Throughout Contractor disposal of Debris MoRT&H. road will be suitably reused in the proposed Project road under the construction as follows: supervision

Page | 8 - 41

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity Specification for o Eighty percent of the sub-grade excavated from of the disposal of the existing road surface, excluding the scarified Engineer materials layer of bitumen, shall be reused in the civil works Construction after improving the soil below the sub-grade and through addition of sand and suitable cementing Demolition material for qualitative up-gradation. The balance Waste shall be used to raise the diversions and haulage Management roads to desired level, raise the embankments of Rules 2016 drainage systems those are to reconstructed on account of expansion of the road, repair of pot holes, filling up of ditches and depressions along the corridor to prevent water logging, raising the earthen mounds at each 5th km nearer to habitations to serve as flood shelters as well as recreations areas through plantations of medicinal and religious trees and development of utility centers on abandoned roads to make it more pliable and wide. o The dismantled scraps of bitumen will be utilized for the paving of cross roads, access roads and paving works in construction sites and campus, temporary traffic diversions, haulage routes, parking areas along the corridor or in any other manner approved by the Environmental Officer of SC. o At locations identified for disposal of residual bituminous wastes, the disposal will be carried out over a 60 mm thick layer of rammed clay so as to eliminate the possibility of leaching of wastes into the ground water.

Page | 8 - 42

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity o The Contractor will suitably dispose of unutilized non-toxic debris either through filling up of borrows areas located in wasteland or at pre- designated disposal sites, subject to the approval of the Environmental Officer of SC. o Debris generated from pile driving or other construction activities along the rivers and streams drainage channels shall be carefully disposed in such a manner that it does not flow into the surface water bodies or form puddles in the area. o The pre-designated disposal locations will be a part of Comprehensive Solid Waste Management Plan to be prepared by Contractor in consultation and with approval of Environmental Officer and approval local competent authority. o All arrangements for transportation during construction including provision, maintenance, dismantling and clearing debris, will be planned and implemented by the Contractor as approved and directed by the Environmental Officer of SC and PIU NH-PWD o All disposal sites shall be identified by the Contractor and a rehabilitation plan (including details about pollution prevention and safety measures) for each such site shall be submitted in the approved format. These shall be verified and approved by the Environment Officer of SC in consultation with the Local Competent Authority after joint site visits, prior to disposal of any debris or waste materials.

Page | 8 - 43

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity o The Contractor shall then enter into an agreement with the concerned land owner/s and a copy of this document shall be submitted to PIU NH-PWD 2.1.1.4. Non-bituminous Clause 202 of • The Contractor shall finalize the location of disposal site Disposal site Contractor construction MoRT&H based on the following. locations under the wastes disposal Specification for o Not located within designated forest area supervision Dismantling o Does not impact natural drainage courses of the Clverts, Bridges o No endangered/rare flora is impacted by such Engineer and Other dumping. Structures / o Settlements are located at least 1000m away from Pavements the site. The Engineer shall approve disposal sites after conformation of above criteria. 2.1.1.5. Bituminous Annex “A” for The disposal of residual bituminous wastes shall be done Disposal site Contractor wastes disposal Protection of by the Contractor at secure land fill sites, with the requisite locations under the the approvals from the concerned government agencies. supervision Environment of of the Clause 501 of Engineer MoRT&H Specification 2.1.1.6. Stripping, Clause 301.3.2 • The top soil from all sites including road side widening At all Contractor stacking and of MoRT&H. and working area, cutting areas, quarry sites, borrows construction under the preservation of Specification for areas, construction camps, haul roads in agricultural sites supervision top soil stripping and fields (if any) and areas to be permanently covered of the storing topsoil. shall be stripped to a specified depth of 150mm and Engineer Clause 305.3.3 stored in stockpiles for reuse. of MoRT&H. • A portion of the temporarily acquired area and/or Specification for RoW edges will be earmarked for storing top soil. The construction locations for stacking will be pre-identified in

Page | 8 - 44

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity and for consultation and with approval of Environmental Officer embankments of SC. The following precautionary measures will be Clause 301.7 of taken by the Contractor to preserve the stockpiles till MoRT&H. they are re-used: Specification for • Stockpile will be such that the slope does not exceed preservation of 1:2 (vertical to horizontal), and height is restricted to 2 Top Soil. m. • To retain soil and to allow percolation of water, the edges of the pile will be protected by silt fencing. • Multiple handling kept to a minimum to ensure that no compaction occurs. • Such stockpiles shall be covered with empty gunny bags or will be planted with grasses to prevent loss during rains. • Such stockpiled topsoil will be utilized for – o Covering reclamation sites or other disturbed areas including borrow areas (not those in barren areas) o Top dressing of road embankment and fill slopes o Filling up of tree pits and o In the agricultural fields of farmers, acquired temporarily that need to be restored. • Residual topsoil, if there is any, will be utilized for the plantation works along the road corridor. • The utilization as far as possible shall be in the same area/close to the same area from where the top soil was removed.

Page | 8 - 45

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • The stripping, preservation and reuse shall be carefully inspected, closely supervised and properly recorded by the SC. 2.1.1.7. Accessibility • The Contractor will provide safe and convenient Throughout Contractor passage for vehicles, pedestrians and livestock to and Project road under the from roadsides and property accesses connecting the supervision project road by providing temporary connecting road, of the as necessary. Engineer • Construction activities that shall affect the use of side roads and existing accesses to individual properties, whether public or private, shall not be undertaken without providing adequate provision approved by the SC. • The Contractor will take care that the cross roads are constructed in such a sequence that construction work over the adjacent cross roads are taken up in a manner that traffic movement in any given area does not get affected. 2.1.1.8. Planning for Clause 112 of • Detailed traffic control plans will be prepared and All along the Contractor Traffic Diversions MoRT&H submitted to the Resident Engineer of SC for approval, project road, all under the and Detours Specification minimum seven days prior to commencement of works access roads. supervision IRC SP:55 on any section of road. of the • The traffic control plans shall contain details of Engineer temporary diversions, traffic safety arrangements including night time safety measures, details of traffic arrangement after cessation of work each day, safety measures undertaken for transport of hazardous materials and arrangement of flagmen etc. to regulate traffic congestion.

Page | 8 - 46

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • The Contractor will provide specific measures for safety of pedestrians and workers as a part of traffic control plans. • Temporary diversions will be constructed with the approval of the Resident Engineer and Environmental Officer of Supervision Consultant. The temporary traffic detours will be kept free of dust by sprinkling of water three times a day or as required under specific conditions and directed by the SC (depending on weather conditions, construction in the settlement areas and volume of traffic). The Contractor will ensure that the diversion/detour is always maintained in running condition, particularly during the monsoon to avoid disruption to traffic flow. • The Contractor will also inform local community of changes in traffic routes and pedestrian access arrangements with assistance from SC and PIU NH- PWD 2.1.2. Construction Materials 2.1.2.1. Earth from Borrow MoRTH: 305.2; • No borrow area will be opened without permission of All along the Contractor Areas for Framework for the Environmental Officer of Supervision Consultant. project road, all under the Construction Borrow Area The location, shape and size of the designated borrow access roads, supervision Management areas will be as approved by the Environmental temporarily of the officer of Supervision Consultant and in accordance to acquired sites Engineer the IRC recommended practice for borrow pits for road & all borrow embankments (IRC 10:1961). areas • The borrowing operations will be carried out as specified in the guidelines for setting and operation of borrow areas. The unpaved surfaces used for the

Page | 8 - 47

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity haulage of borrow materials, if passing through the settlement areas or habitations; will be maintained dust free by the Contractor. • Sprinkling of water will be carried out thrice a day to control dust along such roads during their period of use. During dry seasons (winter and summer) frequency of water sprinkling will have to be increased according to the site and climatic conditions in the settlement areas and Environmental Officer of SC will decide the numbers of sprinkling depending on the local requirements. Contractor will rehabilitate the borrow areas as soon as borrowing is over from a particular borrow area in accordance with the Framework for Borrow Area Management or as suggested by Environmental Expert of Supervision Consultant. 2.1.2.2. Transporting Clause 111.9 of • Contractor shall maintain properly (as directed by SC) All along the Contractor Construction MoRT&H all roads (existing or constructed for the project), which Project road under the Materials Specification are used for transporting construction materials, and all haul supervision equipment and machineries. roads of the • All vehicles delivering goods to the site shall be covered Engineer to avoid spillage of materials and air pollution. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that highways and other roads used for transportation of construction materials are clear from any dust, sand, soil, aggregates etc., fallen from the transporting vehicles used for the project. Contractor will arrange for regular water sprinkling for dust suppression of all such roads and surfaces, as directed by Environmental Officer of SC.

Page | 8 - 48

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • The unloading of all materials at construction sites will be limited to day time only to avoid accidents. Screens of hessian cloth, agro-net and such other barricading material like geo-synthetic fabrics are to be erected along all dumping and stockpiling sites, so that generation of the dust in the vicinity of such locations can be minimized to a great extent. Quarries MoRTH:111.3 • The Contractor shall obtain materials for quarries only after the approval of Department of Mines, Govt. of Rajasthan and the District Administration. A copy of this consent must be submitted to PIU NH-PWD through Environment Expert of SC. • The Contractor will develop a Comprehensive Quarry Redevelopment Plan, as per the Mining Rules of the State and submit a copy to PIU NH-PWD and SC prior to opening of the quarry site. • The quarry operations will be undertaken within the rules and regulations in vogue. 2.1.3. Construction work 2.1.3.1. Disruption to Annex “A” of • While working across or close to any perennial water Contractor other users of Clause bodies, Contractor will not obstruct/ prevent the flow of under the Water 501 of MoRTH water. Construction over and close to the non-perennial supervision Specification for streams shall be undertaken in dry season and if such of the PIU of Protection of activity is likely to disrupt, constrain or impact the PWD- NH the community use of the water body, adequate prior Division Environment information (at least two weeks in advance) will be and Water provided to such community. Such water body may be Quality ponds, water harvesting structures (WHS), feeder channels to pond, irrigation sources etc.

Page | 8 - 49

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity MoRTH:304.3 • If the supply of water or access to a source is being completely cut off, then the Contractor shall make necessary arrangements to provide water in the interim period. Water quality test shall be done prior to providing / supplying the water. • Wherever excavation for diverting water flow will be required as per the engineering designs, the Contractor will ensure that such diversion channels have no stepper slopes than 1:2 (V to H). Proper slope protection measures have to be taken as approved by the Environmental Officer of SC and PIU NH-PWD • The Contractor will take prior approval of the River Authority or Irrigation Department and SC for any such activity. The PIU NH-PWD will ensure that Contractor has served the notice to the downstream users of water well in advance where such diversion of the flow is likely to affect the downstream population subject to the condition that under no circumstances the downstream flow shall be stopped putting the wildlife, the aquatic fauna and the shore line settlement under distress. • Minimum eco-flow shall be maintained even during the construction stage by ensuring downstream connection to the main channel. 2.1.3.2. Drainage and Clause 202 and • Contractor will ensure that no construction materials All Surface Contractor Flood Control 305 of MoRT&H like earth, stone, ash or appendage disposed off so as water sources/ under the Specification not to block the flow of water of any water course drains/ Nalahs/ supervision and cross drainage channels. Where necessary Natural and of the adequate mechanical devices to bail out accumulated Engineer

Page | 8 - 50

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity water from construction sites, camp sites, storage yard, artificial ponds excavation areas are to be pre-settled and arranged along the road. well in advance of the rainy season besides providing Silt fencing temporary cross drainage systems. should be given • The contractor will take all adequate precautions to near ensure that construction materials and excavated materials are enclosed in such a manner that erosion or run-off of sediments is controlled. the monsoon at all the required locations, as directed by Environmental Officer of SC and PIU NH-PWD The contractor will also ensure that no material blocks the natural flow of water in any water course or cross drainage channel. • Prior to monsoon, the contractor will provide either permanent or temporary drains to prevent water accumulation in surrounding residential, commercial and agricultural areas. Additionally, all structure construction sites shall be cleared/cleaned-up. • A pre-monsoon joint inspection (in May first week) by SC and/or PIU NH-PWD will be conducted to identify all such areas which need to be cleared and restored before the onset of rains. 2.1.3.3. Siltation of Water Clause 306 of • Contractor shall construct silt fencing at the base of the All Surface Contractor Bodies and MoRT&H for embankment construction near water bodies (including water sources/ under Degradation of soil erosion and wells) and around the stockpiles at the construction drains/ Nalas/ the Water qualitity sedimentation sites. Natural and supervision control • Sift fencing shall be provided prior to the Artificial ponds of Engineer commencement d earthwork and shall continue till the along the road. stabilization of the embankment slopes are complete Silt fencing on the particular sub-section of the road. should be given

Page | 8 - 51

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • The contractor shall also put up sedimentation cum near surface grease traps at the outer mouth of the drains located in water locations truck lay byes and bus bay which are ultimately entering Into any surface water bodies / water channels with a fall exceeding 1.5 m 2.1.3.4. Slope Protection Clause 306 of • The contractor will construct slope protection works as High raise Contractor and Control of MoRT&H for per design, or as directed by the Environmental Officer embankment under the Soil Erosion soil erosion and of SC to control soil erosion and sedimentation through and surface supervision sedimentation use of dykes, sedimentation chambers, basins, fiber water bodies of the control Clause mats, mulches, grasses, slope drains and other devices locations Engineer 307 of MoRT&H as required under specific local conditions. for Turfing • All temporary sedimentation, pollution control works Stone Pitching works Clause and maintenance thereof will be deemed as incidental method at all 308 of MoRT&H to the earth work or other items of work and as such no canal crossing for other separate payment will be made for them. locations. measures of • Contractor will ensure the following: Slope o After construction of road embankment, the side Protection slopes of all cut and fill areas will be graded and covered with stone pitching, grass and shrub as per design specifications. o Turfing works will be taken up as soon as possible provided the season is favorable for the establishment of grass sods. o Other measures of slope stabilization will include mulching netting and seeding of batters and drains immediately on completion of earthworks with sowing of seeds of grass, shrub and bushes 30cm interval from line to line across the slope and

Page | 8 - 52

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity sprinkling of water on such slopes after completion of the earth work. o In borrow pits, the depth shall be regulated so that the sides of the excavation should not be steeper than 1 vertical to 2 horizontal, from the edge of the final section of the bank. o Along sections abutting water bodies, stone pitching as per design specification will be provided to protect slopes. All such stone pitching should have a filter layer to prevent scouring and settlement of the pitched surface when the water label recedes. o Stabilization of the embankment with appropriate technique/s shall commence soon after the embankment formation. o Any existing drainage channel or body shall not be obstructed during filling operations. o The embankment slope shall be maintained as per IRC specification 2.1.4 Pollution Control 2.1.4.1. Water Pollution CPCB • The Contractor will take all precautionary measures All Surface Contractor 1 from Construction Schedule VI - to prevent the wastewater generated during water sources/ under the Wastes General construction from entering into streams, water bodies drains/ Nalahs/ supervision Standards for or the irrigation system by providing safe wastewater Natural and of the Discharge of soak pits away from any aquifers or water body. artificial ponds Engineer Environmental • The Contractor will avoid continuation of construction along the road. Pollutants activity close to the streams or water bodies during Silt fencing (Liquid Waste monsoon. Stream courses and drains will be kept free should be given Disposal) from dumping of solid wastes, excavated earth, sludge near the ponds

Page | 8 - 53

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity The and discharge of waste water from construction camps located within Environment and sites. Liquid wastes arising from construction sites 150m of the (Protection) are to be impounded into collection pits. Construction project road Rules, 1986 materials containing fine particles like lime stone, lime, and Water Act, cement, fine aggregates etc. shall be stored in 1974 enclosures away from water bodies on high land to MoRTH: 111.4; ensure that any run off from such locations does not drain into nearby water courses. • No garbage, sludge, lubricants, fuel, sewerage or contaminated waste water is to be released in the settlement areas, water bodies, forests and wildlife habitats or grazing areas. All waste arising from the project is to be disposed off in the manner that is acceptable to the State Pollution Control Board or as directed by Environmental Expert of Supervision Consultant. • The Environmental Expert of SC will specify in the progress reports on whether the all liquid wastes disposed off from the various sites meets the discharge standards as specified by the CPCB Govt. of India. If case of non- compliance actions taken by SC shall also be specified. 2.1.4.2. Air Pollution 2.1.4.2. Dust Pollution Annex A to • The contractor will take every precaution to reduce the Construction Contractor 1. Clause 501 level of dust (PM 2.5 and PM 10) from crushers, area / site, under the (Protection of material storage yards, haul roads and construction Construction supervision Environment) - sites (including earthwork, dismantling, scarification camps, of the Section 3 Air and material mixing sites) by sprinkling of water, mist Materials Engineer Quality Clause spray, encapsulation of dust source and erection of Loading /

Page | 8 - 54

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 111.5. of screen /barriers. Hot mix plant and batch mix plant will unloading MoRT&H. (Hot be fitted with dust extraction units and mist spray to facilities Mix Plant and keep down the dust emission levels. Batch Mix • Dust screening vegetation will be planted around the Plant) crusher sites besides provision of dust screens. • The contractor will provide necessary certificates to confirm that all crushers used in the project conform to relevant dust emission control legislation. Air pollution monitoring will be conducted as per the Pollution Monitoring Plan and results shall be used to strengthen/rectify problematic areas. If other existing crushers are used, such units need to have valid license from the SPCB. • Copies of the required certificates and consents of the operator owner shall be procured by the Contractor and submitted to PIU NH-PWD through Environment Officer of SC prior to the procurement of material from such units. The Resident Engineer will ensure that the necessary documents have been submitted by the contractor before material procurement permission is issued by the Materials Engineer of SC. 2.1.4.2. Emission from Schedule-I: • Contractor will ensure that all vehicles, equipment and Construction Contractor 2. Construction Standards for machinery used for construction are regularly camps, under the vehicles, Emission maintained and confirm to the emission standards Materials supervision Equipment and suggested by specified by the CPCB. Certification issued for such Loading / of the Machineries CPCB / GPCB contrivances obtained from designated/approved unloading Engineer authority shall be submitted along with the specified facilities reporting format. The contractor will maintain a separate file and submit PUC certificates for all

Page | 8 - 55

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity vehicles/equipment/machinery used for the project. Monitoring results will also be submitted to SC and • PIU NH-PWD as per the Pollution Monitoring Plan in the specified format. 2.1.4.3. Noise Pollution Noise Limits for The Contractor will ensure the following: Ecologically Contractor vehicles • All plants and equipment used in construction Sensitive under the (Environment (including those of sub-Contractors and/or suppliers areas: supervision Protection of the such as aggregate crushing plants) shall strictly Amendment Engineer conform to the MoEF&CC /CPCB noise standards and Rules, 2000) shall have latest noise suppression mountings 2.1.4.3. Noise Pollution: and Part „E‟, • All vehicles and equipment used in construction will be 1. Noise from Schedule– VI of fitted with exhaust silencers Vehicles, Plants Environment • Servicing of all construction vehicles and machinery will and Equipments (Protection) be done regularly and during Rules, 1986. • routine servicing operations, the effectiveness of Clause 5A The exhaust silencers will be checked and if found Noise Pollution defective, these shall be replaced. (Regulation and • Limits for construction equipment used in the project Control) Rules, such as compactors, rollers, front loaders, concrete 2000 (sound mixers, cranes (moveable), vibrators and saws shall emitting not exceed 75 dB (A) (measured at one meter from the construction edge of equipment in the free field), as specified in the equipments) Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986. • Maintenance of equipment, machinery and vehicles Clause 201.2 of (including proper lubrication, tuning, checks for muffler MoRT&H effectiveness) shall be regular and up to the satisfaction Specification for of the Environmental Officer of SC to keep noise levels Idling of under control

Page | 8 - 56

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity temporary • Construction activity at sites within 100m habitations trucks and hospitals shall not be carried out during night (10:00 pm to 06:00 am). • Construction activity at sites within 500m from wildlife movement zones, reserved and protected forest areas shall not be carried out between 06:00 pm to 06:00 am. • The Contractor will not take any construction activity around educational institutes within a distance of 100 m between the working hours of these sensitive receptors. • Monitoring shall be carried out at the construction sites as per the noise monitoring plan and results will be submitted to SC and PIU NH-PWD Environmental Officer of SC will be required to regularly inspect all above mentioned sites to ensure proper compliance of the said measures. 2.1.4.4. Safety 2.1.4.4. Safety Clause 111.11 The Contractor shall: All construction Contractor 1 Procedures of MoRTH • Contactor shall provide all necessary safety appliances sites under the Specification for such as safety Bogies, helmets, safety belts, ear plugs, supervision Occupational mask etc. to workers and staff. of the Health and • Protective footwear and protective Goggles to all Engineer Safety of the workers employed on mixing asphalt materials. Workforce Cement, lime, mortars, concrete etc. Welder protective Clause 112 of eye-shields to worker engaged in welding works MoRTH • The contractor shall not employ any person below the Specification for age of 14 years for any work and no woman shall be Arrangement of employed for the work of painting with products contain lead in any form.

Page | 8 - 57

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity Traffic during • The Contractor shall mark 'hard hat' and 'no smoking Construction and other high risk' areas and enforce non-compliance Building and of use of PPE with zero tolerance. These shall be Other reflected in the Construction Safety Plan to be prepared Construction by the Contractor during mobilization and shall be Workers approved by Engineer (Regulation of • Comply with all applicable safety regulations such as Employment IRC SP and Conditions • 55 2014 for Traffic Safety during the construction and of Services) operation Act, 1996 • Take care for the safety of all persons entitled to be on the Site, • Use reasonable efforts to keep the site and works clear of unnecessary obstruction so as to avoid danger to these persons, • Provide fencing, lighting, guarding and watching of the works until completion and taking over and provide any temporary works (including roadways, footways, guards and fences) which may be necessary, because of the execution of the works, for the use and protection of the public and of owners and occupiers of adjacent land. 2.1.4.4. Care and supply The Contractor shall prepare, submit and obtain approval Contractor 2 of documents of the Engineer for construction Safety Management Plan under the 14 days prior to commencement of construction works at supervision site. of the Engineer

Page | 8 - 58

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 2.1.4.4. Contractors • All design calculations and fabrication drawings for Contractor 3 general temporary works (such as form-work, staging, under the obligations centering, scaffolding, specialized construction, supervision handling and launching equipment and the like)material of the lists for structural fabrication as well as detailed Engineer drawings for templates, and anchorage and temporary support details for pre-stressing cables as well as bar bending and cutting schedules for reinforcement, etc. shall be prepared by the Contractor at his own cost and forwarded to the Engineer at least six weeks in advance of actual constructional requirements. • The Engineer will check the same for the Contractor's use with amendments. 2.1.4.4. Personal Safety Factory Act, Contractor shall provide (including enforcement with o All construction Contractor 4 Measures for 1948, Factories tolerance): sites under the Labour, Material (Amendment) • Protective footwear and protective goggles to all supervision handling , Act, 1987 workers employed on mixing asphalt materials, of the Painting etc. (Chapter-5 cement, mortars, concrete, welding sites, blasting, Engineer Safety) crusher and stockpiling locations etc. as per the Factory Building and Act, 1948. Other • Welder's protective eye-shields to workers engaged in Construction welding works. Workers • Earplugs to workers exposed to high noise levels (Regulation of (above 65db) at quarries, crushers, compaction sites, Employment concrete mixing, batch mixing, drilling and hot mixing and Conditions plants, fabricating and heavy machinery operations. of Services) • Hard hat or helmets to all workers, supervising staff and Act, 1996 inspecting officials entering a construction site, plant area, quarry, loading and unloading site

Page | 8 - 59

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • Protective goggles and clothing to workers engaged in stone breaking activities. • Earplugs to workers exposed to noise in crushing, compaction, blasting, dismantling or concretemixing operations. • Adequate safety measures for workers during handling of materials at site. • Nettings and platforms below and on the sides of overhead construction and excavation work to prevent mishaps due to accidental fall of workmen and debris. • The Contractor will comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding, ladders, working platforms, gangway, stairwells, excavations, trenches and safe means of entry and egress. • The Contractor will make sure that during the construction work all relevant provisions of the Factories Act, 1948 and the Building and Other Construction Workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Services) Act, 1996 are adhered to. • The Contractor will comply with all the precautions as required for ensuring the safety of the workmen as per the International Labor Organization (ILO) Convention No. 62 as far as those are applicable to this contract. • The Contractor will not employ any person below the age of 18 years for any work and no woman of productive age will be engaged in the work of painting containing lead in any form. The Contractor will also ensure that no paint containing lead or lead products is used except in the form of paste or readymade paint.

Page | 8 - 60

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • Contractor will provide facemasks to the workers engaged in spray painting or manual painting when lead based compound is one of the constituents of such surface to be scrubbed, cleaned and painted. These masks shall also be provided to workers to minimize risks from inhaling toxic fumes and dust. • ‘No smoking’ and other ‘high risk’ areas are to be provided with warning signage besides strict enforcement of PPE with zero tolerance limits. These arrangements need to be reflected in the Construction Safety Plan to be prepared by the Contractor during mobilization, which shall be approved by SC and PIU NH-PWD after proper scrutiny. Protective goggles and clothing to workers engaged in stone breaking activities and workers shall be seated at sufficiently safe intervals The Contractor shall comply with all regulations regarding safe scaffolding, ladders, working platforms, gangway, stairwells, excavations, trenches and safe means of entry and egress. The Contractor shall ensure that no paint containing lead or lead products is used except in the form of paste or readymade paint. Contractor shall provide facemasks to the workers when paint is applied in the form of spray or a surface having dry lead paint is rubbed and scrapped. The Contractor shall mark „hard hat‟ and „no smoking‟ and other „high risk‟ areas and enforce non-compliance of use of PPE with zero tolerance.

Page | 8 - 61

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 2.1.4.4. Health and Safety Clause 111.11 • The Contractor at all times shall take all reasonable All construction Contractor 5 of MoRTH precautions to maintain the health and safety of the sites and labour under the Specification for Contractor‟s personnel. camps supervision Occupational • In collaboration with local health authorities, the of the Health and Contractor shall ensure that medical staff, first aid Engineer Safety of the facilities, sick bay and ambulance service are available Workforce at all times at the site. • The Contractor shall appoint an accident prevention officer at the site, responsible for maintaining safety and protection against accidents. • This person shall be qualified for this responsibility, and shall have the authority to issue instructions and take protective measures to prevent accidents. Throughout the execution of the works, the Contractor shall provide whatever is required by this person to exercise this responsibility and authority. • The Contractor shall send, to the Engineer, details of any accident as soon as practicable after its occurrence. • The Contractor shall maintain records and make reports concerning health, safety and welfare of persons, and damage to property, as the Engineer may reasonably require. 2.1.4.4. Traffic Safety & Clause 112 of • The Contractor will take all necessary measures for the All along the Contractor 6 Pedestrian Safety MoRT&H safety of traffic during construction and provide, erect project road under the Specification for and maintain such barricades, including signage, supervision Arrangement of markings, flags, lights, reflectors and flagmen as of the Traffic during proposed in the Traffic Control Plan/Drawings and as Engineer construction required by the Environmental Officer of SC for the

Page | 8 - 62

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity information and protection of road users approaching or passing through the section of any construction site of activity or diversion. • The Contractor will ensure that all signs, barricades, pavement markings are provided as per the MoRTH/ IRC specifications. • Before taking up construction on any section of the existing lanes of the highway, a Traffic Control Plan will be devised and implemented to the satisfaction of the Environmental Officer of SC and local administrative authorities including traffic police. 2.1.4.4. Risk from Factory Act, • All power transmission lines whether clawed or All construction Contractor 7 Electrical 1948 – Chapter sufficiently covered are potential hazards at equipment under the Equipment(s) -5 (Safety) and construction sites. The Contractor will take all required supervision Factorie precautions to prevent danger from electrical cables, of the s (Amendment) wires and equipment and ensure that – Engineer Act, 1987 • No material will be stacked or placed below/near power transmission lines, wires and equipment, which can be a potential danger to any road user, workman or public. • All such electrical installations and wirings shall be barricaded in manner that ensures safety of the road users, wildlife and operating vehicles / equipment such as cranes, excavators, loaders, fabricating units etc. • Necessary fencing, illumination and proper insulation of the electrical lines shall be ensured by the contractor for safety and security of the public, road users, workers and the wildlife. • The contractor shall ensure proper maintenance of electrical supply lines/points.

Page | 8 - 63

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity • All such electrical operating units shall be switched off before operations are closed every day or night as the case may be. • All electrical equipment/cables/wires to be used in the construction shall have to conform to the relevant BIS specifications/codes • The contractor will ensure that such equipment/cables/wires are free from patent defect, and under good working conditions and maintained in good working order (as per the owner manual supplied by the manufacturer) through regular supervision, monitoring, maintenance and repair/ replacement from time to time. 2.1.4.4. Safety during Clause 112.4 of • The Contractor shall provide adequate signage and All along the Contractor 8 Road Works MoRT&H markings as per the instruction of the Engineer in the project road under the Specification for construction zones. and all haul supervision Traffic safety • Contractor shall follow IRC: SP: 55-2014 for traffic roads of the Clause 112.5 of diversion. The colour and size of the Work zone signs Engineer MoRT&H are as per IRC: SP: 55-2014 (Guidelines on Traffic Specification for Management in work zones). Maintenance and Diversions IRC:SP:55 for Road signage & markings 2.1.4.4. First Aid Section 36 The Contractor shall arrange for - All construction Contractor 9 (First Aid) of • A readily available first aid unit including an adequate sites and labour under the Building and the supply of sterilized dressing materials and appliances camps supervision other

Page | 8 - 64

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity Construction as per the Factories Rules in every work zone with life of the Workers saving first aid kits. Engineer (Regulation of • Availability of suitable transport at all times to take Employment injured or sick person(s) to the nearest hospital. and Conditions • Equipment and trained nursing /paramedical staff at of Service) construction camps. Periodic health checks for workers Act, 1996 2.1.4.5. Cultural Property 2.1.4.5. Chance Found Ancient • All fossils, coins, articles of value of antiquity, structures Along the Contractor 1. Archaeological monuments and and other remains or things of geological or project road under the Property Archaeological archaeological interest discovered on the site shall be supervision Sites and the property of the Government and shall be dealt with of the Remains Rules as per provisions of the relevant legislation. Engineer 1959 • The contractor will take reasonable precautions to Ancient prevent his workmen or any other persons from Monuments and removing and damaging any such article or property. Archaeological He will, immediately upon discovery thereof intimate Sites and the Environmental Officer of SC, local police and Remains administration of such discovery and carry out the given (Amendment instructions for dealing with the same. and • The SC will seek direction from the State Validation) Act Archaeological Department before instructing the 2010 contractor to recommence the work in the site. • Till such time, the site and the findings shall be under strict watch and ward of the contractor, SC and local administration to prevent any pilferage, alteration of the findings by the workmen or locals as the case may be. 2.2. Environmental enhancement and special issues

Page | 8 - 65

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 2.2.1. Rehabilitation / Physical The architectural elements of the structure shall be As per the Contractor Enhancement of Cultural conserved / reflected / translated into the design of new enhancement under the Community, Resources structures/ enhancements in accordance with wishes of locations supervision Cultural and (WB) the community. provided under of the Religious the Engineer Properties and Water Resources 2.2.2. Flora and Chance Wild Life • The Contractor shall take reasonable precaution to Ecologically Contractor found Fauna Protection Act prevent his workmen or any other persons from Sensitive under the 1972 removing and damaging any flora (plant/vegetation) areas: supervision and fauna (animal) including fishing in any water body of the and hunting of any animal. Engineer • If any wild animal is found near the construction site at any point of time, the Contractor shall acquaint the Engineer and execute the Engineer‟s instructions for dealing with the same. • The Engineer shall report to the nearby forest office (range office) and shall take appropriate steps/ measures in consultation with the forest officials. Enhancement Enhancement of all incidental spaces shall be planned and carried out prior to completion of construction, along the project road. Some of the enhancement measures to be considered along the project roads include Avenue tree plantation along the entire stretch of the road, Planting of shrubs in medians, rain water harvesting, adequate storm water drainage , Landscaping at junctions to improve aesthetics etc. A total of 1037 trees will be cut along SH·3 for the purpose of the project and as compensatory measure 2074 trees shall be planted and protected.

Page | 8 - 66

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity Road Side • The contractor/identified agency (where Tree Planting plantation & specifically identified) shall do the plantation at strategy median and/or turfing at embankment slops as per the tree plantation strategy prepared for the project. • A total of 7600 saplings shall be planted along the Right of Way. Minimum 80 percentage of survival rate of the saplings shall be acceptable otherwise the contractor shall replace dead plants at his own cost. The contractor shall maintain the plantation till they handover the project • Giving due protection to the trees that fall in the shoulders /corridor of impact shall be the prime focus during Construction/post construction. Re-plantation of at least twice the number of trees cut should be carried out along the project road. Since the major portion of the project road may pass through open land. planting of trees alone the entire stretch of the road is recommended as an enhancement measure, which would also serve as a mechanism to delineate ROW and prevent future encroachments into the ROW wherever possible. 2.2.3. Sensitive • Sensitive receptors like schools, hospitals shall be Indicative Contractor Receptors provided with permanent noise barriers prior to the start sensitive under the of work in order to minimize the dust and noise impacts receptors along supervision due to vehicle movement (during / post construction). the road of the Their effectiveness to be checked during operation Engineer phase. • Construction activities shall be confined within the present available CoI, regularly strict

Page | 8 - 67

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity monitoring/supervision shall be done to minimize/control air-noise pollution and abatement of dust particles at minimum level possible using well maintained modern machineries. 2.3. Contractor Demobilization 2.3.1. Clearing of Clause 111.8.4 • Contractor to prepare site restoration plans for approval All Contractor Construction of of MoRTH by the Engineer. The plan shall be implemented by the Construction under the Camps & specification Contractor prior to demobilization. Workers‟ supervision Restoration/ Clause 111.16 • On completion of the works, all temporary structures Camps of the Rehabilitation of shall be cleared, all rubbish burnt, excreta or other Engineer MoRTH disposal pits or trenches filled in and effectively sealed specification off and the site left clean and tidy, at the Contractor‟s expense, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. • The topsoil removed and conserved earlier shall be spread over the restoration area as per the direction of the Engineer to facilitate the growth of vegetation. • Residual topsoil shall be distributed on adjoining/proximate barren/rocky areas as identified by the Engineer in a layerof • thickness of 75mm –150mm. 2.3.2. Redevelopment Clause • Redevelopment of borrow area shall be taken up in Some identified Contractor of Borrow 305.2.2.2 of accordance with the plans approved by the Engineer borrow area under the MoRTH locations but supervision specification not limited to of the along the road Engineer 3. OPERATION STAGE (Activities to be Carried Out by the Contractor / PIU NH-PWD) 3.1 Monitoring and • The PIU shall monitor the operational performance of All along the Contractor Evaluation of the various mitigation/ enhancement measures carried project road under the

Page | 8 - 68

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity Operational out as a part of the project. Monitoring and performance supervision Performance of indicators have been indicated in Environmental of the Environmental Monitoring Plan Engineer Mitigation Measures 3.2 Maintenance of • PIU NH-PWD shall ensure that all drains (side drains At locations Contractor Drainage and all cross drainages) are periodically cleared were bridge under the especially before monsoon season to facilitate the works and supervision quick passage of rainwater and avoid flooding without culverts are of the damaging the spurs and check dams erected to proposed. Engineer stabilize the course and flow of all such drainage channels. • PIU NH-PWD shall ensure that all the sediment/oil and grease traps setup at the water bodies are cleared once in every three months. 3.3 Pollution • The periodic monitoring of the ambient air quality, noise All along the Contractor Monitoring level, water (both ground and surface water) quality, project road under the soil pollution / contamination are to be continued at pre- supervision designated locations and if necessary, at additional of the locations for comparative study of pre and post Engineer operation data in order to ensure further improvement/modification in similar future works. 3.4 Atmospheric • Ambient air concentrations of various pollutants shall All along the Contractor Pollution be monitored as envisaged in the Environmental project road under the Monitoring Plan at pre designated locations to compare supervision the levels with the pre- construction data. of the • Additional data at other location may be collected as Engineer per any site specific requirement.

Page | 8 - 69

Additional Measures to be Adopted by the Responsibil Environmental Issues Ref: Clauses Location Contractor ity 3.5 Noise Pollution • Noise pollution shall be monitored as per All along the Contractor Environmental Monitoring Plan at sensitive locations project road under the where pre- construction noise data was collected. The supervision functioning of the noise barriers shall be supervised of the and monitored for further improvement/replication at Engineer other affected points if necessary. • Signage near sensitive locations shall be maintained and kept clean. Monitoring the effectiveness of the pollution attenuation measures shall be taken up as per Environmental Monitoring Plan Soil Erosion and • Visual monitoring and inspection of soil erosion at Some identified Contractor Monitoring of borrow areas, quarries (if closed and rehabilitated), borrow area under the Borrow Areas embankments and other places expected to be location along supervision affected, shall be carried to record and monitor the the road of the effectiveness of such structures after the completion of Engineer project, so as to evaluate the beneficial effects of each type of activity together with the cost involved. 3.7 Road Safety and Clause 3000 of • No advertisement/hoardings shall be allowed within the All along the Contractor Maintenance of MoRTH Right of Way limits of the project road. project road under the Assets Specification for • Regular maintenance and cleaning of assets such as supervision Maintenance of signboards, bus stops, drains etc. shall be undertaken. of the Road IRC: SP • Contractor shall follow IRC: SP: 55-2014 for colour and Engineer :55 for Traffic size of the road signs. Safety

8.9 Budget The EMP cost has been presented in below table. The budgeted cost of EMP is Rs. 20.62 Cr.

Page | 8 - 70

Table 0-5: Project Road-Wise Environmental Budget Total cost (INR) Item Unit cost Component Description Unit Quantity Cost in No. (INR) Detail Cost Crores 1 MITIGATION / ENHANCEMENT COST 1.1 Pre-construction Stage Land 1.1.1 Covered in RAP Budget 0.00 0.000 acquisition Relocation and construction of affected hand pumps, water storage tanks, open 1.1.2 Water Covered in Utility Shifting Budget 0.00 0.000 wells, water taps, OHT etc. as per directions of the Engineer. 1.2 Construction Stage Planting of flowering, shade, medicinal, ornamental & fruit bearing trees in suitable area @ (500 trees x 2 ROW x 30km for 4 Lane) + (333 Trees x 2 ROW 1.2.1 x 86km for 2 lane) numbers per Km. (As No. 87276 1,500.00 13,09,14,000.00 1309.140 per Letter No. NHAI/GHD/02/01/02- 22/2016/50 Dated 17.01.2018) and Green Highways (Plantation & Horticulture Maintenance) Policy-2015 in rural areas Compensatory Re-plantation to offset the loss of trees due to widening of the project corridor in accordance to the 1.2.2 relevant forest laws (Minimum of 03 No. 3225 1,500.00 48,37,500.00 0.484 trees planted for every tree cut) including Plantation and maintenance at locations & as per directions of the forest

Page | 8 - 71

Total cost (INR) Item Unit cost Component Description Unit Quantity Cost in No. (INR) Detail Cost Crores department or administrative department Tree guard / Wire fencing / other for 1.2.3 No. 90501 400.00 3,62,00,400.00 3.620 protection of plantation Landscaping and aesthetics of junctions and at other loactions as per design, 1.2.4 drawings and direction of the LS - 5,00,000.00 5,00,000.00 0.050 Environmental Engineer / Environmental Specialist of the Engineer Slope / Turfing of embankment with grasses 1.2.5 Embankment sq.m. (Covered in Engineering Cost) 0.00 0.000 and herbs. protection Providing Oil Interceptors as per design and drawing at vehicle parking areas Soil & Ground and as per directions of the 1.2.6 Nos. 4 30,000.00 1,20,000.00 0.012 Water Environmental Specialist / Environmental Engineer of the Engineer. Silt Fencing for Water Bodies adjacent to 1.2.7 Surface Water running m 2920 1,100.00 32,12,000.00 0.321 the road Cost of transport & distribution of 1.2.8 Cooking Fuel cooking fuel to construction workers to Months 24 20,000.00 4,80,000.00 0.048 prevent indiscriminate felling of trees Dust Management with sprinkling of 1.2.9 Air water, covers for vehicles transporting Km 116.908 30,000.00 35,07,240.00 0.351 construction material

Page | 8 - 72

Total cost (INR) Item Unit cost Component Description Unit Quantity Cost in No. (INR) Detail Cost Crores 1) provision of and 2) Dismantleling and new construction of compund wall of noise sensitive features upto a height of 1.2.10 Noise Barrier total 2m above ground level complete in running m 1500 8,000.00 1,20,00,000.00 1.200 all respect as per Technical Specifications and as per the direction of the Engineer. Disposal of Sewage and other wastes in the construction yard and labour camps Solid Waste 1.2.11 as per directions of the Environmental Month 24 15,000.00 360000.00 0.036 Disposal Specialist / Environmental Engineer of the Engineer. Cultural 1.2.12 Relocation of cultural properties Covered in RAP Budget 0.000 properties Roadside 1.2.13 Construction of Bus Bays Covered in Engineering Cost 0.00 0.000 amenities TOTAL MITIGATION / ENHANCEMENT COST 19,21,31,140.00 19.213 2 MONITORING COST 2.1 Construction Stage Sampling and monitoring ambient Air Quality and gaseous pollutants as per CPCB Standard Procedures at 8 No. of 2.1.1 Air locations including approved hot mix 192 2,000.00 3,84,000.00 0.038 Samples plant locations, sensitive area and chainage as per direction by Environmental Specialist /

Page | 8 - 73

Total cost (INR) Item Unit cost Component Description Unit Quantity Cost in No. (INR) Detail Cost Crores Environmental Engineer of the Monitoring Consultant for three seanosn a year for 2 years as per the Monitoring Plan given in EMP Analysis charges of Ambient air from samples collected for parameters as per No. of 2.1.2 192 4,000.00 7,68,000.00 0.077 AAQ Standards Notification, 2009 and Samples CPCB manual. Collection of grab samples of water quality at 6 locations at chainage identified by the engineer for 2 years (twice a year) in pre & post monsoon No. of 2.1.3 seasons as per the Monitoring Plan 24 400.00 9,600.00 0.001 Samples given in EMP /as per direction of Environmental Specialist / Environmental Engineer of the Monitoring Consultant

Water Quality Analysis of water quality at locations in the monitoring plan for pH, Turbidity, total solids, turbidity COD, BOD, DO, Chlorides, Hardness, Oil & Grease, TSS, TDS, Total Coliform, Iron, No. of 2.1.4 Fluorides, Nitrates, E. coli, Total coliform 24 6,000.00 1,44,000.00 0.014 Samples and faecal coliform as specified in "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater" published by WEF, AWWA and APHA as per direction of Environmental Specialist /

Page | 8 - 74

Total cost (INR) Item Unit cost Component Description Unit Quantity Cost in No. (INR) Detail Cost Crores Environmental Engineer of the Engineer and as per MoEF rate list. Monitoring Noise level at Equipment Yards, Sensitive area and Settlements using hand held noise meters at 8 locations at chainages identified by the Engineer as per directions of 2.1.5 Noise Nos. 16 1,500.00 24,000.00 0.002 Environmental Specialist / Environmental Engineer of the Monitoring Consultant for three seasons in a year for 2 years as per the Monitoring Plan given in EMP Monitoring Soil at 4 locations at chainages identified by the Engineer as per directions of Environmental 2.1.6 Soil Specialist / Environmental Engineer of Nos. 16 2,000.00 32,000.00 0.003 the Monitoring Consultant for twice a year for 2 years as per the Monitoring Plan given in EMP Transportation cost for monitoring of Transportation 2.1.7 noise, air and water during construction L.S. - 1,50,000.00 1,50,000.00 0.015 Cost period 2.2 Operation Stage Sampling and monitoring ambient Air Quality and gaseous pollutants as per No. of 2.2.1 Air 24 2,000.00 0.005 CPCB Standard Procedures at 2 Samples 48,000.00 locations including sensitive area and

Page | 8 - 75

Total cost (INR) Item Unit cost Component Description Unit Quantity Cost in No. (INR) Detail Cost Crores chainage as per direction by Environmental Specialist of Consultant for once in a month for 3 months x 2 season for 2 years Analysis charges of Ambient air from samples collected for parameters as per AAQ Standards Notification, 2009 in No. of 2.2.2 24 4,000.00 0.010 consultations and directions of the Samples 96,000.00 Consultant and NH-PWD as per MoEF&CC charges. Collection of grab samples of water quality at 2 locations at chainage for twice a year in pre & post monsoon No. of 2.2.3 seasons in every alternate year for 2 8 400.00 0.000 Samples 3,200.00 years as per direction of Environmental Specialist / Environmental Engineer of the Consultant Analysis of water quality at locations in Water Quality the monitoring plan for pH, Turbidity, total solids, COD, BOD, DO, Chlorides, Hardness, Oil & Grease, TSS, TDS, Total Coliform, Iron, Fluorides, Nitrates, No. of 2.2.4 E. coli, Total coliform and faecal coliform 8 6,000.00 0.005 Samples 48,000.00 etc. as specified in "Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater" published by WEF, AWWA and APHA as per direction of Environmental Specialist /

Page | 8 - 76

Total cost (INR) Item Unit cost Component Description Unit Quantity Cost in No. (INR) Detail Cost Crores Environmental Engineer of the Consultant and as per MoEF&CC rate list. Monitoring Noise level at Sensitive area and Settlements using hand held noise meters at 4 locations for once a year for 2.2.5 Noise 2 years as per directions of Nos. 8 1,500.00 2,25,000.00 0.023 Environmental Specialist / Environmental Engineer of the Monitoring Consultant Monitoring Soil at 3 locations at chainage identified by the Engineer as per directions of Environmental 2.2.6 Soil Nos. 6 2,000.00 0.001 Specialist / Environmental Engineer of 12,000.00 the Engineer for once a year for 2 year as per the Monitoring Plan given in EMP Transportation cost for monitoring of Transportation 2.2.7 noise, air and water during operation L.S. - 50,000.00 50,000.00 0.005 Cost period for 2 years TOTAL MONITORING COST 19,93,800.00 0.199 3 MISCELLANEOUS COST Capacity Development of Env. Cell 3.1 Training L.S. - 10,00,000.00 10,00,000.00 0.100 Execution team Holding meetings for policy planning and Advocacy and 3.2 subsequent review meetings with Year 12 15,000.00 1,80,000.00 0.018 Policy Making Revenue Department, Forest

Page | 8 - 77

Total cost (INR) Item Unit cost Component Description Unit Quantity Cost in No. (INR) Detail Cost Crores Department, local representatives, NGOs, etc. regarding development controls. Administrative Maintenance of vehicle with the Charges 3.3 Environment Cell, Data processing, Months 24 35,000.00 8,40,000.00 0.084 including administrative support, stationery etc. logistics 3.4 Miscellaneous Digital Camera for the Environment Cell No. 1 5,000.00 5,000.00 0.001 3.5 Items Portable sound level meter No. 1 2,50,000.00 2,50,000.00 0.025 TOTAL MISCELLANEOUS COST 22,75,000.00 0.228 TOTAL COST 19,63,99,940.00 19.640 Contingency @ 5% on Total Environmental Cost 98,19,997.00 0.982 GRAND TOTAL 20,62,19,937.00 20.622 Rate per kilometer 17,66,413.00 0.177

Page | 8 - 78

CHAPTER 9: CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

1. Environmental Assessment of the subproject ascertains that the project is not likely to cause significant environmental impacts. Most of the impacts are localized and temporary in nature and can be mitigated with minor to negligible residual impacts except due to land acquisition. The project received immense support from local people with some concern and apprehension related to compensation for land and structures.

2. The alignment does not pass through or located nearby any National Park, Wild life Sanctuary or any other ecologically sensitive or protected areas. No archaeological / protected monument is located in the project vicinity. The land use pattern around the alignment is predominantly agricultural.

3. The significant impact during construction is mainly associated with minor increase in dust borne air pollution, increased noise level, nuisance due to movement and operation of vehicles, establishment of temporary facilities, hindrance in accessibility to common property resources etc.

4. The effective implementation of environmental management plan will facilitate in minimizing the environmental impact to acceptable level. No additional studies or need of undertaking detailed EIA is envisaged at this stage. However, the executing agency with co-ordination with other departments shall make all efforts to encounter the impact due to recurring flood in the region and keep vigil on any adverse impact on environment due to construction of the subproject highway.

5. Borrow area shall be rehabilitated as per EMP. IRC: 10-1961 guidelines shall be followed regarding identification; use and rehabilitation of borrow area.

6. The compensatory afforestation should be undertaken at 1:3 bases in close consultation with forest department. Roadside plantation should be done as per IRC specifications. Additional plantation should be done at river banks especially at major bridge locations, proposed river training sites.

7. Soil erosion along embankment slope, river banks, bridge sites and river training structures shall be checked through measures suggested in present EIA report. These measures coupled with silt fencing / brush barrier etc. will also help to minimize siltation of water bodies though required at only few locations since most of the water bodies are seasonal in nature.

8. Corridor specific measures to curb emission include maintaining good road conditions, improved traffic regulations, and roadside plantation with pollutant absorbent species is recommended.

Page | 9 - 1

9. Key suggested measures to avoid increased noise level during construction are provision of temporary noise barriers and regulating construction timings near sensitive locations. Operation stage mitigation includes multi-layered plantation and restricting honking near sensitive areas, maintaining good road conditions and congestion free traffic movement.

10. Sitting and management of temporary construction facilities i.e. Construction camp, workers camp, hot mix plant, batching plant, dumping sites, stone crusher etc. shall be done in environmentally accepted manner as mentioned in EIA

11. Dismantled material shall be reused to the extent possible. Leftover debris shall be disposed off in environmentally acceptable method and at designated sites.

12. Risk involved with accidents, community & occupational health safety should be mitigated as per measures provided in present EIA report.

13. A proper traffic management plan shall be in place well before start of the construction

14. Access to community structures/resources shall not get affected during any stage of the project

Page | 9 - 2

Annexure 5.1: Borrow Area Management Plan Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

Annexure 5.1: Borrow Area Management Plan

SITING

Specific locations of borrow areas to be used (if any) will be identified by Contractor/ Concessionaire. In case the Contractor/ Concessionaire wants to open any new borrow areas and then the selection and recommendations for borrow areas will be based on environmental as well as civil engineering considerations. Location of source of supply of material for embankment or sub-grade and the procedure for excavation or transport of material shall be in compliance with the environmental requirements of the MoEF&CC, State Govt. and as specified in IRC:10-1961.

The Contractor/ Concessionaire shall establish a new borrow areas only with the prior consent of the Monitoring Consultant only in cases when:

• Lead from existing borrow area & quarries is uneconomical and • Alternative material sources are not available. The Contractor/ Concessionaire shall prepare a Redevelopment Plan for the borrow area and get it approved by the Monitoring Consultant.

Certain precautions have to be taken to restrict unauthorized borrowing by the Contractor/ Concessionaire. No borrow area shall be opened without permission of the Monitoring Consultant. The borrowing shall not be carried out in cultivable lands, unless and until, it shall be agreed upon by the Monitoring Consultant that there is no suitable uncultivable land in the vicinity for borrowing or private landowners are willing to allow borrowing on their fields.

The construction schedule and operations plans to be submitted to the Consultant prior to commencement of work shall contain a detailed work plan for procuring materials that includes procurement; transportation and storage of borrow earth material. The Contractor/ Concessionaire shall provide the following:

• Selection Criteria for Evaluation of Potential Borrow Areas • A brief statement as to how the site was chosen • Alternative sites that were considered to be mentioned • Record any public consultations involved while choosing and what the public concerns were, if any • Existing land use (Agricultural / Barren / Scrub / grazing / any other type) • Vegetation / trees to be removed • Erosion/degradation potential • Distance and name of the nearest settlement • Distance from the nearest surface water body • Drainage pattern of the area • Distance of the nearest Reserve Forest (if any) or any other ecologically fragile area

P a g e | i Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

• Distance of the nearest Sacred Tree (if any) • Distance from the nearest school / hospital / primary health center • Daily / Occasional use of borrow area by the community • Any schemes or avenues for generation of income for adjoining community • Location and Layout • Sketch plans and photographs to be provided along with adequate details: A map and sketch plan of the area showing the location of the proposed site with respect to the project road, nearby villages and worker accommodation locations along with indicative distances of the different sites from each other and from the road.

Probable Borrow Areas data (to be filled by Contractor/Concessionaire)

Site identification Approximate Quantity (Cum)

Name Offset from Available Surrounding Material Nearest Sample no. of Left / nearest Length Breadth Depth Total Land / Land/ Remarks type Chainage Village Right Chainage (m) (m) (m) (Cum) Terrain Terrain (Km.) (m)

REMOVAL OF TREES AND PLANTS

Contractor/Concessionaire to describe briefly the floral species that have had to be removed (it will be helpful give local names if English or scientific names are not known), and roughly how many.

MITIGATIONS & REHABILITATION OF BORROW AREAS

The soils to be used, as sub-grade, select sub-grade and shoulder materials need to be hauled from designated borrow areas. Similar to the identification of suitable quarries, suitable borrow areas for supply of soil to the new road formation were also identified. Based on the total requirement and availability of each soil type, estimates of soil quantity to be obtained from each of the borrow areas were worked out in accordance with IRC: 10-1961: Recommended Practice for Borrow Pits for Road Embankments constructed by Manual Operation. In the selection of the borrow areas, care was taken to ensure that:

• Sufficient quantity of suitable soil is available from the borrow areas; • The borrow areas are as close to the project road as possible; • The loss of productive and fertile agricultural soil is minimum; and • There is minimum loss of vegetation. For opening new borrow areas other than those identified the consultant shall follow above section. The borrowing shall not be carried out in cultivable lands, unless and until, it shall be agreed upon by the

P a g e | ii Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

Consultant that there is no suitable uncultivable land in the vicinity for borrowing, or there are private land owners willing to allow borrowing on their fields.

REHABILITATION

The objective of the rehabilitation programme is to return the borrow pit sites to a safe and secure area, which the general public should be able to safely enter and enjoy. Securing borrow pits sites in a stable condition should be a fundamental requirement of the rehabilitation process. This could be achieved by filling the borrow pit floor to approximately the access road level.

It is important to plan restoration from the outset and coordinate restoration activities. In addition to the bio- diversity issues, land planning considerations are also taken into account when defining a rehabilitation project in order both to preserve the environment and to generate income for the local communities. In this framework rehabilitation often leads to the creation of wetlands and or recreation areas.

Special borrow pit rehabilitation plan shall be specified according to the location and shaping of the mining slopes after exploitation and overburdened dump, with different subsequent uses e.g. forest, meadow, water body etc., the re-greening and replanting methods..

Other criteria which shall be followed for rehabilitation of quarry/ borrow pits are as given below:

• Borrow pits can be backfilled with rejected construction wastes except bitumen and will be given a vegetative cover. If this is not possible, then slopes will be smoothed and depression will be filled in such a way that it looks more or less like the original ground surface. • During works execution, the Contractor/Concessionaire shall ensure preservation of trees during piling of materials; spreading of stripping material to facilitate water percolation and allow natural vegetation growth; re-establishment of previous natural drainage flows; improvement of site appearance; digging of ditches to collect runoff; and maintenance of roadways where a pit or quarry is declared useable water source for livestock or people nearby. Once the works are completed, and at own expense the Contractor/Concessionaire shall restore the environment around the work site to its original splits. • Appropriate plant species for the planting programme have to be selected in consultation with ecological consultant and local state forest department. Depending on the limitations on the availability of appropriate plant material, harsh growing conditions (lack of irrigation and hot summer) and ongoing quarry rehabilitation operations there may be substantial loss of plantation and the planting programme may have to be continued for over 3–5 years. As plantings are progressively established they should be monitored before undertaking the next stage to ensure maximum plant survival rates. • The borrow pit immediate surroundings shall be developed as a low maintenance reserve, with significant areas of native trees and shrubs and areas of longer grass and tussocks forming the open spaces. Walkways around the borrow site may be constructed. Provision for a future drive-in picnic area and car parking area may be developed.

P a g e | iii Annexure 5.2: Guidelines for Sediment Control Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

Annexure 5.2: Guidelines for Sediment Control

All materials shall meet commercial grade standards and shall be approved by the Engineer before being used in the work. CONSTRUCTION STAGE Prior to the start of the relevant construction, the Contractor/Concessionaire shall submit to the Consultant for approval, his schedules for carrying out temporary and permanent erosion / sedimentation control works as are applicable for the items of clearing and grubbing, roadway and drainage excavation, embankment / sub-grade construction, bridges and other structures across water courses, pavement courses and shoulders. The Contractor/Concessionaire shall also submit for approval his proposed method of erosion / sedimentation control on service road and quarries and his plan for disposal of waste materials. Work shall not be started until the erosion / sedimentation control schedules and methods of operations for the applicable' construction have been approved by the Consultant.

The surface area of erodible earth material exposed by clearing and grubbing, excavation, quarry and fill operations shall be limited to the extent practicable. The Contractor/Concessionaire may be directed to provide immediate control measures to prevent soil erosion and sedimentation that will adversely affect construction operations, damage adjacent properties, or cause contamination of nearby streams or other watercourses. Such work may involve the construction of temporary berms, dikes, sediment basins, slope drains and use of temporary mulches, fabrics, mats, seeding, or other control devices or methods as necessary to control erosion and sedimentation.

The Contractor/Concessionaire shall be required to incorporate all permanent erosion and sedimentation control features into the project at the earliest practicable time as outlined in his accepted schedule to minimize the need for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures.

Temporary erosion, sedimentation and pollution control measures will be used to control the phenomenon of erosion, sedimentation and pollution that may develop during normal construction practices, but may neither be foreseen daring design stage nor associated with permanent control features on the Project. Where erosion or sedimentation is likely to be a problem, clearing and grubbing operations should be so scheduled and performed that grading operations and permanent erosion or sedimentation control features can follow immediately thereafter if the project conditions permit; otherwise temporary erosion or sedimentation control measures may be required between successive construction stages. Under no conditions shall a large surface area of credible earth material be exposed at one time by clearing and grubbing or excavation without prior approval of the Environmental Specialist.

The Consultant may limit the area of excavation, quarry and embankment operations in progress, commensurate with the Contractor’s/Concessionaire’s capability and progress in keeping the finish grading, mulching, seeding and other such permanent erosion, sedimentation and pollution control measures, in accordance with the accepted schedule.

P a g e | i

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

Temporary erosion is sometimes caused due to the Contractor’s/Concessionaire’s negligence, carelessness or failure to install permanent controls. Sedimentation and pollution control measures then become necessary as a part of the work as scheduled or ordered by the monitoring consultant, and these shall be carried out at the Contractor’s/Concessionaire’s own expense. Temporary erosion, sedimentation and pollution control work required, which is not attributed to the Contractor’s/Concessionaire’s negligence, carelessness or failure to install permanent control, will be performed as per the need.

Temporary erosion, sedimentation and pollution control may include construction work outside the right of way where such work is necessary as a result of road construction such as quarry operations, service roads and equipment storage sites.

The temporary erosion, sedimentation and pollution control features installed by the Contractor’s/Concessionaire’s shall be maintained by him till these are needed, unless otherwise agreed by the Consultant.

P a g e | ii

Annexure 5.3: Tree Plantation strategy

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

Annexure 5.3: Tree Plantation strategy

1. INTRODUCTION Due to the proposed development, some of the existing trees are to be felled. To offset this impact, compensatory afforestation programme through tree plantation, median plantation, horticulture and landscaping strategy has been prepared, based upon the experiences of successful implementation of a number of ongoing and completed projects. 2. OBJECTIVE The main objectives are as follows: • Reducing the impacts of air pollution • Natural noise barrier • Arrest of land erosion • Providing much needed shade during the day time • Prevention of vehicle glare from vehicles coming from opposite direction • Enhancement of aesthetic view of the corridors • Climatic amelioration • Defining of ROW especially at sharp curves during night 3. SPECIES SELECTION Grasses, shrubs and trees are the main species that are readily available in India. Where possible, the use of non-native species should be avoided since they can out compete and displace native plants leading to loss of native biodiversity. To maximise the chances of success, one should try to select species whose growing conditions roughly match the environmental conditions of the project site. Care should also be taken to select species with root systems that match the nature of the soil movement at the project site. Homogenous avenues of trees should be selected for long stretches as it provides aesthetic qualities in the landscaping. One should also take into account the economic and other social benefits while selecting the species for plantation. During the selection of species preference should be given towards rapid growing and pest and disease resistant species. Shrub species, which are dwarf and pollution hardy, are to be planted in the median to prevent the glare of traffic moving in opposite direction. Flowering, ornamentals plants and climbers can also be planted in urban areas to provide beauty. For this purpose the species may be decided by interaction with local authority and local populace. Few species has also been recommended in the report under section 7.2.2. 4. TASKS OF THE CONTRACTOR/CONCESSIONAIRE As part of this project implementation, the contractor/concessionaire shall plant and maintain flowering, shade, medicinal, ornamental & fruit bearing trees in suitable area for which cost has been budgeted besides planting and maintenance of ornamental, medicinal & flowering plants and shrubs in the median for which cost has also been budgeted. The specific roles and responsibilities of the Contractor/Concessionaire include: • Identification of the plantation stretches with NH-PWD and or Consultant. • Identification of nursery area and preparation of nurseries • Planting of saplings in the nurseries during the construction period so that the saplings are a minimum 24 months old

P a g e | i

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

• Replantation of the 2 year old saplings to the plantation stretches and • Maintenance for three years including watering, removal of weed, litter and debris from the vicinity of the plantation. • Ensure the protection of the tree guards provided to the saplings from trampling and browsing by the cattle. 5. GUIDELINES FOR HORTICULTURE PLANTATION AND LANDSCAPING 5.1. General 5.1.1. Scope Contractor/Consultant to furnish all materials, labour and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on drawing and specified herein. 5.1.2. Materials Plant Materials • Plant Materials shall be well formed and shaped true to type, and free from disease, insects and defects such as knots, sun-scaled, windburn, injuries, abrasion or disfigurement. • All plant materials shall be healthy, sound, vigorous, free from plant diseases, insect's pests, of their eggs, and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. All plants shall be hardy under climatic conditions similar to those in the locally of the project. Plants supplied shall confirm to the names listed on the plant list given in section 7.2.2. Besides these plant species, the Contractor/Concessionaire shall supply other species as desired by the landscaping specialist and or the environmental specialist of the consultant. Under no circumstances non-native species which might have a negative impact on the ecology of the area shall be permitted. No plant material will be accepted if branches are damaged or broken. All material must be protected from the sun and weather until planted. • Any nursery stock shall have been inspected and approved by the Environmental Specialist of the Consultant. • All plants shall conform to the requirements specified in the plant list. Except that plants larger then specified may be used if approved, but use of such plants shall not increase the contract price if the use of the larger plant is approved, the spread of roots or ball of earth shall be increased in proportion to the size of plant. Deliver plants with legible identification labels. Top Soil (Good Earth) • Topsoil or good earth shall be a friable loam, typical of cultivated topsoil of the locality containing at least 2% of decayed organic matter (humus). It shall be taken from a well-drained arable site. It shall be free of subsoil, stones, earth skids, sticks, roots or any other objectionable extraneous matter or debris. It shall contain no toxic material. No topsoil shall be delivered in a muddy condition. It shall have pH value ranging in between 6 to 8.5. Fertiliser • Measurement of sludge shall be in stacks, with 8% reduction for payment. It shall be free from extraneous matter, harmful bacteria insects or chemicals (Subjected to safety norms). Root System • The root system shall be conducive to successful transplantation. While necessary, the root-ball shall be preserved by support with Hessian or other suitable material. On soils where retention of a good ball is not possible, the roots should be suitably protected in such a way that the roots are not damaged.

P a g e | ii

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

5.1.3. Condition Trees and shrubs shall be substantially free from pests and diseases, and shall and shall be materially undamaged. Torn or lacerated roots shall be pruned before dispatch. No roots shall be subjected to adverse conditions such as prolonged exposure to drying winds or subjection to water logging between lifting and delivery. 5.1.4. Supply and Substitution Upon submission of evidence that certain materials excluding the plant Species prescribed are not available at time of contract, the Contractor/Concessionaire shall be permitted to substitute with an equitable adjustment of price. All substitutions shall be of the nearest equivalent species and variety to the original specified and shall be subjected to the approval of the Environmental Specialist of the Consultant. 5.1.5. Packaging Packaging shall be adequate for the protection of the plants and such as to avoid heating or drying out. 5.1.6. Marking Each specimen of tree and shrub, or each bundle, shall be legibly labelled with the following particulars: • Its name • The name of the supplier, unless otherwise agreed. • The date of dispatch from the nursery. 5.2. Plantation Pattern The type of plantation would be based upon the requirements and the feasibility of the sites along the project corridor. The availability of the space in the RoW is a major guiding factor for landscaping. The plantation pattern to be followed is: • The first row of plants along the highways will be of small to medium height plants planted at a spacing of 3m c/c and the distance from the second row should be 3m. The second row should be in staggered. The distance from the toe of the embankment should be 1m minimum and the height should be between 1.5m to 2m. • Flowering shrubs shall be planted in the median in rows as per width availability. Where the width is less than 1.5m grass turfing is to be done. One row of plantation to be done at a spacing of 1.5m c/c. For special landscaping, embankment slopes and ground cover, herbaceous species to be used. Turfing to be done by grass. 5.3. Tree Planting 5.3.1. Plants and Shrubs Trees should be supplied with adequate protection as approved. After delivery, if planting is not to be carried out immediately, balled plants should be placed back to back and the ball covered with sand to prevent drying out. Bare rooted plants can be heeled in by placing the roots in prepared trench and covering them with earth, which should be watered into, avoid air pockets round the roots and shrubs shall be planted with the approval of Environmental Specialist of Consultant. 5.3.2. Digging of Pits Tree pits shall be dug a minimum of three weeks prior to backfilling. The pits shall be 120cms in diameter and 120cms deep. While digging the pits, the topsoil up to a depth of 30cms may be kept aside, if found good (depending upon site conditions), and mixed with the rest of the soil. If the side of the below, it shall be replaced with the soil mixture as specified further herein. If the soil is

P a g e | iii

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

normal it shall be mixed with manure; river sand shall be added to the soil if it is heavy. The bottom of the pit shall be forked to break up the subsoil. 5.3.3. Back Filling The soil back filled watered through end gently pressed down, a day previous to planting, to make sure that it may not further settle down after planting. The soil shall be pressed down firmly by treading it down, leaving a shallow depression all-round for watering. 5.3.4. Planting No tree pits shall be dug until final tree position has been pegged out for approval. Care shall be taken that the plant sapling when planted is not be buried deeper than in the nursery, or in the pot. Planting should not be carried out in waterlogged soil. Plant trees at the original soil depth; soil marks on the stem is an indication of this and should be maintained on the finished level, allowing for setting of the soil after planting. All plastic and other imperishable containers should be removed before planting. Any broken or damage roots should be cut back to sound growth. The bottom of the planting pit should be covered with 50mm to 75mm of soil. Bare roots should be spread evenly in the planting pit; and small mound in the centre of the pits on which the roots are placed will aid on even spread. Soil should be placed around the roots, gently shaking the tree to allow the soil particles to shift into the root system to ensure close contact with all roots and prevent air pockets Back fill soil should be firmed as filling proceeds, layer by layer, care being taken to avoid damaging the roots. The balance earth shall be filled in a mixture of 1:3 (1 part sludge to 3 part earth by volume) and 50gms potash, (Mop) 50gms of Super Phosphate and 1 Kg. Neem oil cake. Aldrin or equivalent shall be applied every 15 days in a mixture of 5ml in 5 litres of water. 5.3.5. Staking Newly planted trees must be held firmly although not rigidly by staking to prevent a pocket forming around the stem and newly formed fibrous roots being broken by mechanical pulling as the tree rocks. The main methods of staking shall be: • A single vertical shake, 900mm longer than the clear stem of the tree, driven 600mm to 900mm into the soil. • Two stakes as above driven firmly on either side of the tree with a cross bar to which the stem is attached. Suitable for bare- rooted or Ball material. • A single stake driven in at an angle at 45 degrees and leaning towards the prevailing wind, the stem just below the lowest branch being attached to the stake. Suitable for small bare- rooted or Ball material • For plant material 3m to 4.5m high with a single stem a three- wire adjustable guy system may be used in exposed situations. The end of stake should be pointed and the lower 1 m to 1.2m should be coated with a non-injurious wood preservative allowing at least 150mm above ground level. 5.3.6. Tying Each tree should be firmly secured to the stake so as to prevent excessive movement. Abrasion must be avoided by using a buffer, rubber or Hessian, between the tree and stake. The tree should be secured at a point just below its lowest branch, and also just above ground level: normally two ties should be used for tree. These should be adjusted or replaced to allow for growth. 5.3.7. Watering The Contractor/Concessionaire through the Landscape Contractor should allow for the adequate watering in of all newly planted trees and shrubs immediately after planting and he shall during the following growing

P a g e | iv

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

season, keep the plant material well-watered 5.3.8. Fertilising Fertilising shall be carried out by application in rotation of the following fertilisers, every 15 days from the beginning of the monsoon till the end of winter: • Sludge or organic well-rotted dry farm yard manure: 0.05 cum or tussle. • Urea 25gm. • Ammonium sulphate 25gm. • Potassium sulphate 25gm. All shrubs, which are supplied pot grown, shall be well soaked prior to planting. Watering in and subsequent frequent watering of summer planted container- grown plants is essential. 5.4. Shrub Planting In Planter Beds All areas to be planted with shrubs shall be excavated, trenched to a depth of 750mm, refilling the excavated earth after breaking clods and mixing with sludge in ratio 8:1 (8 parts of stacked volume of earth after reduction by 20%: 1 part of stacked volume of sludge after reduction by 8%.) Tall shrubs may need staking, which shall be provided if approved by the Contracting-consulting engineer, depending upon the conditions of individual plant specimen. For planting shrubs and ground cover shrubs in planters, good earth shall be mixed with sludge in the proportion as above and filled in planters. Positions of planters shall be planted should be marked out in accordance with the Design drawings. When shrubs are set out, precautions should be taken to prevent roots drying. Planting holes 40cm diameter and 40cm deep should be excavated for longer shrubs. Polythene and other non-perishable containers should be removed and any badly damaged roots carefully pruned. The shrubs should then be set in holes so that the soil level after settlement will be original soil mark on the stem of the shrub. The holes should be back filled to half of its depth and firmed by treading. The remainder of the soil can then be returned and again firmed by treading. 5.5. Grassing 5.5.1. Preparation During period prior to planting, the ground shall be maintained free from weeds. Grading and preparation of the area shall be completed at least three weeks prior to the actual sowing. Regular watering shall be continued until sowing by dividing the area into portions of approximately 5m squares by constructing small bunds to retain water. These 'bunds' shall be levelled just prior to sowing of grass plants; it shall be ensured that the soil has completely settled. 5.5.2. Soil The soil itself shall be ensured to the satisfaction of Environmental Specialist Consultant to be a good fibrous loam, rich in humus. 5.5.3. Sowing the grass roots Grass lines will be used to provide a strong surface cover and will be planted over a well prepared surface. Slope treatments using grasses will be allowed to establish properly such that the slopes are not subject to undue stress from erosion and mass movement in its initial stages. The sowing of grasses will create a strengthened surface that will reduce the vulnerability to erosion. Median with a width of 1.5 m will have only grasses to strengthen the surface. The Contractor/Concessionaire will ensure that the condition of the site is good enough for the successful establishment of grasses. Grass roots shall be obtained from a grass patch, seen and approved beforehand. The grass roots stock

P a g e | v

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

received at site shall be manually cleared of all weeds and water sprayed over the same after keeping the stock in place protected from sun and dry winds. Grass stock received at site may be stored for a maximum of three days. In case grassing for some areas is scheduled for a later date fresh stock of grass roots shall be ordered and obtained. 5.5.4. Execution Small roots shall be dibbled about 5cms apart into the prepared grounds. Grass will only be accepted as reaching practical completion when germination has proved satisfactory and all weeds have been removed. The Contractor/Concessionaire through the landscape contractor shall supervise all field operations like preparation of surface, sowing of grasses and quality of grasses seeds used. • Carry out grassing such that a cover of 25 gm of grass seed per sqm of surface is achieved. • Carry out seed sowing before the onset of monsoon [May & June] so as to achieve the desired results. The watering of the surface will be by tankers till the onset of the monsoon. • Ensure that a mulch of prepared and dried out herbs is laid over the whole seeded area after sowing, in a thin layer, so that the grass is not affected by direct sunlight and transpiration loss. • The grasses recommended for are Cynodon dactylon, Cythoclinc purpurea, Solanum nigrum, Xanthium strumerium etc. 5.5.5. Maintenance As soon as the grass is approximately a 3cm high it shall be rolled with a light wooden roller - in fine, dry weather - and when it has grown to 5 to 8cms, above to ground weeds must be removed and regular cutting with the scythe and rolling must be . A top-dressing of an ounce of guano to the square yard or well decomposed well broken sludge manure shall be applied when the grass is sufficiently secure in the ground to bear the mowing machine, the blades must be raised an inch above the normal level for the first two or three cuttings. That is to say, the grass should be cut so that it is from 4 to 5cms in length, instead of the 3cm necessary for mature grass. In the absence of rain, in the monsoon, the lawn shall be watered every ten days heavily, soaking the soil through to a depth of at least 20cms. Damage failure or dying back of grass due to neglect of watering especially for seeding out of normal season shall be the responsibility of the Landscaping Contractor. Any shrinkage below the specified levels during the contract or defect liability period shall be rectified at the Landscaping Contractor's expense. The Landscaping Contractor is to exercise care in the use of rotary cultivator and mowing machines to reduce to a minimum the hazards of flying stones and brickbats. All rotary mowing machines are to be fitted with safety guards. 5.5.6. Rolling A light roller shall be used periodically, taking care that the area is not too wet and sodden. 5.5.7. Edging These shall be kept neat and must be cut regularly with the edging shears. 5.5.8. Fertilising The area shall be fed once in a month with liquid manure prepared by dissolving 45gms of ammonium sulphate in 5 litres of water. 5.5.9. Watering Water shall be applied at least once in three days during dry weather. Watering whenever done should be thorough and should wet the soil at least up to a depth of 20cms. 5.5.10. Weeding

P a g e | vi

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

Prior to regular mowing the Landscaping Contractor shall carefully remove rank and unsightly weeds. 5.6. Maintenance of Plants 5.6.1. Cultivating The Contractor/Concessionaire through the Landscaping Contractor shall maintain all planted areas within contract boundaries for one year until the area is handed over in whole or in phases. Maintenance shall include replacement of dead plants, watering, weeding, cultivating, control of insects, fungus and other diseases by means of spraying with an approved insecticide or fungicide, pruning, and other horticulture operations necessary for proper growth of the plants and for keeping the sub-contract area neat in appearance 5.6.2. Pruning and Repairs Upon completion of planting work of the sub-contract all trees should be pruned and all injuries repaired where necessary. The amount of pruning shall be limited to the necessary to remove dead or injured twigs and branches and to compensate for the loss of roots and the result of the transplanting operations. Pruning shall be done in such a manner as not to change the natural habit or special shape of trees. 5.6.3. Tree Guards and Protective Fencing According to local environment, shrubs shall be protected adequately from vandalism until established. Where the tree guards are necessary, care should be taken to ensure that they do not impede natural movement or restrict growth. The specifications of the tree guard proposed are given below: • The tree guards shall normally be brick in urban and bamboo guards in rural and semi urban areas. The specifications of the cement guards should be as per the relevant IS specification. In certain cases, if required by the Consultant, Circular Iron Tree Guard with Bars shall be provided. The specifications of such tree guard shall be as per relevant IS specification. The Consultant shall spell out in details about the cases where such exception shall be. In absence of any proper specification the decision of the Consultant and or NH-PWD shall be binding. 5.7. Nursery Stack Planting should be carried out as soon as possible after reaching the site. Where planting must be a necessity and / or be delayed, care should be taken to protect the plants from pilfering or damage from people / animals. Plants with bare-roots should be heeled-in as soon as received or otherwise protected from drying out, and others set closely together and protected from the wind. If planting is to be delayed for more than a week, packaged plants should be unpacked, the bundles opened up and each group of plants heeled in separately and clearly labelled. If for any reason the surface of the roots becomes dry the roots should be thoroughly soaked before planting. 5.8. Completion On completion, the ground shall be formed over and left tidy. 6. SPECIAL CONDITIONS AND PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS. • Wherever applicable, work shall be done according to specifications in vogue, at the time of invitation of tender. • The Plantation area should avoid the stretches within the settlement area and the Ecological Sensitive area. • The stretches identified should be free from encumbrances and should not lead to impact on any private or community asset. No fresh land acquisition shall be made under the project for the purpose of plantation. • Contractor/Concessionaire through the Landscaping Contractor shall make his own arrangement for drawing water from there.

P a g e | vii

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

• The work included in the schedule of Quantities includes grassing as well as planting of trees and shrubs. The quoted rates shall include execution of these works at different levels and nothing extra shall be paid for any item, for working at these levels • The Landscaping Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation for any losses suffered by him and/or revision in the rates originally quoted by him. o On account unforeseen delay in commencing the work, whatever the cause of such delays is. o On account of reduction in the scope of work. o On account of suspension of work, or abandon after award of work. • The Contractor/Concessionaire shall provide all facilities to Environmental Specialist / Project Engineer and / or his authorized representatives to make frequent inspection of their Nursery and ascertain the process / quality of various categories of trees / plants etc., grown by them. • The quote rate shall include the cost of transportation of tools and plants to and from the site, including GST. It shall be clearly understood that no claim for any extra payment on account of GST shall be entertained after the opening of the tender. • The safe custody and up-keep of various categories of plants brought to site is the sole responsibility of the Contractor/Concessionaire and he shall employ sufficient supervisory personnel to ensure the safety of these items. • The site of work may be handed over to the Contractor/Concessionaire in phases, as soon as the same are available and the Contractor/Concessionaire in turn shall work in these areas forthwith. Nothing extra shall be payable for such phased execution of work. • While excavating / executing the work the Contractor/Concessionaire shall ensure that the existing cables / pipe lines / structures / fittings are not damaged and if due to his negligence, these are damaged, the same shall be set right with no extra cost to the clients. • The Contractor/Concessionaire shall co-ordinate his work with other agencies employed by the Clients and ensure that the works of other agencies are not hampered in any way during the duration of contract. • The Contractor/Concessionaire shall keep the site of works neat and clean during the execution of the work. Any debris found at or near the site of work shall be moved immediately as and when so required by the Environmental Specialist / Project Engineer. • On completion of the work, the site of work shall be thoroughly cleaned and all debris removed before the work is handed over satisfactorily. • The Contractor/Concessionaire shall, without any additional charge to the clients, renew or replace any dead or defective plants/grass for a period of 12 months after the certified date of completion. • "General condition of contract and standard contract Forms of shall also form part of the contract. • All Tree saplings should be two years (2) years old before they are planted. The numbers of the plants shall be as specified in the schedule of quantities and shall be straight and symmetrical with a crown and having a persistent main stem. The size of crown shall be in good overall proportion to the height of the tree. • Small trees and shrubs shall be well formed with the crown typical of the species or variety. General requirements of plants • Plants shall be typical of their species and variety, well-developed branches, and well foliated with

P a g e | viii

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

fibrous root system. Plants shall be free from defects and injuries. Plants shall not be pruned before planting. • Plants shall be free from defects and injuries. • Plants shall not be freshly dug and nursery grown. • Nursery grown plants shall have been at least once transplanted • Bark shall be free from abrasion. • All trees, soon after planting, shall be properly supported with bamboo stocks to ensure their safety against winds or any other factor, which may affect it adversely. Protection of "tree to be preserved" • The Contractor/Concessionaire through the Landscaping Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of tops, trunks and roots of existing trees on site. Existing trees subject to the construction damage shall be boxed, fenced or otherwise protected before any work is started. General Requirements of Earth Manure and Fertilisers • EARTH: Good earth shall be agricultural soil of loamy texture, free from kankar, morrum, shingles, rocks, stones, building rubbish and any other foreign matter. The earth shall be free from clods or lumps of sizes bigger than 50mm in any direction. It shall have pH ranging in between 6.5 to 7.5. • MANURE: Manure shall be of well-decayed organic matter obtained in dry state from the Municipal dump or other similar source approved by the Environmental Engineer/ Project Engineer. The manure shall be free from earth, stone or other extraneous matter. Manure shall be supplied, at site well screened. • FERTILISER: If the soil tests indicate pH value not as per the above specification namely in between 6.5 to 7.5, following measures need to be taken. • If pH exceeds 7.5, aluminium sulphate or equivalent fertilizer should be added at the rate of 1 kg per cubic metre to lower the pH by one full point. • If pH is below 6.5, add ground limestone or equivalent fertilizer at the rate of 1 kg per cubic metre to raise pH by one full point. 7. TEAM FOR THE ASSIGNMENT The Contractor/Concessionaire is free to recommend a team commensurate with the requirements of the project. 8. DATA TO BE PROVIDED BY THE CLIENT Client will provide to the Contractor/Concessionaire the map showing settlements and the forest areas

P a g e | ix

Annexure 5.4: Conceptual Drawing for Roadside Signage - Wildlife

Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Draft Environment Impact Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

Annexure 5.4: Conceptual Drawing for Roadside Signage – Forest Area

P a g e | i Annexure 5.5: Traffic Control and Safety during Construction Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

Annexure 5.5: Traffic Control and Safety during Construction

A. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT PRACTICES The traffic on roads has increased manifold and most of the roads are expected to operate at their maximum capacity in the near future. Under the circumstances, the existing methods of maintenance and construction which compromise safety and cause delay are no longer acceptable and a change in work procedures and method has become inevitable. Under the existing method of maintenance and reconstruction, the traffic is invariably diverted over unprepared shoulders or forced to use part of the existing roads under maintenance. This results in the increase in vehicle operating cost and reduction in safety besides causing environmental pollution. Therefore, the existing work procedure and contract conditions are required to be changed to provide for proper management of traffic during the execution of work. The traffic management strategies to be used at traffic control zones must include the following fundamental principles: (i) Make traffic safety an integral and high priority element of every project (ii) Avoid inhibiting traffic as much as possible (iii) Guide drivers in a clear and positive way (iv) Perform routine inspection of traffic control elements and traffic operations (v) Give care and attention to roadside safety

B. TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES The primary traffic control devices used in work zones are signs, delineators, barricades, cones, pylons, pavement markings and flashing lights. The following general rules should apply to all traffic control devices within the traffic control zone. (i) Comprehension: All traffic control devices should be capable of being easily understood. A particular device must convey one and only one meaning. Good and clean condition of the device aids comprehension.

(ii) Visibility and Stability: Devices should be within the cone of vision of the driver and be placed such that it allows adequate time at the average approach speed or the desired speed through the traffic control zone. All traffic control devices should be clearly visible by day and night, at these speeds and under the usually prevailing climatic conditions. They should be kept properly aligned and legible at all times. Foliage or any other obstruction should not be allowed to impede the view of these devices, nor should wind, road dirt or the like be allowed to obscure their face. The traffic control devices must be able to resist the local wind pressure, rain and the vibrations etc. of the passing traffic but these should not act as rigid obstacles in the event of a collision;

(iii) Installation and Removal: All traffic control devices should be installed for the minimum required time. Traffic control devices by their nature are a hindrance to the normal traffic flow and should be removed immediately after the need, being met by these is fulfilled. Existing devices like signs or lane markings should be removed during the temporary works and reinstated thereafter or covered while the temporary devices are in operation. The installation and removal of the temporary traffic control devices and the reinstatement of the pre-existing or new (where the scheme improves the road) traffic control devices must, therefore, be meticulously supervised to ensure the minimum period when there are no signs or markings

P a g e | i Feasibility Report cum Preliminary design for upgradation of NH-158 connecting to Draft Environment Impact Ras-Beawar-Mandal in the state of Rajasthan Assessment (EIA) Report

C. SIGNS The road construction and maintenance signs fall into the same three major categories as do other traffic signs, that is Regulatory Signs, Warning Signs and Direction (or Guidance) Signs. The IRC: 67 (Code of Practice for Road Signs) provides a list of traffic signs. Where possible, the size, colours and placement of sign shall conform to IRC: 67. This also covers signs that are not included in IRC: 67 but are considered desirable to aid drivers’ comprehension of the route through the road works. Each sign should be well located so that its message is seen and is clear, which will be assisted if the surroundings are devoid of “unnecessary” signs and other clutter. These signs should be of retroreflective sheets of high intensity grade or engineering grade depending upon the importance of the road as directed by the Engineer.

P a g e | ii Annexure 5.6: Guidelines for Siting and Layout of Construction Camp

Cumulative EIA- Delhi

Annexure 5.6: Guidelines for Siting and Layout of Construction Camp SITING The Contractor / Concessionaire based on the following guidelines shall identify the location of the construction site. The construction site shall be located: • The construction camps will be located at least 500 m away from habitations at identified sites. The living accommodation and ancillary facilities for labour shall be erected and maintained to standards and scales approved by the Environmental Specialist of Consultant. • On non-agricultural lands, as far as possible • Not within 1000m of either side of locations of Forest areas. • All sites used for camps must be adequately drained. They must not be subject to periodic flooding, nor located within 300 feet of pools, sink holes or other surface collections of water unless such water surface can be subjected to mosquito control measures. • The camps must be located such that the drainage from and through the camps will not endanger any domestic or public water supply. • All sites must be graded, ditched and rendered free from depressions such that water may get stagnant and become a nuisance. (B) LAYOUT A conceptual layout of a typical construction site has been presented in Figure A. The Contractor/Concessionaire during the progress of work will provide, erect and maintain necessary (temporary) living accommodation and ancillary facilities for labour to standards and scales approved by the engineer. All temporary accommodation must be constructed and maintained in such a fashion that uncontaminated water is available for drinking, cooking and washing. Safe drinking water should be provided to the dwellers of the construction camps. Adequate washing and bathing places shall be provided, and kept in clean and drained condition. Construction camps are to be sited away from vulnerable people and adequate health care is to be provided for the work force. Sanitation Facilities: Construction camps shall be provided sanitary latrines and urinals. Sewerage drains should be provided for the flow of used water outside the camp. Drains and ditches should be treated with bleaching powder on a regular basis. The sewage system for the camp must be properly designed, built and operated so that no health hazard occurs and no pollution to the air, ground or adjacent watercourses takes place. Compliance with the relevant legislation must be strictly adhered to. Garbage bins must be provided in the camp and regularly emptied and the garbage disposed off in a hygienic manner Shelter at Workplace: At every workplace, there shall be provided free of cost, four suitable shelters, two for meals and two others for rest, separately for use of men and women labourers. The height of shelter shall not be less than 3m from floor level to lowest part of the roof. Sheds shall be kept clean and the space provided shall be on the basis of at least 0.5m2 per head. Canteen Facilities: A cooked food canteen on a moderate scale shall be provided for the benefit of workers wherever it is considered necessary. The Contractor/Concessionaire shall conform generally to sanitary requirements of local medical, health and municipal authorities and at all times adopt such precautions as may be necessary to prevent soil pollution of the site. First aid facilities: At every workplace, a readily available first-aid unit including an adequate supply of sterilized dressing materials and appliances will be provided as per the Factory Rules. Workplaces remote and far away from regular hospitals will have indoor health units with one bed for every 250 workers. Suitable transport will be provided to facilitate taking injured and ill persons to the nearest hospital. At every workplace an ambulance room containing the prescribed equipment and nursing staff will be provided. Health Care Facilities: Health problems of the workers should be taken care of by providing basic health care facilities through health centres temporarily set up for the construction camp. The health centre should have at least a doctor, nurses, duty staff, medicines and minimum medical facilities to tackle first-aid

P a g e | i

Cumulative EIA- Delhi Vadodara requirements or minor accidental cases, linkage with nearest higher order hospital to refer patients of major illnesses or critical cases. The health centre should have MCW (Mother and Child Welfare) units for treating mothers and children in the camp. Apart from this, the health centre should provide with regular vaccinations required for children. Day Crèche Facilities: At every construction site, provision of a day crèche shall be worked out so as to enable women to leave behind their children. At construction sites where 20 or more women are ordinarily employed, there shall be provided at least a hut for use of children under the age of 6 years belonging to such women. Huts shall not be constructed to a standard lower than that of thatched roof, mud walls and floor with wooden planks spread over mud floor and covered with matting. Huts shall be provided with suitable and sufficient openings for light and ventilation. There shall be adequate provision of sweepers to keep the places clean. There shall be two maidservants (or aayas) in the satisfaction of local medical, health, municipal or cantonment authorities. Where the number of women workers is more than 25 but less than 50, the Contractor/Concessionaire shall provide with at least one hut and one maidservant to look after the children of women workers. Size of crèches shall vary according to the number of women workers employed.

FIGURE A: TYPICAL LAYOUT OF CONSTRUCTION CAMP

P a g e | ii